26 Lighting-Handbook PDF

Chapter 1.
THE LIGHT
1.1.
General remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2.
Wave characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.3.
Frequency spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.4.
Dual nature of light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
LIGHTING ENGINEERING 2002
13
14
Chapter 1. THE LIGHT
1.1. General remarks

It is well known that there are several types of energy: mechanical, thermal, electrostatic and electromagnetic.
If mechanical energy is applied to a body at rest, it tends to set into motion, thus, transforming the energy applied into kinetic energy.
This energy is taken along and is also transmitted to other bodies, in case it collides with them.
Heat is a form of energy which diffuses through convection, conduction or radiation.
When a switch is "turned on", the metallic filament of an incandescent lamp is connected by means of a potential difference. Thus,
electric charge flows through the filament in a similar way pressure difference in a hosepipe makes water flow through it. Electron flow
constitutes the electric current. Current is usually associated to charge movement in bridge conductors, but electric current emerges
from any charge flow. When electric current diffuses through conductors and reaches a receptor, this receptor is transformed into
another type of energy.
If the body or the emitting source irradiates energy, propagation takes place by means of radiation in the form of waves* which are
those physical disturbances which diffuse in a certain medium or in the vacuum.
Mechanical waves diffuse this kind of energy through an elastic material medium. They are longitudinal sound waves because particle
vibration coincides with their propagation direction. Two examples of this phenomenon are vibrations of spring and sounds. In a spring,
vibrations propagate in only one direction. In the case of sound, vibrations propagate in three different dimensions.
Electromagnetic waves propagate the energy produced through oscillations of electric and magnetic fields and do not need a
propagation material medium. For example, the light.
Out of the different ways waves propagate, there are several regimes. From the point of view of lighting engineering, the periodical
regime is the one which interests us. It may be defined as regular time interval repetitions and expressed graphically as several wave
forms.
Thus, wave form represents oscillations as phenomena in which physical quantity is a periodical function of an independent variable (time),
whose average value is null. That is to say, we are talking about simple or fundamental harmonic functions, like the sine or the cosine, of a
single, one-dimensional and transversal variable (propagated perpendicularly to the direction in which particles vibrate). In short, there is a
wide range of physical, electric and electromagnetic phenomena, among which electricity, light, sound, hertzian waves or sea waves are
included. Their characteristics are determined by studying sine waves. This is the reason why the concept of wave radiation and
characteristics to define them is used.
1.2. Wave characteristics

Wavelength ()
It is defined as the distance travelled by a wave in a period. For a transversal wave, it may be defined as the distance between two
consecutive maximums or between any other two points located in the same phase (Fig. 1).
Figure 1. Wavelength .
* Wave: Graphic expression of a periodic variation represented in amplitude and time. Amplitude is the maximum value or ordenate taken by the wave.
15
Wavelength is a highly important characteristic in order to classify the visible radiation spectrum, object of study in this section of
LIGHTING ENGINEERING 2002.
This parameter is determined by the result of propagation velocity (), multiplied by the time it takes to cover one cycle (T Period):
= (m/s s = m)
Frequency ( f )
It is defined as the number of periods that take place in a time unit.
Since period is inverse to frequency,
= 1 , the equation above is transformed into:

f
= (m/s 1/s-1 = m)
f
and, therefore, frequency is directly proportional to propagation velocity, and inversely proportional to wavelength.
f = (s-1 = cycles/second = Hz)

Wavelength decreases when frequency increases.
Frequency is stable and independent from the medium through which the wave propagates. This constitutes an important characteristic
to classify electromagnetic waves.
Propagation velocity ( )
Propagation velocity depends on wave type, elasticity of the medium and rigidity. If the medium is homogeneous and isotropic,
propagation velocity is the same in all directions.
For example, sound propagation velocity in the air, at 20 C, is that of 343.5 m/s, whereas electromagnetic waves propagation velocity
in the vacuum is equivalent to 300 000 km/s = 3 108 m/s.
The fundamental equation which relates propagation velocity to wavelength and frequency is
= f (m s-1 = m/s)
1.3. Frequency spectrum

Given the fact that electromagnetic radiations share the same nature and they all propagate in the vacuum at the same velocity
( = 3 108 m/s), those characteristics that make them different are their wavelength, that is to say, their frequency ( = f).
Electromagnetic radiations are the following: gamma rays, X-rays, ultraviolet radiation, light, Infrared rays, microwaves, radio waves and
other radiations. The human eye is sensitive to electromagnetic radiation with wavelengths ranging approximately between 380 and 780
nm. This interval is known as visible light. Shortest wavelengths of the visible spectrum correspond to violet light, and the longest, to
red light. Between these two extremes are all the colours found in the rainbow (Fig. 2). Electromagnetic waves have slightly shorter
wavelengths when compared to visible light and are known as ultraviolet rays. Those with slightly longer wavelengths are known as
infrared waves. Thermal radiation emitted by bodies at a normal temperature is placed in the infrared region of the electromagnetic
spectrum. There are no limits in electromagnetic radiation wavelength, which is the same as stating that all wavelengths (or frequencies)
are possible from a theoretical point of view.
It must be taken into account that those wavelength intervals (or frequency ones) in which the electromagnetic spectrum divides
sometimes are not well defined and often, they overlap. For example, electromagnetic waves with wavelengths of the order of 0.1 nm.
are frequently named X-rays. Nevertheless, if originated from nuclear radioactivity, they are called Gamma rays.
16
Black light
Ultraviolet rays
790x1012 Hz
DSpectral distribution according to lamp manufacturer
Visible light spectral distribution
Violet
Indigo
Blue
Green - Blue
Green
Green - Yellow
Yellow
Orange
Red
400x1012 Hz
384x1012 Hz
370x1012 Hz
Infrared
300 nm.
320
340
360
380
400 nm.
420
440
460
480
500 nm.
520
540
560
580
600 nm.
620
640
660
680
700 nm.
720
740
760
780
800 nm.
Figure 2. Classification of visible spectrum.

Lamp manufacturers usually give radio spectrometrical curves with values raging between 380 nm. and 780 nm. As we have shown,
apart from the meter, nanometer (nm.) is also used in order to express wavelengths, as well as other units like Angstrom () and micron
(m.).
1 m. = 10-60 m
1 nm. = 10-90 m
1 .
= 10-10 m
Radiation of a continuous spectrum source

All bodies radiate energy in an ample field of wavelength at any temperature except for absolute zero. This radiation is known as
incandescence or temperature radiation. Sources of incandescent artificial light are:
- A flame from combustion, like a candle, oil candle, etc.
- A red-hot ingot or steal bar.
- An incandescent lamp filament, as the most common source to produce artificial light.
Incandescence is applied to types of radiation associated with temperature.
The spectroradiometer is used to know how the radiated potency is distributed between wavelengths. The spectroradiometrical function
or spectral distribution curve obtained is indicated in Fig. 3. Wavelengths in nm. are placed in the abscissas, and values related to energy,
with respect to the maximum radiated understood as 100%, are placed in the ordinates.
17
40
40
20
20
500 nm.
780 nm.
500 nm.
Spectral distribution for a normal day light
780 nm.
60
700 nm.
60
380 nm.
400 nm.
80
700 nm.
80
600 nm.
100
380 nm.
400 nm.
100
600 nm.
Spectral distribution for an incandescent lamp
Figure 3
Radiation of a discontinuous spectrum source

Radiant energy of a gaseous discharge source, such as the ones of high pressure sodium, high pressure mercury, argon, neon, etc.,
consists in a radiation integrated by small wavelength intervals which may be called emission peaks.
Each gas has a wavelength characteristic of its own radiation which depends on the gas molecular structure through which discharge
takes place. This kind of discharge is usually called luminescence and it is characterised by temperature independent radiation types.
The most common luminous sources or discharge lamps are fluorescent tubes: high pressure mercury, high pressure sodium and
induction ones.
As for incandescence, the spectroradiometer is used to obtain the spectral distribution curve. The spectroradiometer function obtained
is indicated in Fig. 4. Wavelengths in nm. are placed in the abscissas, and values related to energy, with respect to the maximum radiated
understood as 100%, are placed in the ordinates.
20
Spectral distribution for a cold white coloured fluorescent lamp
780 nm.
20
700 nm.
40
600 nm.
40
380 nm.
400 nm.
60
780 nm.
60
700 nm.
80
600 nm.
80
500 nm.
100
380 nm.
400 nm.
100
500 nm.
Also, the specific potency in mW/nm.wavelength is usually given in the ordinates.
Spectral distribution for a high pressure mercury lamp

of corrected colour
Figure 4
1.4. Dual nature of light

Light has intrigued humankind for centuries. The most ancient theories considered light as something emitted by the human eye. Later
on, it was understood that light should come from the objects seen and that it entered the eye producing the feeling of vision. The
question of whether light is composed by a beam of particles or it is a certain type of wave movement has frequently been studied in
the history of science. Between the proponents and defendants of the corpuscular theory of light, the most influential was undoubtedly
Newton. Using the above mentioned theory, he was able to explain the laws of reflection and refraction. Nevertheless, his deduction of
the law of refraction was based on the hypothesis that light moves more quickly in water or in glass than in air. Some time later, the
hypothesis was proved to be wrong. The main proponents of the wave theory of light were Christian Huygens and Robert Hooke. Using
18
their own theory of wave propagation, Huygens was able to explain reflection and refraction supposing that light travels more slowly in
glass or in water than in air. Newton realized about the advantages of the wave theory of light, particularly because it explained colours
formed by thin films, which he had studied very thoroughly. Notwithstanding, he rejected the wave theory due to the apparent rectilinear
propagation of light. In his time, diffraction of the luminous beam, which allows to evade objects, had not yet been observed.
Newton's corpuscular theory of light was accepted for more than a century. After some time, in 1801, Thomas Young revitalized the
wave theory of light. He was one of the first scientists to introduce the idea of interference as a wave phenomenon present both in the
light and in the sound. His observations of interferences obtained from light were a clear demonstration of their wave nature.
Nevertheless, Young's research was not known by the scientific community for more than ten years. Probably, the most important
breakthrough regarding a general acceptance of the wave theory of light is due to the French physicist Augustin Fresnel (1782-1827),
who conducted thorough experiments on interference and diffraction. He also developed a wave theory based on a solid mathematical
foundation. In 1850, Jean Foucault measured the speed of light in water and checked that it is slower than in air. Thus, he finally
destroyed Newton's corpuscular theory of light. In 1860, James Clerk Maxwell published his electromagnetic mathematical theory which
preceded the existence of electromagnetic waves. These waves propagated with a calculated speed through electricity and magnetism
laws which was equivalent in value to 3 x 108 m/s, the same value than the speed of light. Maxwell's theory was confirmed by Hertz
in 1887 who used a tuned electric circuit to generate waves and another similar circuit to detect them. In the second half of the 19th
century, Kirchoff and other scientists applied Maxwell's laws to explain interference and diffraction of light and other electromagnetic
waves and support Huygens' empirical methods of wave construction on a solid mathematical basis.
Although wave theory is generally correct when propagation of light is described (and of other electromagnetic waves), it fails when other
light properties are to be explained, specially the interaction of light with matter. Hertz, in a famous experiment in 1887 confirmed
Maxwell's wave theory, and he also discovered the photoelectric effect. Such an effect can also be explained by means of a model of
particles for light, as Einstein proved only a few years later. This way, a new corpuscular model of light was introduced. The particles of
light are known as photons and energy E of a photon is related to frequency f of the luminous wave associated by Einstein's famous
ratio E = h f (h = Planck's constant). A complete understanding of dual nature of light was not achieved before the 20's in the 20th
century. Experiments conducted by scientists of the time (Davisson, Germer, Thompson and others) proved that electrons (and other
"particles") also had a dual nature and presented interference and diffraction properties besides their well-known particle properties.
In brief, the modern theory of quantum mechanics of luminous radiation accepts the fact that light seems to have a dual nature. On the
one hand, light propagation phenomena find a better explanation within Maxwell's electromagnetic theory (electromagnetic wave
fundamental nature). On the other hand, mutual action between light and matter, in the processes of absorption and emission, is a
photoelectric phenomenon (corpuscular nature).
19
20
Chapter 2.
THE EYE
2.1.
Human eye as a light reception organ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2.
Structural description of the eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.3.
Image formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.4.
Eye sensitivity curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.5.
Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.6.
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.7.
Adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.8.
Glare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
21
22
Chapter 2. THE EYE
2.1. Human eye as a light receptor organ

The eye is the physiological organ of sight through which light and colour feelings are experienced. For the lighting process to take place,
as action and effect of illuminate and see, three agents are required:
1) A source producing light or luminous radiation.
2) An object to be illuminated so that it is visible.
3) The eye, which receives luminous energy and transforms it into images which are sent to the brain for their interpretation.
The study and description of eye components, together with the process which takes place since the moment in which light arrives and
goes through the paths and visual centers, until it is interpreted by the brain, would take us to the field of neurophysiology. Some
behaviour and concepts related to the sense of sight will be described and exposed in the present chapter. Their knowledge is
indispensable and contributes to a better design of lighting installations.
2.2. Structural description of the eye

In Fig. 1, a schematic longitudinal section of the human eye is represented, where its anatomic constitution may be observed.
Vitreous humor
Upper eyelid
Yellow spot
Aqueous humor
Ophthalmic muscles
Visual axis
Cornea
Optical nerve
Crystalline lens
Ophthalmic muscles
Iris
Retina
Ciliary muscle
Lower eyelid
Blind spot
Sclera
Choroids
Figure 1. Human eye constitution.

The eye is mainly constituted by the following elements:
a) Eye globe: whose primary function is to form the image on the retina.
b) Cornea: receives and transmits visual impressions and constitutes the eye fundamental optical refractor component.
c) Crystaline lens: is a biconvex, transparent and colorless lens located behind the iris. This elastic membrane changes its form to focus
objectives.
d) Iris: circular lamina located in front of the crystalline lens, and highly pigmented. It can contract the pupil controlling the amount of
light that passes to the crystalline lens.
e) Pupil: circular orifice situated in the center of the iris, and through which light rays pass. The opening of this orifice is controlled by
the iris. Its contraction is called meiosis and its extension, mydriasis.
f) Retina: is the eye inner back film constituted by a nervous membrane, expansion of the optical nerve, whose function is to receive
and transmit visual images or impressions. It contains an extremely thin layer of photosensitive cells, cones and rods, which diverge
from the optical nerve and which are in the external layer, next to the pigmented layer.
23
Chapter 2. THE EYE
g) Cones: photosensitive or photoreceptive cells of the retina which are mainly located in the fovea. They are very sensitive to colours
and almost insensitive to light. Hence, their function is to discriminate fine details and to perceive colours (Fig. 2).
h) Rods: photosensitive or photoreceptive cells of the retina which are only outside the fovea and more concentrated in the periphery.
They are very sensitive to light and movement, and almost insensitive to colour. Thus, their function is to perceive more or less
brightness with which objects are illuminated (Fig. 2).
i) Macule: yellow spot situated in the rear part of the retina, on the optical axis, where a precise and sharp fixation of details and colours
take place. The fovea is in its center which is only formed by cones.
j) Blind spot: a spot in the retina through which the optical nerve drives images or feelings of light to the brain. At this point, there are
no photoreceptors.
Practical consequences of the cone and rod function

When we look at a dimly illuminated space, for example, in the twilight at night, visual acuity is low, because cones do not function and
neither colours nor details are distinguished. This is the reason for the famous saying "no-one will notice in the dark". This type of night
vision is called scotopic and essentially rods intervene, which collect the greater or lesser amount of light and objects movement with
extreme sensitivity.
This justifies the fact that some public lighting of avenues, roads, and department stores is done with high pressure sodium lamps which
reproduce colours badly, but contribute with a great amount of light.
On the contrary, with daily light or when illumination level increases the necessary amount, objects are seen with precision and detail
also cones, mainly. This way, colours may be distinguished. Daily light is called photopic vision. In this case the quantity requires to be
accompanied by quality, since only quantity would produce irritability in eyes and very disturbing glares.
Eye globe
Nerve cell
Pigment grains
Rod
Retina enlargement
Cone
Pigmented cell
Figure 2. Eye photosensitive part. Behaviour of cones and rods.
2.3. Image formation

Human beings visual field is limited by an angle of about 130 degrees in a vertical way and about 180 degrees in a horizontal way.
From illuminated objects or those with their own light located in the visual field, luminous rays emerge that go through the cornea and
the aqueous humor. The iris, by means of the opening of the pupil, controls the amount of light which is refracted through the crystalline
lens to reach the retina finally. In this place, the photosensitive pigment of photoreceptors registers in inverted images much smaller
than in reality, as it happens in the photographic camera. Once images are received and formed in the retina by means of the optical
nerve, they are sent to the brain, which is in charge of interpreting them and modifying their position (Fig. 3).
24
Chapter 2. THE EYE
Figure 3. Image formation and its rectification in the brain.

The following chart compares the human eye to the photographic camera.
Human eye
Photographic camera
Crystalline lens (controls accommodation)
Lens (adjusts distance between lens and film)
Pupil (controls adaptation)
Diaphragm - shutter (adapts exposition and amount of light)
Pigment of photoreceptors
Film emulsion
Retina (creates images)
Film (creates images)

Chart 1
2.4. Eye sensitivity curve

Wavelength radiations ranging between 380 nm. (ultraviolet) and 780 nm. (infrared) are transformed by the eye into light. Out of this
range, the eye cannot see: it is blind and does not perceive anything. All luminous sources have their own radiation or a mixture of them
included within such limits.
A sunny midday white light is the sum of all wavelengths of the visible spectrum. If we try to make them reach the eye independently
and with the same amount of energy, a curve like the one in Fig. 4 is obtained. It has been elaborated by the C.I.E.* measuring a great
number of people.
* C.I.E.: International Commission on Illumination (Commission Internationale de lEclairage).
25
Chapter 2. THE EYE
100
400
Wavelength nm.
500
600
700
%
80
60
40
NIGHT
DAY
20
0
Figure 4. Eye sensitivity curve to monochromatic radiations.
In this curve, the maximum eye sensitivity for day white light (photopic) corresponds to a 555 nm. wavelength and to the yellow colour.
The minimum sensitivity corresponds to the red and violet colours.
Hence, luminous sources whose wavelength corresponds to yellow - green are the ones with highest efficacy and worst quality, the
reason being that such light is not appropriate for our eye, which is accustomed to the sun white light. Thus, in premises where there
is a high illumination level orange and red colours are highlighted.
In the case of night light (scotopic), the maximum of sensitiveness moves towards shorter wavelengths (Purkinje's effect). Consequently,
those radiations with a shorter wavelength (blue- violet) produce greater intensity of sensation with low illumination. Such an effect is
very important when illuminating premises with a low illumination level where blue and violet colours can be seen better.
2.5. Accommodation
It is the eye capacity to adjust automatically to different distances of objects, and, this way, to obtain sharp images on the retina. This
adjustment takes place by modifying the crystalline curvature and, thus, the focus distance by contracting or relaxing ciliary muscles.
Provided that the objective is close to the eye, the crystalline curvature is greater than when it is far. In the photographic camera, the
lens and the film.
Accommodation or focus is easier with high luminances * (lighting) which oblige the pupil to adapt or modify the diaphragm towards a
closing position. The common result of this action is the increase of the field depth, or what is the same, a sharp vision of objects at
different distances from the eye or camera.
The eye accommodation capacity decreases with age, as a result of a hardening of the crystalline.
2.6. Contrast
All objects are perceived by contrasts of colour and luminance which different parts of their surface present among themselves and in
relation to the background in which the object appears.
* Luminance: Luminosity effect which a surface produces on the eye retina, whether it comes from a primary source of light or a reflecting surface.
26
Chapter 2. THE EYE
For high enough lighting levels, the normal eye is colour sensitive, whereas for low lighting ones, objects are fundamentally perceived
by luminance contrast which is present against the background. The luminance difference between the observed object and its
immediate space is known as contrast.
Lo
Lf
Figure 5
In Fig. 5, the surface of the object has a luminance "L0" and the background surface has a luminance "Lf". Therefore, contrast "K" is the
difference between these two luminances, divided by their background one, that is to say:
K=
L0 Lf
Lf
"K" is, thus, a relative value between luminances.

As we have commented, the visibility of an object over a background, depends on the luminance difference between the object and
the background. For a light coloured object over a dark background, its contrast will be positive (values between 0 and infinitum).
However, an object darker than its background will be seen as a silhouette, and its contrast will be negative, varying between 0 and (1).
Contrast K may be positive or negative:
If L0 > Lf
K > 0 contrast is positive (the object is lighter than its background).
If L0 < Lf
K < 0 contrast is negative (the object is darker then its background).
Contrast K may acquire the following values:

Positive contrast (light object)
Negative contrast (dark object)
0<K<e
-1 < K < 0
Example a) in Fig. 6 presents an easily distinguished contrast, whereas b) and c) offer greater difficulty.
Figure 6
There is also a colour contrast. Chart 2 shows some examples.
27
Chapter 2. THE EYE
Object colour
Background colour
black
yellow
green
white
red
white
blue
white
white
blue
black
white
yellow
black
white
red
white
green
white
black
Chart 2. Colour contrasts.
Contrast sensitivity
It is a concept derived from the former one which is equivalent to the minimum contrast of luminances that may be perceived by the
human eye. Mathematically speaking, it would be the inverse of contrast.
G=
Lf
L0 Lf
1
K
Therefore, the greatest sensitivity to contrast possible is approximately:

G=
1
0.01
= 100
However, in normal practical conditions, sensitivity to contrasts is quite smaller because of the reasons exposed above.
2.7. Adaptation
It is the ability of the eye to adjust automatically to different lighting degrees for objects. It consists of the adjustment of the size of the
pupil so that luminance projected in the retina is equal to a value bearable by sensitive cells. If compared to a photographic camera, it
would be the greater or lesser opening of the diaphragm.
If lighting is very intense, the pupil contracts, decreasing the amount of light that reaches the crystalline. If lighting is scarce, it expands
to capture more of it.
In high value illuminations, the pupil reduces to a diameter of approximately 2 mm. In very low value illuminations, the pupil expands
up to about 8 mm.
When a person moves from a place with high illuminance to another which is completely dark, the eye undergoes an adaptation process.
In order to adjust totally to the new situation, the eye needs 30 minutes. The opposite process, when a person goes from a completely
dark place into another with high illuminance, the adaptation period lasts for only a few seconds (Fig. 7).
28
Chapter 2. THE EYE
Relative photosensitivity
100
%
80
60
40
20
10
20
30
40
50
Adaptation time (min.)

Figure 7. Eye relative photosensitive curve regarding adaptation time.
2.8. Glare
It is a phenomenon that produces disturbance or decrease in the capacity to distinguish objects, or else, both things at the same time.
This could be due either to an inadequate luminance distribution or phasing or to excessive contrasts in space or time.
This phenomenon affects the retina of the eye: an energetic photochemical reaction is produced which desensitizes it for a certain period
of time, after which, it recovers.
Effects produced by glare may be classified as psychological (discomfort) or physiological (disability). It may be produced in different
ways: direct glare, like the one from sources of light (lamps, luminaires or windows), which are located within the field of vision. Reflected
glare specially from surfaces with great reflectance, specular surfaces like polished metal.
Sources of light generally give rise to a disability glare which is proportional to the lighting produced by the source of light on the eye
pupil, as well as to a factor dependent on the q angle. Such an angle is formed by both the straight line R which joins the eye with
the F focus and the H horizontal plane which goes through the eye in a working position. In Fig. 8, different glares are indicated,
Glare
depending on the angle function. A minimum value of 30 has been taken as admissible.
10
20
30
40
50
60
Values for the angle

Figure 8. Glare according to the q angle.
29
Chapter 2. THE EYE
Surfaces which are not completely matte give rise to more or less sharp images of their sources of light due to light reflection. Even if their
luminance is not excessive, such images are almost always discomforting when found in the field of vision, and specially, in its central area.
According to these lines, all unnecessary polished surfaces will be avoided as far as possible (glass over tables, for example.). In case semipolished surfaces are used (blackboards), sources of light will have the least possible luminance and their position will be calculated bearing
in mind reflexes that may occur (filters, grids, diffusers, etc.). In special cases, images which provide reflection will be useful (silhouette effect
vision, flaw inspection in polished surfaces, typesetting, etc.).
Figure 9. Surfaces which reflect light.
30
Chapter 3.
MATTER OPTICAL
PROPERTIES
3.1.
General remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.2.
Reflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.3.
Transmmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.4.
Absorption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.5.
Refraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
31
32
Chapter 3. MATTER OPTICAL PROPERTIES

When a light ray propagates along a medium and reaches the limit which separates it from the second one, it may return to it (reflection),
it may strike it and become part of the second medium, where it will be converted into a different form of energy (absorption), and
some will not change (transmission).
Out of these phenomena, two or three take place simultaneously. Following the fundamental principle of energy, the sum of reflected,
absorbed and transmitted radiation must equal the incident radiation.
Therefore, the use of light in the most convenient way requires control and distribution achieved by modifying its characteristics through
the physical phenomena of light reflection, absorption and transmission, without leaving aside the fourth factor known as refraction.
3.2. Reflection
When any type of waves strikes a flat surface like a mirror, for example, new waves that move away from the surface are generated. This
phenomenon is known as reflection.
When light is returned by a surface, a certain amount of light is lost due to the absorption phenomenon. The ratio between the reflected
flux and the incident flux is called surface reflectance
Any surface which is not completely dark may reflect light. The amount of reflected light is determined by the surface reflection
properties. There are four kinds of reflection, namely: specular, composed, diffused and mixed. Reflector systems are based on these
reflection properties.
Specular reflection (Fig. 1): It takes place when the reflecting surface is flat. This kind of reflection is based on two fundamental laws:
1. The incident ray, the reflected ray and the normal to the surface at the point of incidence lie in the same plane.
2. The angle of incidence (i) is the same as the angle of reflection (r).
N
i
Figure 1. Specular reflection.

Composed reflection (Fig. 2): Contrary to specular reflection, there is no mirror image of the light source, but the maximum angle of
reflected intensity is the same as the angle of incidence. This type of reflection takes place when the surface is irregular or rough.
33
Figure 2. Composed reflection.

Diffused reflection (Fig. 3): This takes place when the light that strikes a surface is reflected in all directions, the normal ray to the surface
being the most intense one.
This kind of reflection takes place on surfaces such as matt white paper, walls, plaster flat ceilings, snow, etc.
Figure 3. Diffused reflection.

Mixed reflection (Fig. 4): This is an intermediate kind of reflection between the specular and the diffused reflection, in which some of
the incident beam is reflected and some, diffused. This kind of reflection takes place with non polished metals, glossy paper and
barnished surfaces.
Figure 4. Mixed reflection.
34
Reflecting surface
% reflection index
Gloss silver
92 - 97
Gold
60 - 92
Matte silver
85 - 92
Polished nickel
60 - 65
Polished chrome
60 - 65
Polished aluminium
67 - 72
Electropolished aluminium
86 - 90
Vaporised aluminium
90 - 95
Copper
35 - 80
Iron
50 - 55
Enamelled porcelain
60 - 80
Mirrors
80 - 85
Matte white paint
70 - 80
Light beige
70 - 80
Yellow and light cream
60 - 75
Accoustic ceilings
60 - 75
Light green
70 - 80
Light green and pink
45 - 65
Light blue
45 - 55
Light grey
40 - 50
Light red
30 - 50
Light brown
30 - 40
Dark beige
25 - 35
Dark brown, green and blue
5 - 20
Black
3-4
Chart 1. Reflection coefficient for white daylight.
3.3. Transmmission
Radiation passes through a medium without a change in the frequency of monochromatic radiations. This phenomenon can be seen
on certain kinds of glass, crystal, water and other liquids, and air, of course.
However, when passing through the material, some of the light is lost due to the reflection on the medium surface and through
absorption. The relation between the transmitted light and the incident light is known as material transmittance.
Transmission falls into three categories: spread, diffused and mixed.
Spread transmission (Fig. 5): The beam strikes a medium and passes through it. The media which fulfill this property are called
transparent materials and allow a sharp view of objects on the opposite side.
35
Figure 5. Spread transmission.

Diffused transmission (Fig. 6): The incident beam spreads through the medium, coming out of it in scattered directions. These
transmitting media are called translucent. The most common ones are ground glass and opalized organic glass. Objects situated behind
them appear blurred.
Figure 6. Diffused transmission.

Mixed transmission (Fig. 7): This is a kind of combination between spread and diffused transmission. It is produced with organic,
polished and carved surface glass. Although beam spread is not complete, objects situated behind them appear blurred, but their
position is relative.
Figure 7. Mixed transmission.
36
3.4. Absorption
Process by which radiant energy is converted into a different form of energy, mainly in the form of heat. This phenomenon is
characteristic both of all surfaces which are not completely reflective and of materials which are not totally transparent. The ratio between
absorbed flux to incident flux is known as absorptance.
Absorption of certain light wavelengths is called selective absorption. Generally speaking, objects take their color from selective
absorption.
3.5. Refraction
The direction of the light beam may change when passing from one medium to the other. This is a result of a change in the light speed
of propagation. Speed decreases if the new media density is higher, and increases if it is lower. This change in speed and direction is
known as refraction.
There are two laws of refraction:
1. When the wave goes from one medium to another, the incident ray, the reflected ray and the normal to the separating surface of
the media on the incidence point, are on the same plane.
2. The ratio between the incidence angle sine and the refraction angle sine is a constant for the given pair of media.
The above mentioned constant is known as the index of refraction n, for the given media. The second law of refraction is usually known
as Snells law.
1
n1
n2
2
n1
Figure 8. Refraction in the boundary bewtween two media.

n1 sin a1 = n2 sin a2 c
sin a1 n2
= =n
sin a2 = n1
n1* = angle of refration for the first medium.

n2* = angle of refraction for the second medium.
a1 = angle of incidence.
a2 = angle of refraction.
When the first medium is the air, n1 = 1 and the formula is:
sin a1 = n2 sin a2
The distance D in figure 8 is known as displacement. Such a displacemnt depends on the angle of incidence and on the index of
refraction. When the incident ray is perpendicular to the surface, refraction and displacement equal zero.
37
Refraction varies according to wavelength. Short waves (like blue and violet) are transmitted better than long waves (for example red).
This phenomenon is used to decompose white light into its component colours when passing through a refraction prism. The degree
to which color is decomposed depends on the angle of incidence and the refraction properties of the prism material. This is called
dispersion.
* ni is calculated by the quotient between the speed of light in the air and the speed of light in the medium i.
38
Chapter 4.
THE COLOUR
4.1.
General remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.2.
Colour classification according to the C.I.E. chromatic diagram . . . . . . 41
4.3.
Colour temperature (Tc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4.4.
Colour rendering index (R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.5.
Colour and harmony psychic effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
39
40
Chapter 4. THE COLOUR

Colour is a subjective psycho physiologic interpretation of the visible electromagnetic spectrum.
Luminous sensations or images, produced in our retina, are sent to the brain and interpreted as a set of monochromatic sensations
which constitute the colour of the light.
The sense of sight does not analyze each radiation or chromatic sensation individually. For each radiation there is a colour designation,
according to the frequency spectrum classification.
It is important to indicate that objects are distinguished by the colour assigned depending on their optical properties. Objects neither
have nor produce colour. They do have optical properties to reflect, refract and absorb colours of the light they receive, that is to say:
the set of additive monochromatic sensations that our brain interprets as colour of an object depends on the spectral composition of
the light that illuminates such an object and on the optical properties possessed by the object to reflect, refract or absorb.
Newton was the first one to discover the decomposition of white light in the group of colours that forms a rainbow. When a white light
beam went through a prism, the same effect as that indicated in Fig. 1 was obtained.
Prism
380 nm.
400 nm.
White light
500 nm.
600 nm.
700 nm.
780 nm.
Figure 1. White light decomposition in the rainbow spectrum.
4.2. Colour classification according to the C.I.E. chromatic diagram

Subjective evaluations of object surfaces, in the same way they are perceived by the human eye, are interpreted bearing in mind colour
attributes or qualities. They are the following:
a) Lightness or brightness: Luminous radiation received according to the illuminance possessed by the object. The further from black in
the grey scale, the lighter the colour of an object. It refers to intensity.
b) Hue or tone: common name for colour (red, yellow, green, etc.). It refers to wavelength.
c) Purity or saturation: proportion in which a colour is mixed with white. It refers to spectral purity.
In order to avoid a subjective evaluation of colour there exists a chromaticity diagram in the shape of a triangle, approved by the C.I.E.
It is used to treat sources of light, coloured surfaces, paints, luminous filters, etc. from a quantitative point of view.
All colours are ordered following three chromatic coordinates, x, y, z, whose sum is always equivalent to the unit (x + y + z = 1). When
each of them equals 0.333, they correspond to the white colour. These three coordinates are obtained from the specific potencies for
each wavelength. It is based on the fact that when three radiations from three sources of different spectral composition are mixed, a
radiation equivalent to another with a different value may be obtained. The result is the triangle in Fig. 2, in which any two coordinates
are enough to determine the radiation colour resulting formed by the additive mixture of three components.
41
520
530
540
510
550
560
570
500
580
590
3.200
5.000
10.000
490
600
2.500
800
6.500
24.000
610
620
630
650
700
750
480
470
460
450
400-380
Figure 2. C.I.E. Chromaticity diagram
4.3. Colour temperature (TC )

In the C.I.E. chromaticity diagram in Fig. 2, a curve has been drawn representing the colour emitted by a black body according to its
temperature. It is known as black body colour temperature curve, TC..
Colour temperature is an expression used to indicate the colour of a source of light by comparing it with a black body colour, that is to
say, a "theoretical perfect radiant" (object whose light emission is only due to its temperature). As any other incandescent body, the
black body changes its colour as its temperature increases, acquiring at the beginning, a red matte tone, to change to light red later on,
orange, yellow and finally white, bluish white and blue. For example, colour of a candle flame is similar to the one of a black body heated
at about 1 800 K*. Then, the flame is said to have a "colour temperature" of 1 800 K.
Incandescent lamps have a colour temperature which ranges from 2 700 to 3 200 K, depending on their type. Their fleck is determined
by the corresponding coordinates and is located virtually on the black body curve. Such temperature bears no relation at all with that of
an incandescent filament.
Therefore, colour temperature is, in fact, a measure of temperature. It only defines colour and it can be applied exclusively to sources
of light which have a great colour resemblance with the black body.
The practical equivalence between colour appearance and colour temperature is established arbitrarily according to Chart 1.
* K = Kelvin. Temperatures of Kelvins scale exceed in 273 C the corresponding ones in the centigrade scale.
42
Colour appearance group
Colour appearance
Colour temperature (K)
Warm
Below 3 300
Intermediate
From 3.300 to 5 300
Cold
Above 5 300
Chart 1
4.4. Colour rendering index (R)

Colour temperature datum is only referred to the colour of light, but not to its spectral composition which is decisive for colour
reproduction. Thus, two sources of light may have a very similar colour and possesses, at the same time, very different chromatic
reproduction properties.
The colour rendering index (R) characterizes the chromatic reproduction capacity of objects illuminated with a source of light. The R
offers an indication of the capacity of the source of light to reproduce normalized colours, in comparison with the reproduction provided
by a light as reference pattern.
Luminous sources
Tc (K)
R.C.
Blue sky . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 000 a 30 000
85 to 100 (group 1)
Cloudy sky . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 000
85 to 100 (group 1)
Daylight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 000
85 to 100 (group 1)
6 000
96 to 100 (group 1)
Discharge lamps (except for Na) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Daylight (halogene) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Neutral white . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 000 a 5 000
70 to 84 (group 2)
Warm white . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lower than 3 000
40 to 69 (group 3)
Discharge lamp (Na) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 900
Lower than 40
Incandescent lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 100 a 3 200
85 to 100 (group 1)
Photographic lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 400
85 to 100 (group 1)
Candle flame or oil candle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 800
40 to 69 (group 3)
Chart 2
43
Lamps colour rendering groups

In order to simplify the specifications for lamp colour rendering indexes of those used in lighting, colour rendering groups have been
introduced as indicated in Chart 3.
Rendering group
in colour
Rendering range in Colour appearance
R 90
Intermediate
Cold
1B
Examples for acceptable use
colour (R or Ra)
Warm
1A
Examples for preferible uses
90 > R 80
Colour equalness, medical

explorations, art galleries
Warm
Houses, hotels, restaurants,
Intermediate
shops, offices, schools, hospitals
Intermediate
Printing, painting and textile industry,
Warm
industrial work
Warm
2
80 > R 60
60 > R 40
40 > R 20
Intermediate
Industrial work
Offices, schools
Rough industries
Industrial work
Cold
Rough work, industrial work
with low requisites for
colour rendering
Chart 3. Lamp colour rendering groups.
4.5. Colours and harmony psychic effects

It has been proved that colour in the environment produces psychic or emotional reactions in the observer. Hence, using colours in the
adequate way is a very relevant topic for psychologists, architects, lighting engineers and decorators.
There are no fixed rules for choosing the appropriate colour in order to achieve a certain effect, since each case requires to be given a
particular approach. However, there are some experiences in which different sensations are produced in the individual by certain colours.
One of the first sensations is that of heat or coldness. This is the reason why the expression "hot colours" and "cold colours" is
mentioned. Hot colours are those which go from red to greenish yellow in the visible spectrum; cold colours the ones from green to
blue.
A colour will be hotter or colder depending on its tendency towards red or blue, respectively.
On the one hand, hot colours are dynamic, exciting and produce a sensation of proximity. On the other hand, cold colours calm and
rest, producing a sensation of distance.
Likewise, colour clarity also produces psychological effects. Light colours cheer up and give a sensation of lightness, while dark colours
depress and produce a sensation of heaviness.
When two or more colours are combined and produce a comfortable effect, it is said that they harmonize. Thus, colour harmony is
produced by means of selecting a colour combination which is comfortable and even pleasant for the observer in a given situation.
From all the above mentioned, it may be deduced that a knowledge of the spectral distribution curve of sources of light is necessary to
obtain the desired chromatic effect.
44
Chapter 5.
LUMINOUS MEASUREMENTS
5.1.
Luminous flux (luminous output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.2.
Amount of light (luminous energy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.3.
Luminous intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.4.
Illuminance (luminous level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.5.
Luminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.6.
Other interesting luminous measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.7.
Luminous measurement graphic representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.8.
Luminous measurement summary chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
45
46
Chapter 5. LUMINOUS MEASUREMENTS
Two basic elements intervene in lighting engineering: both the source of light and the object to be illuminated.
In the present chapter, we will deal with fundamental measurements and units used to evaluate and compare the quality and effects of
sources of light.
5.1. Luminous flux (luminous output)

Energy transformed by light sources cannot be totally taken advantage of for light production. For example, an incadescent lamp
consumes a certain amount of electric energy which is transformed into radiant energy. Out of this, only a small amount (about 10%)
is perceived by the human eye as light, while the rest of it is lost as heat.
A luminous flux produced by a source of light is the total amount of light, either emitted or radiated in all directions in one second.
More precisely, a source of light luminous flux is radiated energy received by the human eye depending on its sensitivity curve, and
which is transformed into light for a second.
Luminous flux is represented by the Greek letter F and is measured in lumens (lm). Lumen is the luminous flux of the monochromatic
radiation characterised by a value frequency of 540 1012 Hz. and a radiant power flux of 1/683 W. One 555 nm. wavelength radiant
energy watt in the air equals 683 lm approximately.
Luminous flux measurement

Luminous flux measurement is conducted by means of an adjusted photoelement depending on the phototopic sensitivity curve of the
standard eye to the monochromatic radiations, incorporated to a hollow sphere known as Ullbrichts sphere (Fig. 1). The source to be
measured is placed inside it. Manufacturers provide lamp flux in lumens for nominal potency.
Figure 1. Ullbrichts sphere.
Luminous performance (Luminous efficacy)

Luminous performance of a source of light indicates the flux emitted by this source per unit of electrical output consumed to obtain it.
It is represented by the Greek letter e, and it is measured as lumen/watt (lm/W).
The formula which expresses luminous efficacy is:
=
(lm/W)
If a lamp was to be manufactured which transformed all the consumed electrical output into light at one 555 nm. wavelength without
losses, such a lamp would have the highest performance possible. Its value would be 683 lm/W.
47
5.2. Amount of light (Luminous energy)

In a similar way to electrical energy, which is determined by the electrical output in the time unit, the amount of light or luminous energy
is determined by the luminous output or luminous flux emitted by the time unit.
The amount of light is represented by the letter Q, and is measured as lumen per hour (lm h).
The formula which expresses the amount of light is the following:
Q = F t (lm h)
5.3. Luminous intensity

This measurement is solely understood as referred to a specific direction and contained in a w solid angle.
In the same way that a plane angle measured in radians corresponds to a surface, a solid or stereo angle corresponds to a volume
measurement and is measured in stereoradians.
The radian is defined as the plane angle within an arc of a circle, equal to the radius of the circle. (Fig. 2).
=1
= 1 radian
r=1
(total) = 2 radians
Figure 2. Plane angle.

The stereoradian is defined as the solid angle which corresponds to a spherical cap whose surface equals the square of the sphere
radius (Fig. 3).
1cd
r = 1m.
= 1 Lm
E = 1 Lux
S = 1 m2
1cd
(total) = 4 stereoradians
Figure 3. Solid angle.

Luminous output of a source of light in one specific direction equals the ratio between the luminous flux contained in whatever solid
angle whose axis coincides with the considered direction. Its symbol is , and its unit of measurement is the candela (cd). The formula
which expresses it is the following:
=
(lm/sr)
Candela is defined as the luminous intensity of a specific source which emits luminous flux equal to one lumen in a solid angle per
stereoradian (sr).
48
According to the I.S.*, candela may also be defined as the luminous intensity in a certain direction, from a source which emits
monochromatic radiation with a frequency of 540 1012 Hz, and whose energy intensity in the aforementioned direction is 1/683 watts
per stereoradian.
5.4. Illuminance (Luminous level)

Illuminance or luminous level of a surface is the ratio between the luminous flux received by the surface to its area. It is represented
by the letter E, and its unit is the lux (lx).
The formula which expresses illuminance is:
=
(lx = lm/m2)
Thus, according to the formula, the higher the luminous flux incident on a surface, the higher its illuminance. Also, for the same given
incident luminous flux, illuminance will be higher as surface decreases.
According to the I.S., lux may be defined as the illuminance of a certain surface which receives a luminous flux of one lumen, spread
over one square meter of its surface.
Lighting level measurement

Luminous level measurement is conducted with a special device known as foot- candle metre. It consists of one photoelectric cell which
generates a weak eletric current when light strikes its surface, thus, increasing according to light incidence. Such current is measured by
means of an analogic or digital miliammeter, calibrated directly in lux (Fig. 4).
1
2
3
Figure 4. Foot- candle metre.
5.5. Luminance
Luminance is the effect which produces a surface on the retina of the eye, both coming from a primary source which produces light,
or from a secondary source or surface which reflects light.
Luminance measures brightness for primary light sources as well as for sources constituting illuminated objects. This term has substituted
the concepts of brightness and lighting density. Nevertheless, it is interesting to remember that the human eye does not perceive colours
but brightness, as a colour attribute. Light perception is, in fact, the perception of differences in luminance. Therefore, it may be stated
that the eye perceives luminance differences but not illuminance ones (provided that we have the same lighting, different objects have
different luminance since they have different reflection characteristics).
Luminance of an illuminated surface is the ratio between luminance of a source of light in a given direction, to the surface of the
projected source depending on such direction.
*I.S.c International System.
49
Viewed or apparent surface
Apparent surface = Real surface x cos
Real surface
Figure 5. Surface luminance.

The projected area is seen by the observer in the direction of the luminous intensity. This area is calculated by multiplying the illuminated
real surface by the cosine angle forming the normal with the direction of the luminous intensity (Fig. 5).
Represented by the letter L, its unit is the candela/square metre called nit (nt), with one submultiple, the candela/square centimetre
or stilb, used for high luminance sources.
1cd
1nt =
1m2
1stilb =
1cd
1cm2
The formula which expresses it is the following:

L=
S cos
where:
S cos = Apparent surface.
Luminance is independent from the observation distance.
Luminance measurement
Luminance measurement is conducted by means of a special device called a luminancemetre or nitmeter. It is based on two optical
systems, directional and measurement systems, respectively. (Fig. 6).
The directional system is oriented in such a way that the image coincides with the point to be measured. Once it has been oriented,
the light that reaches it is transformed into electric current. Its values are measured in cd/m2.
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Figure 6. Luminancemeter.
50
5.6. Other interesting luminous measurements

5.6.1. Utilization coefficient
Ratio between the luminous flux received by a body and the flux emitted by a source of light.
c
Symbol c
Unit
Ratio
5.6.2. Reflectance
Ratio between the flux reflected by a body (with or without diffusion) and the flux received.
Unit
Symbol c
Ratio
5.6.3. Absorptance
Ratio between the luminous flux absorbed by a body and the flux received.
c
Symbol c
Unit
Ratio
5.6.4. Transmittance
Ratio between the luminous flux transmitted by a body and the flux received.
Unit
Symbol c
Ratio
5.6.5. Average uniformity factor

Ratio between minimum to medium illuminance in a lighting installation.
c
Symbol c
Um
Unit
Ratio
Um =
min
med
5.6.6. Extreme uniformity factor

Ratio between minimum to maximum illuminance in a lighting installation.
c
Symbol c
Ue
Unit
Ratio
Ue =
min
max
5.6.7. Longitudinal uniformity factor

Ratio between longitudinal minimum to maximum luminance in a lighting installation.
c
Symbol c
UL
Unit
Ratio
UL =
Llongitudinal min
Llongitudinal max
5.6.8. Overall luminance uniformity

Ratio between minimum to medium illuminance in a lighting installation.
c
Symbol c
U0
Unit
Ratio
U0 =
Lmin
Lmed
51
5.6.9. Maintenance factor

Coefficient indicating the preservation degree of an installation.
c
Symbol c
Fm
Unit
Ratio
Fm = Fpl Fdl Ft Fe Fc
Fpl = lamp position factor
Fdl = lamp depreciation factor
Ft = temperature factor
Fe = ignition equipment factor
Fc = installation preservation factor
5.7. Luminous measurement graphic representation

The collection of luminous intensity emitted by a source of light in all directions is known as luminous distribution. The sources of light
used in practice have a more or less large luminous surface, whose radiation intensity is affected by the construction of the source itself,
presenting various values in these scattered directions.
Special devices (like the Goniophotometer) are constructed to determine the luminous intensity of a source of light in all spatial
directions in relation to a vertical axis. If luminous intensity (I) of a source of light is represented by vectors in the infinite spatial directions,
a volume representing the value for the total flux emitted by the source is created. Such a value may be defined by the formula below:
=
!r dr
Photometric solid is the solid obtained. Fig. 7 shows an incasdescent lamp photometric solid.
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
20
40
Figure 7. Incandescent lamp photometric solid.

If a plane passes through the symmetric axis of a source of light, for example, a meridional plane, a section limited by a curve, known
as photometric curve, or luminous distribution curve is obtained (Fig. 8).
52
180
150
120
80
60
40
cd
90
20
40
60
80
60
100
120
140
0
30
Figure 8. Photometric curve for an incandescent lamp.

By reviewing the photometric curve of a source of light, luminous intensity in any direction may be determined very accurately. This data
are necessary for some lighting calculations.
Therefore, spatial directions through which luminous radiation is irradiated may be established by two coordinates. One of the most
C=
18
0
270
C=
rotation axis
"C" planes
frequently used coordinate systems to obtain photometric curves is the C - represented in Fig. 9.
C=
90
= 180
in c
lin
C=
a ti
on
axi
0
= 9 0
s
= 0
Ro
ad
Wa
lkw way
si
ay
sid de
e
Figure 9. C - coordinate system.

Photometric curves refer to an emitted luminous flux of 1 000 lm. Generally speaking, the source of light emits a larger flux. Thus, the
corresponding luminous intensity values are calculated by a simple ratio.
When a lamp is housed in a reflector, its flux is distorted, producing a volume with a marked shape defined by the characteristics of the
reflector. Therefore, distribution curves vary according to different planes. The two following figures show two examples where distribution
curves for two reflectors are represented. Fig.10 reflector is symmetric and has identical curves for any of the meridional planes. This is
53
the reason why a sole curve is enough for its photometric identification. Fig. 11 reflector is asymmetric and each plane has a different
curve. All planes must be known.
900 675 450 225
60o
30o
0o
30o
Unit = cd/1000 lm
C=90
C=45
C=0
Figure 10. Symmetric photometric distribution curve.
320
240
80 0
70o
50o
30o
10o 0o
Unit = cd/1000 lm
C=90
C=45
C=0
Figure 11. Asymmetric photometric distribution curve.

Another method to represent luminous flux distribution is the isocandela curve diagram (Fig. 12). According to this diagram, luminaires
are supposed to be in the center of a sphere where exterior surface points with the same intensity are linked (isocandela curves).
Generally, luminaires have, at least, one symmetric plane. This is the reason why they are only represented in a hemisphere.
280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 C=0 10
-90
-80
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
80
1
5
10
90
-70
80
60 40
70
20
30
-60
60
-50
60
-40
30
-20
-10
GM=0
10
Figure 12. Isocandela curves.
50
40
-30
54
90
20
Imax=100%
This representation is very comprehensive. However, more experience is needed to interpret it.
The flux emitted by a source of light provides surface lighting (illuminance) whose values are measured in lux. If those values are
projected on the same plane and a line links the ones with the same value, isolux curves are formed (Fig. 13).
WALKWAY SIDE
5
30
40
20
80
60
50
70
10
h
5
2h
1
ROADWAY SIDE
3h
6h
5h
3h
4h
2h
2h
3h
Lmax=100%
fl=0.154
Figure 13. Isolux curves.
Finally, luminance depends on the luminous flux reflected by a surface in the observers direction. Values are measured in candelas per
square metre (cd/m2) and are represented by isoluminance curves (Fig. 14).
OBSERVERS: A, B AND C
A
B
6h
5h
ROADWAY SIDE
3h
4h
1
2h
2h
20
30
40
50
60
3h
80
70
50
h
10
2h
3h
WALKWAY SIDE
Roadway R2
Qo = 0.07
Lmax=100%
fl=0.152
Figure 14. Isoluminance curves.
55
5.8. Luminous measurement summary chart

Symbol
Unit
Ratio
Luminous flux
Measurement
Lumen (lm)
F=Iq
Luminous efficacy
Lumen per watt (lm/W)
Luminous output
Lumen per hour (lm h)
Q=Ft
Luminous intensity
Illuminance
Candela (cd)
Lux (lx)
(lx = lm/m )
Nit = cd/ m2
L=
Utilization coefficient
Reflectance
Absorptance
Transmittance
Um
Stilb = cd/cm2
Extreme uniformity factor
Ue
Longitudinal luminance uniformity
UL
Overall luminance uniformity
U0
Maintenance factor
Fm
Chart 1. Luminous measurement summary
S cos
Um =
Ue =
UL =
Luminance
Average uniformity factor
56
(cd = lm/sr)
e
r
min
med
min
max
Llongitudinal min
Llongitudinal max
U0 =
Lmin
Lmed
Fm = Fpl Fdl Ft Fe Fc
Chapter 6.
FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES
6.1.
Inverse square distance law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6.2.
Cosine law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6.3.
Normal, horizontal, vertical and inclined planes illumination . . . . . . . . 61
6.4.
Illuminance ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
6.5.
Lamberts law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
57
58
Chapter 6. FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES
6.1. Inverse square distance law

Since early experiments, it has been confirmed that illuminances produced by the source of light decrease inversely to the square of the
distance from the plane to illuminate the source. This ratio is expressed by the following formula:
=
d2
(lx)
where is the illuminance level in lux (lx), is the intensity of the source in candelas (cd), and d is the distance from the source of light
to the perpendicular receptor plane.
In this way, an illuminance ratio 1 and 2 may be established, between two planes separated by a distance d and D from the source
of light, respectively:
1 d2 = 2 D2
1
D2
= 2
2 = d
S2
S1
E2
E1
d
D
Figure 1. Luminous flux distribution over different surfaces.

This law is fulfilled when we are dealing with a punctual source of perpendicular surfaces to the direction of the luminous flux. However,
the law is supposed to be accurate enough when the distance undergoing measurement is, at least, five times the maximum dimension
of the luminaire (the distance is big in relation to the size of the area of the source of light).
6.2. Cosine law

In the previous section, the surface was perpendicular to the direction of luminous rays, but when a specific angle a is formed in relation
to this, the formula for the inverse square distance law must be multiplied by the cosine of the corresponding angle. Such an expression
constitutes what is called the law of cosine, expressed in the formula below:
=
d2
cos (lx)
59
Illuminance in any given point of a surface is proportional to the cosine of the angle of incidence of the luminous rays in the
illuminated point.
In Fig. 2 two sources of light F and F with the same luminous intensity (I) and at the same distance (d) from point P are represented.
To the source of light F with cos0 = 1 corresponds an angle of incidence equal to zero. This source produces illuminance for the point
P with a value of:
F'
60
F
P
d
Figure 2. Iluminance at a point from two sources of light with different angles of incidence.
p =
d2
cos 0 =
d2
1 c p =
(lx)
d2
Likewise, F with an angle = 60, corresponding cos60 = 0.5, will produce at the same point an illuminance valued as:
p =
d2
cos 60 =
d2
0.5 c p =
1
2
d2
(lx)
Therefore, p = 0.5 p, that is to say, to obtain the same illuminance at point P, the luminous intensity of the source F must double
that of the source F.
In practice, distance d from the source to the considered point is not known, but its height h to the horizontal of the point is. By using
a simple trigonometric relation and substituing it in the equation, a new relation where height h plays an important role is obtained:
h
cos =
p =
cos =
( )
cd=
cos =
h
cos
h2
cos2 cos
cos
p =
60
h2
cos3
(lx)
6.3. Normal, horizontal, vertical and inclined planes illumination

In Fig. 3 the source F illuminates three planes situated in the following positions: normal, horizontal and vertical to the beam. Each will
have an illuminance called:
EN = Normal illuminance.
EH = Horizontal illuminance.
EV = Vertical illuminance.
Vertical
illuminance
M2
I
d
al e
rm a n c
o
N in
m
illu
Horizontal
illuminance
M1
M
a
Figure 3. Normal, horizontal and vertical illuminance.

Let us determine the normal, horizontal and vertical illuminance for point M in Fig. 3.
Normal illumination
The inverse square distance law is applied:
N =
(lx)
d2
where I is the luminous intensity under the angle a. Virtually, only normal illuminance of a point is considered whenever this point is
situated in the vertical of the source on the horizontal plane (M1 point). Thus, the previous formula is transformed into:
N =
(lx)
h2
and also when it is situated in a straight line with the source on the vertical plane (M2 point), the illuminance is:
N =
(lx)
a2
Horizontal illumination
If the law of cosine is directly applied, the result is:
H = N cos =
d2
cos
(lx)
Such a formula may be reformulated in relation to the height h between the F source and the M point (d = h / cos):
H =
h2
cos3
(lx)
61
Vertical illumination
In this case, the law of the cosine is also directly applied. The result is that:
V = N cos
(lx)
Between the and angles, there is a simple relation since both belong to a triangle rectangle.
+ + 90 = 180
= 90 -
Applying trigonometric relations:

cos = cos(90 - ) = cos90 cos + sin90 sin
Therefore, cos = sin. This value is substituted and the result is that:
V = N sin
V =
d2
sin
(lx)
(lx)
The equation may be expressed in relation to the height h between the F source and the M point.
V =
h2
cos2 sin
(lx)
Inclined planes illumination

The vertical plane may change through an angle like the one in Fig. 4. Such an angle forms the vertical plane which contains the
point P with the light incidence plane.
I
h
Figure 4. Illuminance at point P.

Taking this into account, the above mentioned expression is transformed into:
PI =
h2
cos2 sin cos
(lx)
h is the vertical height of the source of light over the horizontal plane which contains point P.
6.4. Illuminance ratio

Different concepts to describe light coming from other directions different from the vertical have been proposed. These must be considered as
comfort parameters together with others like luminous level (illuminance).
Vertical / horizontal
The experience from high illuminance level installations with a very good glare control indicates that the ratio between vertical (EV) and
horizontal illuminance (EH) for a good modelling* must not be lower than 0.25 in the main directions of vision.
V
H
0.25
* Modelling: Ability of light to reveal the texture and tridimensional form of an object creating light and shade contrasts.
62
Vectorial /Spherical
Directional lighting effects may be described partly through vectorial illuminance and partly through the ratio between vectorial and
spherical illuminance.
The illuminance vector at a point has a magnitude equal to the maximum difference in illuminance over those diametrically opposed
surface elements in a small disc (Fig. 5) located in a point, their direction being from the greatest illuminance element to the lowest
one.
Ef
Er
E
Figure 5. Illuminance vector E = Ef Er.
The spherical average at point is the average illuminance over all the surface of a small sphere located at such a point (Fig. 6).
Es
Figure 6. Spherical medium illuminance ES.
Lighting directional intensity may be indicated by the given modelling through the ratio between vectorial illuminance and average
spherical illuminance:
S
If we measure it using a sphere with a radius r which receives a beam of light with an F luminous flux, it would be:
S =
4 r2
Illuminance E of an element of the radius r surface is:

=
r2
j
In a room with a floor, walls and a flat ceiling with diffused reflection, where there is also diffused light, we have that j 0 (that is to
j
say, there are no shadows). Under these circumstances, the modelling index is / sj 0. However, in a completely dark room where
63
j
the light comes from one direction only (for example, sunlight), = (that is to say, dark shadows). Under these circumstances, the
j
modelling index is equivalent to / = / s = 4.
Therefore, modelling index may vary between values such as 0 and 4.
j
Vector must have a downward direction (preferibly between 45 and 75 to the vertical) in order to obtain a natural appearance of
human features.
Cylindrical / Horizontal
An alternative concept to describe the modelling effect is the ratio between cylindrical illuminance and horizontal illuminance at a certain
point.
The average cylindrical illuminance C at a point is average illuminance over a curved surface of a small cylinder located at the point
(Fig. 7). Unless otherwise indicated, the cylinder axis must be vertical.
EC
Figure 7. Average cylindrical illuminance EC.
Cylindrical illuminance at a point equals average vertical illuminance in all directions at such a point. A good modelling is achieved when
the ratio is:
C
0.3 3
H
Generally speaking, direction is automatically taken into account. Therefore, it is not necessary to specify it from an additional point of
view, like in the case of vectorial / spherical ratio: when light comes directly from above, C = 0 and C / H = 0; when light is horizontal,
H = 0 and C / H j q.
Vertical / Semicylindrical
Tests conducted in relation to lighting of pedestrian outodoor areas (low level lighting areas) have proved that the ratio between vertical
illuminance and semicylindrical illuminance provides a useful measure of acceptance of human features modelling, for the mentioned
application area.
Semicylindrical illuminance semicyl at a point in a given horizontal direction equals the average illuminance on a curved surface of a
small vertical semicylinder located at such a point, with a curved surface focused towards the specified direction (Fig. 8).
64
Esem
Figure 8. Semicylindrical illuminance.
Well balanced lighting relief (neither very short nor very intense) is obtained at:
0.8
V
semicyl
1.3
Extreme ratios are:

Zero
very intense modelling.
(/2) = 1.57
very short modelling.
6.5. Lamberts law

There exist emitting or diffused surfaces that, when observing them from different angles, the same brightness feeling is obtained. These
surfaces are called perfect emitters or diffusers.
If L0 is luminance according to the normal and L is luminance according to the observation angle , L = L0 is verified for any given
angle .
Since L0 =
0
S
and L =
S cos
, the equation below is true:

= 0 cos
This ratio is known as Lamberts Law and only perfect emitters or diffusers comply to it.
Lo
L
Io
Surface
Figure 9. Luminance invariability in relation to the incidence angle.
65
66
Chapter 7.
LUMINAIRES
7.1.
General remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.2.
Luminaire classification according to the degree of protection

from electric contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.3.
Luminaire classification according to working conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.4.
Luminaire classification according to mounting surface flammability . 71
7.5.
Luminaire classification according to service conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.6.
Photometric basic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.7.
Luminaire efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
67
68
Chapter 7. LUMINAIRES
General remarks
Due to the high luminance of lamps, it is necessary to increase the emission apparent surface in order to avoid visual problems (glare).
Also, it is necessary to shield lamps to protect them from external agents and to direct their flux in the most convenient way for visual
task.
Thus, different studies and contemporary research place great emphasis on the combination formed by the source of light and the
luminaire.
According to the UNE-EN 60598-1* Norm, a luminaire may be defined as a lighting apparatus which spreads, filters or transforms
light emited by a lamp or lamps including all components necessary for supporting, fixing and protecting the lamps, (except for the
lamps themselves). Should the need arise, also the auxiliary circuits combined with the media for the connection to the power supply.
Main components
Independently from other definitions which could be more or less descriptive, a luminaire may be defined as an object formed by a
combination of elements designed to give an appropriate luminous radiation of an electric origin. Materialization of these elements is
achieved by combining a good formal design and a reasonable economy of materials in each situation.
Formal design solves luminous control depending on needs, which is the main aim: both a thermal control which makes its functioning
stable and an electric control which offers adequate guarantees to the user. Economy of materials provides a solid and efficient product,
an easily installed luminaire, and minimum maintenance while in use.
Regarding the most fundamental characteristic components, body, control gear, reflector, diffuser, and filter among others, must be
mentioned. All of them fall into other classifications shown below.
1. Body: This is the minimum physical element which supports and defines the volume of the luminaire and contains the key
components. According to this criterion, several types may be defined:
- For indoor or outdoor areas.
- Surface or embedded mounted.
- Suspended or rail mounted.
- Wall, bracket or pole mounted.
- Open or enclosed.
- For normal or harsh environments (corrosion or explosion).
2. Control gear: Appropriate control gear would be selected to suit different sources of artificial light, according to the following
classification:
- Regular incandescent with no auxiliary elements.
- High voltage halogene to regular voltage, or low voltage with converter or electronic source.
- Fuorescent tubes. With reactances or ballasts, capacitors and starters, or electronic combinations of ignition and control.
- Discharge. With reactances or ballasts, capacitors and starters, or electronic combinations of ignition and control.
3. Reflector: A specific surface inside the luminaire which models form and direction of the lamp flux. Depending on how luminous
radiation is emitted, it may be:
- Symmetric (with one or two axes) or asymmetric.
- Narrow beam (lower than 20) or wide beam (between 20 and 40; greater than 40).
- Specular (with scarce luminous dispersion) or non specular (with flux dispersion).
- Cold (with dicroic reflector) or normal.
4. Diffuser: This forms the cover of the luminaire in the direction of the luminous radiation. The most frequently found types are:
- Opal (white) or prismatic (translucent).
- Lamellae or reticular (with a direct influence on the shielding angle).
- Specular or non specular (with similar characteristics to reflectors).
5. Filters: In possible combination with diffusers, they are used to protect or lessen certain characteristics of luminous radiation.
* The UNE-EN 60598-1 Norm adopts the Internacional Norm CIE 598-1.
69
7.2. Luminaire classification according to the degree of protection from electric contacts
Luminaires must secure protection of people from electric contacts. Depending on the degree of electric insulation, luminaires can be
classified as:
Class 0: Luminaire with basic insulation, lacking double insulation or overall reinforcement as well as an earth connection.
Class I: Luminaire with functional basic insulation and an earth connection terminal or contact.
Class II: Luminaire with double basic insulation and /or reinforced overall insulation lacking provision for earth discharge.
Class III: Luminaire designed to be connected to extra-low voltage circuits, lacking internal or external circuits not working at an extra-low
security voltage.
7.3. Luminaire classification according to working conditions

The IP system (International Protection) established by the UNE-EN 60598 classifies luminaires according to their degree of protection
from mechanical shock, dust and water. The term mechanical shock includes those elements like tools or fingers that are in contact with
energy transmiting parts
The designation to indicate degrees of protection consists in charateristic IP letters followed by two numbers (three in France) which
indicate the compliance of conditions established in charts 1., 2. and 3. The first of these numbers is an indication of protection from
dust, the second number indicates the degree of protection from water, whereas the third number, in the French system, indicates the
degree of protection from mechanical shock.
First characteristic numeral
Brief description
Symbol
Non-protected.
No symbol
Protected against solid objects greater than 50 mm.
No symbol
Protected against solid objects greater than 12.5 mm.
No symbol
Protected against solid objects greater than 2.5 mm.
No symbol
Protected against solid objects greater than 1 mm.
No symbol
Dust- protected.
Dust tight.
Chart 1. EN-60598 classification according to dust protection degree (1st numeral).
Second characteristic numeral
Brief description
Non- protected.
Protected against dripping water.
Protected against dripping water when tilted up to 15.
Protected against dripping water when tilted up to 60.
Protected against spraying water.
Protected against splashing water.
Protected against water jets.
Protected against the effects of immersion.
Protected against submersion.
Symbol
No symbol
No symbol
No symbol
-m
Chart 2. EN-60598 classification according to the degree of protection from water (2nd numeral).
70
Third numeral of the code

This numeral refers to mechanical shock tests. The following chart shows characteristic numerals accompanied by a brief description.
Third characteristic numeral
Brief description
Symbol
Non- protected
No symbol
Protected against a 0.225 J. mechanical shock
No symbol
Protected against a 0.5 J. mechanical shock
No symbol
Protected against a 2 J. mechanical shock
No symbol
No symbol
No symbol
Chart 3. EN-60598 classification depending on protection from mechanical shock.

Instead of this third numeral, the EN-50102 Norm on Degrees of protection against external mechanical shock provided by electric
material bulb (code IK) may also be applied.
In the above mentioned Norm, the protection degree from mechanical shock provided by a bulb is indicated by the IK code in the way
shown below:
- Code letters (internacional mechanical shock protection):
- Characteristic numerals:
IK
From 00 to 10
Each characteristic numeral represents a value for impact energy, whose correspondance is summarised in chart 4.
IK Code
IK00
Ik01
IK02
IK03
IK04
IK05
IK06
IK07
IK08
IK09
IK10
Mechanical shock in Joules.
0.15
0.2
0.35
0.5
0.7
10
20
Chart 4. Correspondence between the IK code and impact energy.

Generally speaking, protection degree is applied to the bulb as a whole. If several parts of the bulb have different protection degrees,
they must be indicated separately.
7.4. Luminaire classification according to the mounting surface flammability

Luminaires cannot be mounted on any surface at hand. The surface flammability and the luminaire body temperature impose certain
restrictions. Of course, if the surface is non-combustible, there is no problem.
For classification purposes, the EN-60598 Norm defines flammable surfaces as usually flammable or easily flammable. The usual
flammable classification refers to those materials whose ignition temperature is, at least, 200 C, degrees and do not weaken or deform
at that temperature.
The easily flammable classification refers to those materials which cannot be classified as usually flammable or non-combustible.
Materials in this category may be used as mounting surface for luminaires. Suspended mounting is the only option for this type of
material.
In chart 5, mounting classification based on these requirements may be observed.
Classification
Luminaires suitable for direct mounting only on
Symbol
No symbol, but a warning notice is required.
non- combustible surfaces.

Luminaires suitable for direct mounting only
on easily flammable surfaces.
On plaque.
Chart 5. EN-60598 classification according to the mounting surface flammability.
71
7.5. Luminaire classification according to service conditions

Depending on their service conditions, luminaires fall into the following types:
7.5.1. Indoor lighting luminaires

Within this group, luminaires to illuminate premises and facilities in shopping areas, industries, offices, educational buildings,
indoor sports facilities, etc. are found Therefore, this type of lighting tries to give the adecuate lighting for those working or
teaching environments.
Luminaires for general indoor lighting are classified by the C.I.E. according to the total percentage of luminous flux distributed
above and below the horizontal plane.
Luminaire type
% Upward flux distribution
% Downward flux distribution
00 - 010
90 - 100
Semi-direct
10 - 040
60 - 090
Direct-indirect
40 - 060
40 - 060
General diffuse
40 - 060
40 - 060
Semi-indirect
60 - 090
10 - 040
Indirect
90 - 100
00 - 010
Direct
Chart 6. C.I.E. classification for indoor lighting luminaires.
Direct
Semi-direct
General-diffuse
0~10%
10~40%
40~60%
90~100%
60~90%
40~60%
Direct-indirect
Semi-indirect
Indirect
40~60%
60~90%
90~100%
40~60%
10~40%
0~10%
Chart 1. Luminaire classification according to radiation of luminous flux.

In turn, with regards to the symmetric flux emitted, a classification may be considered into two groups:
1)
Symmetrical distribution luminaires: Those in which the luminous flux is spread symmetrically with respect to the
symmetric axis and spatial distribution of luminous intensities. It may be represented as a single photometric curve.
2)
Asymmetric distribution luminaires: Those in which the luminous flux is spread asymmetrically with respect to the
symmetric axis and the spatial distribution of luminous intensities. It may expressed by a photometric solid, or, partially, by
a flat curve of such a solid, depending on certain characteristic planes.
Photometric information which accompanies indoor lighting luminaires

Polar distribution curves
These curves are generally represented in the coordinate system C-. Since there are infinite planes, in general, three C planes
are represented, which are the following:
72
- Plane C = 0.
- Plane C = 45.
- Plane C = 90.
Polar distribution curves are in the cd units per 1 000 lumens of flux emited by the lamp. They are represented in cd/1 000
lm or cd/Klm. (Fig. 2).
C=90
0
C=45
200
100
C=0
300
400
Cd/Klm
80
70
60
50
GM=0
10
20
30
40
Figure 2. Polar diagram in the C- system.

Zone flux diagram
These diagrams indicate the flux received by the surface to be illuminated directly from the luminaire, depending on angle .
This diagram is obtained by creating cones whose axis coincide with the vertical axis of the luminaire. Generating angles with
this axis are angles. The percentage of light collected by each of these cones is the image represented in the diagram (Fig.
3).
100%
80%
60%
40%
20%
GM=0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
Figure 3. Zone flux diagram.

For narrow beam luminaires, a high flux percentage is obtained from small angles. This is the reason why the diagram will initially
show a curve with a great slope for the first angles. From a certain angle onwards, it is virtually parallel to the abscissas axis. This
is due to the fact that almost all flux is distributed in small angles, that is to say, it is concentrated in a small angle range.
73
For wide beam luminaires, the diagram will show a curve with a softer slope, since flux varies little by little, as the angle increases.
Glare diagram
These diagrams are based on the C.I.E. Glare Protection System. Curves representing these diagrams are of luminance limitation.
Such curves cover a glare index scale (quality classes from A to E established by the C.I.E.) and different illuminance values in
standard service.
Two diagrams must be used depending on luminaire type and orientation according to vision.
The required limitation of luminance depends on the luminaire type of orientation, shielding angle, acceptance degree or class
quality, as well as on the value of the illuminance in service.
In Figs. 4a and 4b, diagrams of luminance curves for the evaluation of direct glare are shown. Diagram 1 is for those directions
of vision parallel to the longitudinal axis of any elongated luminaire and for luminaires which lack luminous lateral panels,
observed from any direction. Diagram 2 is for those directions of vision in right angles to the longitudinal axis of any luminaire
with luminous lateral panels.
It is defined as:
- Luminous laterals: A luminaire has luminous laterals is it possesses a luminous lateral panel with a height of more than 30
mm.
- Elongated: A luminaire is elongated when the ratio between length and width of the luminous area is higher than 2:1.
C=90
C=90
C=0
C=180
C=270
C=270
85
GM
8
6
4
75
3
a/h
65
55
45
9 10
G
1.15
1.50
1.85
2.20
2.55
Quality
A
B
C
D
E
6 7 8 9 10 Cd/m
1000
2000
500
1000
2000
=<300
500
1000
2000
=<300
500
1000
2000
=<300
500
1000
Figure 4a. Glare diagrams.
Illuminance values in service E (lx)

2000
74
=<300
500
=<300
Quality
Illuminance values in service E (lx)

2000
A
B
C
D
E
1.15
1.50
1.85
2.20
2.55
1000
2000
85
ab c
500
1000
2000
=<300
500
1000
2000
=<300
500
1000
2000
=<300
500
1000
=<300
500
=<300
h
8
6
GM
75
3
a/h
65
55
45
9 10
6 7 8 9 10
Cd/m
C=0
C=180
Figure 4b. Glare diagrams.

When using diagrams of Figs. 4a and 4b, luminance distribution of the luminaire in two vertical planes must be considered: the
C0 C180 plane parallel to the inner axis. Luminance distribution of the luminaire in such a plane is used to control glare
limitation in the longitudinal direction of the room. Distribution of the luminaire in the C90 C270 plane is used to verify glare
limitation in the transverse direction to the place to be illuminated.
When luminaires are mounted on the C90 C270 plane parallel to the longitudinal inner axis, such a plane must be used to verify
glare limitation in the longitudinal direction of the place, and luminance distribution on the C0 C180 plane to avoid glare
limitation in the transverse way of the place.
For elongated luminaires, the C90 C270 plane is chosen to coincide with (or parallel to) the longitudinal axis of the lamp/s.
When such a plane is parallel to the direction of the perceived vision, it is said to be longitudinal. However, when the C90 C270
plane is in right angles to the direction of vision, this vision is considered to be transverse.
These diagrams are generally used for indoor lighting luminaires.
7.5.2. Road lighting luminaires

Within this section, luminaires for parks and gardens as well as public road lighting are included. The first ones are frequently
installed, as indicated by their name, in parks, gardens, residential areas, etc. The second ones are installed in urban roads,
highways, tunnels, etc.
The C.I.E. has introduced a new system for the classification of road lighting luminaires, thus, substituting the system introduced
in 1965, where the classification was cut- off, semi cut- off and non cut- off. Nevertheless, the old system is still being used in
certain national recommendations for road lighting. In chart 7, the old system is shown.
Type of
Allowed value for maximum intensity
Allowed value for maximum intensity
luminaire
emitted at an elevation angle of 80
emitted at an elevation angle of 90
Direction of
maximum intensity
inferior to
Cut off
30 cd / 1 000 lm
10 cd / 1 000 lm*
65
Semi cut off
100 cd / 1 000 lm
50 cd / 1 000 lm*
76
Non cut off
Any
Chart 7. C.I.E. classification from 1965.
75
195 cd
130 cd
65 cd
65 cd
130 cd
195 cd
195 cd
Non cut- off

130 cd
65 cd
65 cd
130 cd
195 cd
195 cd
130 cd
Semi cut- off

65 cd
65 cd
130 cd
195 cd
Cut- off
Figure 5. Examples of photometric curves accompanied by their classification.

The new C.I.E. luminaire classification, which substitutes the previous one, is based on three basic properties of luminaires:
1. The extension to which the luminaire light is distributed along a path: the throw of the luminaire.
2. The amount of lateral dissemination of light, widthways of a path: the spread of the luminaire.
3. The reaching of the installation to control glare produced by the luminaire: the control of the luminaire.
The reaching is defined by the angle max which forms the axis of the beam with the vertical plane going downwards. The axis
of the beam is defined by the direction of the angle bisector formed by two directions of 90% max in the vertical plane of maximum
identity.
195 cd
130 cd
65 cd
65 cd
130 cd
195 cd
Cut- off
Axis of the
beam
max
90% Imax
I max
0
Figure 6. Intensity polar curve in the plane which contains the maximum
luminous intensity, indicated by the angle used to determine the throw.
Three levels of throw are distinguished as follows:
max < 60
: short throw.
70 max 60
: intermediate throw.
max > 70
: long throw.
* Up to a maximum absolute value of 1 000 cd.
76
The spread is defined by the positioning of the line, running parallel to the axis of the path. Virtually, it does not touch the
furthest side from the 90% Imax on its path. The positioning of this line is defined by the 90 angle.
The three levels of spread are defined in the following manner:
90 < 45
: narrow spread.
55 90 45
: average spread.
90 > 55
: broad spread.
90
1h
2h
90% Imax
3h
4h
Figure 7. Spread.
Both the luminaire throw and spread may be more easily determined from an isocandela diagram in an azimuthal projection
(Fig. 8).
max
90% Imax
90
Figure 8. Isocandela diagram related to an azimuthal projection (sine wave) indicated by

the max and 90 angles used to determine spread and throw.
In Fig. 9 the covering given by the three levels of throw and spread of the luminaire mounting height (h) is indicated on a plane
of the path.
77
Control is defined by the specific index, the luminaire SLI. This is part of the G formula of glare control, determined only by the
features of the luminaire.
SLI = 13.84 - 3.31 . log(I80) + 1.3 . log
( )
I80
I88
( )
0.5
- 0.08 .
log
I80
+ 1.29 . log(F) + C
I88
where:
I80 = Luminous intensity at an elevation angle of 80, in a parallel plane to the axis of the roadway (cd).
I80
= Ratio between luminous intensities for 80 and 88.
I88
F = Light emission area for the luminaires (m2) projected on the direction of the elevation at 76.
C = Colour factor, variable according to lamp type (+0.4 for low pressure sodium and 0 for the others).
55
60 45
70
(90% Imax)
Short
1.7h
2.7h
1h
1.4 h
Intermediate
Long
Narrow
Average
Broad
Spread
max
Figure 9. In this figure, the three degrees of throw and spread defined by the
C.I.E. are shown, where h is the luminaire mounting height.
Control is also classified into three levels, which are the following:
SLI < 2
: limited control.
4 SLI 2
: moderate control.
SLI > 4
: tight control.
In the following chart, the C.I.E. previous definitions are summarised and shown.
Throw
Short max < 60
Intermediate 70 max 60
Long max > 70
Spread
Control
Narrow 90 < 45
Limited SLI < 2
Average 55 90 45
Moderate 4 SLI 2
Broad 90 > 55
Tight SLI > 4
Chart 8. The C.I.E. classification system depending on luminaire photometric properties.
78
Photometric information accompanying road lighting luminaires

Diagrams of polar distribution curves
These curves are generally represented for the coordinate system C-. Since there are infinite planes, usually there are three C
planes represented, which are the following:
- Transverse plane (C = 90 and 270). This plane would be perpendicular to the axis of the road for a road lighting luminaire.
- Longitudinal plane (C = 0 and 180). This plane would be parallel to the axis of the road for a road lighting luminaire.
- The plane in which maximum intensity is found. This plane is generally called main vertical plane.
Polar distribution curves are defined in cd by 1 000 lumens of flux emitted by each lamp and it is represented by cd/1 000 lm
or cd/Klm.
TRANSVERSE PLANE (C=90-270)

320
-90
240
160
80
LONGITUDINAL PLANE (C=0-180)

0
100
200
300
400
MAIN VERTICAL PLANE

0
90
100
200
300
400
90
-80
80
80
-70
70
70
-60
60
60
-50
50
50
-40
-30
-20
-10 GM=0 10
20
30
40
GM=0 10
30
20
40
C=20.0
Figure 10. Polar diagram in the C- system.

Isocandela diagrams
It consists of imagining that the luminaire is in the center of a sphere; in its exterior surface equal intensity points are joined by
a line. Equal surfaces in this diagram represent solid angles. Due to this reason, the diagram may be used to calculate luminous
flux for a given area, multiplying the area by the luminous intensity (bearing in mind the scale in which the diagram is
represented).
If the luminaire is installed with a inclination angle, strokes must be turned around the center in an angle to deduce the new
C- coordinates.
Straight lines from the center represent parallel lines to the roadway axis.
280 290 300 310
-90
-80
320
330
340 350
C=0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
80
1
5
10
90
-70
60 40
80
70
20
30
-60
60
-50
60
-40
50
40
-30
30
-20
-10
GM=0
10
20
I =100%
max
Figure 11. Isocandela diagram in azimuthal projection.
79
Diagram of isoluminance curves

These diagrams are frequently used for public lighting. This is due to the fact that recommendations for public lighting are not
exclusively limited to the average luminance required on the surface of the roadway, but also guidelines for their uniformity (ratio
between Lmax and Lmin) are provided. Such calculations are possible with the help of the isoluminance diagram (Fig 12).
OBSERVERS: A, B AND C
A
6h
5h
4h
WALKWAY SIDE
3h
1
2h
2h
40
50
60
3h
20
30
70
80
50
h
10
5
2h
ROADWAY SIDE
Roadway R2
Qo = 0.07
3h
Lmax=100%
fl=0.152
Figure 12. Isoluminance diagram.

In the diagram, letters A, B and C appear, indicating three positions for the observer which are used in luminance performance
diagrams.
Diagram of isolux or isoilluminance curves
In practice, illuminances on the road surface and their total distribution are intended to be known in most lighting projects.
In order to ease the determination of these data in an installation, photometric sheets provide us with the isolux relative curves
for each luminaire on an illuminated plane.
WALKWAY SIDE
5
30
40
20
80
60
50
70
10
2h
1
3h
ROADWAY SIDE
6h
5h
Emax=100%
fl=0.154
4h
3h
2h
2h
3h
Figure 13. Isolux diagram on the surface to be illuminated.

Values for each isolux line are given in Emax percentages, the highest being 100%. The lattice on which isolux lines are drawn
is measured in terms of the luminaire mounting height h.
80
Under the diagram, a factor for the luminaire in use () is indicated.
Maximum illuminance is calculated by means of the following formula:
max =
.
h2
where:
= factor for the luminaire in use.
= lamp luminous flux.
h = interdistance between luminaires.
Performance in luminances
These diagrams are used to calculate average luminance on the surface of the roadway of a public lighting installation. If the
pavement reflection class is known, the corresponding diagram will be used.
Luminance performance diagrams are drawn in units of luminaire mounting height. Due to this reason, they are very useful for
direct graphic uses.
0.6
C
0.5
B
A
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0
h
2h
3h
270
C=90
180
Figure 14. Performance in luminances with respect to three observers.

Their reading is equal to that of utilization factor curves, except that the observers position is important. Hence, curves are given
for three observers positions: A, B and C.
- A: Observer located on a side of the sidewalk at a distance h of the row of luminaires.
- B: Observer located in line with the row of luminaires.
- C: Observer located on a side of the road at a distance h of the row of luminaires.
81
For other positions, it is necessary to interpolate.

Average luminance is calculated with the following formula:
Lmax =
L . . Qo
w .s
where:
L = luminance performance factor.
QO = average luminance coefficient.
w = road width.
s = interdistance between luminaires.
Utilization factors
In road lighting, utilization factor (h) is defined as the fraction of the luminous flux coming from a luminaire which, in fact, reaches
the road. Utilization factor curves found on the photometric information sheets offer a simple method to calculate average
illumination, which may be determined for a certain transverse section of the road.
= used
lamp
Utilization factor curves for a luminaire are understood as a function of transverse distances, measured in terms of h (mounting
height) on the road surface, from the center of the luminaire up to each of the two curves (Fig. 15).
Walkway side
Road way side
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
2h
3h
270
C=90
180
0.0
Figure 15. Utilization factor as a function of h.

The easiest and quickest way to calculate average illuminance of a straight road of infinite length is by using utilization factor
curves:
med =
where:
= utilization factor.
n = number of lamps per luminaire.
w = width of the road.
s = interdistance between luminaires.
82
..n
w .s
Polar diagrams are frequently used for luminaires in:

- Public lighting.
- Lighting of parks and gardens.
7.5.3. Floodlight luminaires

Within this section, those luminaires designed for installation in indoor and outdoor sports facilities, facades, working areas,
invigilance areas, etc.
A floodlight is a luminaire which concentrates the light in a solid angle determined by an optical system (mirrors or lenses), in
order to achive a high luminous intensity.
Lamps suitable for floodlights range from pressed glass lamps and halogen lamps and even high pressure mercury lamps, metal
halide lamps and low pressure and high pressure sodium lamps. They all have different voltages and each provides a kind and
special type of light, colour effects and efficiency.
Mounting, relamping and cleaning must be done at a considerable height from the ground. Thus, an ergonomic design of the
luminaire is required so that these tasks are easily taken care of.
From the point of view of light distribution, floodlights are grouped in three basic types: symmetric, asymmetric and symmetric
rotation.
Floodlights are also classified according to the opening of the beam, as shown in chart 9. The opening of a floodlight beam (or
beam angle) is defined as the angle, in a plane which contains the axis of the beam, on which luminous intensity decreases to
reach a certain percentage (generally 50% or 10%) of its peak value (Fig. 16).
Opening of the beam (at 50% max)
Description
Narrow beam
< 20
Medium beam
20 to 40
Wide beam
> 40
Chart 9. Classification of the beam opening.
50% I max
Imax
Beam opening
50% I max
Figure 16
For a floodlight with an intensity distribution of light in a symmetric rotational way (that is to say, distribution remains unchanged
independently from the plane containing the axis of the beam under consideration), a figure for the opening of the beam may
be established, for example 28 at both sides of the axis of the beam.
For asymmetric distribution, as that given by rectangular fllodlights, two figures are given: for example 6/24, since the beam
is spread into two symmetric perpendicular planes (vertical and horizontal, respectively). Sometimes, distribution in the vertical
plane of such floodlights is asymmetric in relation to the beam axis. In this kind of situation, two figures are given for the opening
of the beam in this plane: for example, 5 - 8/24, that is to say, 5 above and 8 below the axis of the beam; and, in the
83
horizontal plane, 12 to the left and 12 to the right of the beam.

Photometric information accompanying floodlights
Cartesian diagram
These diagrams are obtained in photometries performed on floodlights, since they provide us with information to be able to
classify them according to beam opening They are generally represented under the coordinate system B-.
Three lines representing the vertical plane, the horizontal plane and 50% of the maximum intensity (line parallel to the abscissas
axis) are represented.
Horizontal plane
Vertical plane
800
700
600
500
Imax/2
400
300
200
100
-90 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Figure 17. Cartesian diagram.

Isocandela diagram
In order to avoid coordinate curves, as it happens with solid angle systems, and ease the reading of coordinates, these are drawn
in a rectangular system.
The angles of C and B planes are on the horizontal axis, and angles on the vertical one.
The diagram may be compared with that of azimuthal projection, but, it must be taken into account that:
- There is no linear ratio between rectangles in the diagram and solid angles.
- The line = 0 or = 0, in fact, represents a point.
84
80
70
60
50
40
30
Planes B
20
10
0
AXIS X
70
-10
50% of Imax
-20
-30
-40
30
20
-50
15
-60
5
10
3
-70
-80
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Beta angles
Figure 18. Isocandela diagram for the B- system.
7.6. Basic photometric data

Luminaire information sheets show a series of diagrams which indicate their photometric peculiarities. In this section two terms
associated to the obtention of such curves are going to be studied.
7.6.1. Photometric center

Most calculations are done under the supposition that luminaires are specific sources of light. Thus, there is the need to search for a
point in space limited by the luminaire which will place the specific equivalent and imaginary luminous source.
For angles close to the nadir, there are virtually no differences between photometric data of the same luminaire given by different measurement laboratories. For big angles, there could be differences, for example 80 and 88, if the photometric center of a luminaire is
not clearly established.
The photometric center is a point of a luminaire or a lamp from which the Law of the inverse square of the distance in the direction of
maximum intensity is best complied. Or what is the same, it is the point where the imaginary and specific luminous source, with the
same spatial distribution of luminous intensities of the luminaire is located. The only goal is to simplify photometric calculations.
The C.I.E. has established in its publications the rules to locate such a photometric center for different types of luminaires.
7.6.2. Photometric coordinate systems

Each and every one of the directions in the space through which luminous intensity is radiated is determined by two coordinates.
On photometric information sheets for indoor luminaires, public lighting and floodlights, representations obtained by means of
three coordinate systems, the most frequently used, are utilized. Such systems are A-, B- and C-.
The C- coordinate system is defined in the C.I.E. publications. However, there is no international agreement on the definition
85
of the systems A- and B-. Tests for obtaining the last two differ depending on the country that conducts them.
When applied to the photometry of these types of luminaires, the reference axis is always vertical and directed towards the
lowest point (nadir).
All systems have a beam of planes with an intersection axis, sometimes called rotation axis.
In each case, a direction in space is characterized by an angle measured between two planes and an angle measured in one
of the planes.
Systems differ between themselves with regards to axis orientation of the intersection in space in relation to the luminaire axis.
To test floodlights, systems adapted to the horizontal axis are used, but their name varies in different countries.
7.7. Luminaire efficiency

Luminaire efficiency is expressed in terms of its Light Output Radio I.o.r.)*. This radio is defined as the portion of light output of the
luminaire with regard to the sum of light individual exits of lamps when they are used outside the luminaire.
The light output radio defined this way is the total I.o.r. of the luminaire, and is equal to the sum of the I.o.r. upwards and downwards.
86
Captulo 7. LUMINARIAS
* The term used in the U.S.A. is luminaire efficiency.
LUMINOTECNIA 2002
87
Chapter 8.
LAMPS
8.1.
General remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8.2.
Thermal radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8.3.
Luminescence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
8.4.
Conditions to be met by lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
8.5.
Incandescent lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
8.6.
High pressure mercury discharge lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
8.7.
High pressure sodium discharge lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.8.
Induction lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
8.9.
Chart with characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
87
88
Chapter 8. LAMPS

In chapter 1, the dual nature of light was studied, and in chapter 2, the process of how visible radiations are manifested in light by means
of vision was discussed.
As it has already been mentioned, light is a form of energy represented by electromagnetic radiation, which may affect the human eye,
and is produced in many ways, depending on the causes that provoke it. If it is due to the radiant body temperature, the phenomenon
is called thermal radiation. All other examples are considered as luminiscence.
Fig. 1 gives a general idea about the main physical agents which intervene in light production and their respective sources.
LIGHT PRODUCTION
Thermal radiation
Incandescent
combustion
Luminiscence
Gas discharge
Solid body radiation
Natural
Sun
Artificial
Flame
Gaslight
Electric arc
Incandescent lamp
Ray
Glowworm
Metallic vapor lamp

Noble gas lamp
Negative glow lamp
Xenon lamp
Luminiscent substance
Luminous plaque
Solid body plaque
Radioactive source of light
Figure 1. Physical agents intervening in light production.
8.2. Thermal radiation

It is the radiation (heat and light) emitted by a hot body.
The energy of this radiation depends only on the calorific capacity of the radiant body. In general, the light obtained is always
accompanied by a considerable thermal radiation that constitutes a source of energy loss when, in fact, light is trying to be produced.
When heating a piece of coal, iron, gold, wolfram or any other material, a visible radiation is obtained. It may be seen in the incandescent
colour acquired by the body and it will vary depending on temperature, as shown in Chart 1.
Temperature C
Incandescent colour
0.400
red - incipient grey
0.700
red - grey
0.900
red - dark
1 100
red - yellow
1 300
red - light
1 500
red - incipient white
2 000 onwards
red - white
Chart 1. Incandescent colours at different temperatures.

All the laws studied and formulated for the ideal radiator may be summarized in a single one: the percentage of visible radiation increases
according to radiator temperature.
As it may be seen in Fig. 2, at 6,500 K the maximum performance is obtained. It would be useless to increase temperature of the
radiator with the intention of obtaining a performance greater than 40%.
89
Chapter 8. LAMPS
50
%
Visible radiation percentage
40
30
20
10
10
5 000
10 000
Temperature
Figure 2. Visible radiation depending on absolute temperature.
8.2.1. Natural thermal radiation

In nature itself, an evident example of light production at a great scale may be found by the thermal radiation offered by the
Sun or other stars similar to it. The Sun is an enormous ball of hydrogen in an incandescent state in which nuclear radiation is
constantly transforming hydrogen (H2) into Helium (He). In the process, enormous amounts of energy are expelled to the
Universe. From the energy emitted by the Sun, almost 40% of the radiation is transformed into visible light, which corresponds
to the maximum optical performance at 6,500 K.
8.2.2. Artificial thermal radiation

Light by artificial thermal radiation is obtained by heating any solid matter or body at a high temperature, either through
combustion or incandescence.
Light of the lighting flame
The oldest thermal radiator in history and also the most primitive one was the lighting flame produced by the combustion of a
lit torch, followed by the oil lamp, the petroleum one and the wax candle, which were the most widely used lighting sources in
the old times.
At the beginning of the 19th century, the mineral coal gas (coal) was used to obtain a lighting flame, instead of the solid
substances used until then (wax, grease) and liquid ones (oil, petroleum). At the beginning, light was obtained directly from the
flame. Later on, through Auer's incandescent mantle.
Electric arc light
If two coal bars in contact, through which electric current is circulating, are quickly separated up to a certain distance, a
permanent and powerful electric arc is produced between its pins.
The electric arc itself only produces 5% of the emitted light. The rest corresponds to the incandescent craters formed in both
coal bars. This kind of arc, whose current intensity is quite high, must not be confused with gas discharge arcs.
Light of an incandescent body in the vacuum
When an electric current circulates through an ohmic resistance, this is heated up and, if taking place in the vacuum, it turns
incandescent. The colour acquired is red- white at temperatures ranging between 2,000 and 3,000 C, in which case it emits
light and heat like a perfect thermal radiator. The first person who put this principle into practice was Henrich Goebel who made
the first electric incandescent lamps in 1854, using empty perfume bottles in which he hermetically sealed a filament made
with carbonized bamboo fibres. However, it was the American Thomas Alva Edison who discovered an incandescent lamp with
90
Chapter 8. LAMPS
a coal filament and gave it a practical utility as a series article in 1879. At the same time as Edison, the british Swan also achieved
a usual incandescent lamp.
The coal filament: Lamps used from 1880 to 1909, had a coal filament composed of coked bamboo or paper fibres.
The point of fusion of this filament was approximately of 3,700 C, but due to its high vaporization index, lamps could also be
made for a temperature in service of about 1,900 C. Thus, luminous performance was not more than 3 to 5 lm/W.
The metal filament: At the beginning of the past century, a search begun in order to find metals that would be able to substitute
the coal filament in a susccessful way. Among metals with a high degree of fusion were osmium, tantalium and wolfram mainly.
Wolfram point of fusion is approximately 3,400 C, with an evaporation index slightly lower than that of coal. The lamp life is
approximately 1,000 hours, the filament incandescence temperature reached 2,400 C and a luminous performance of 8 to
10 lm/W was obtained.
8.3. Luminescence
Those luminous phenomena whose cause does not exclussively obey to temperature of the luminescent substance. Such phenomena
are characterized because only some particles of the matter atoms, the electrons, are excited to produce electromagnetic radiations. In
order to understand such a study, Brhs atomic model must be studied.
Electrone energy ranges
E = Electron
e3
e2
e1
f1
A= Absorption
Weak excitation
Strong excitation
W
f2
= Energy emission
S= Emission
Forced energetic excitation (laser)

5
A S
Stages emission, W heat give- away
Phosphorescence
m = Acummulation level
Figure 3. Bhrs atomic model.
According to this model, each atom is formed by a positive atomic nucleus and by a cover of negative electrons. These are distributed
in different layers that rotate around the nucleus following certain orbits. Usually there is an electric balance in the atom, that is to say,
the number of positive charges is equal to the number of negative charges (electrons). This balance is known as fundamental state of
the electron E, and for electrons in the most internal orbit, it is identical to the base line f (Fig. 3).
If a certain amount of energy is administered to the electron from the outside, electron E is excited and moved from its regular orbit to
the next one or to another more external one. Thus, the energy supplied is absorbed. The electron is located in a superior energy level
(level lines e1, e2, e3, etc. of Fig. 3). After a short time in this level, the electron returns again to its regular initial position (line f of Fig.
3) and emits the amount of energy absorbed at the beginning, usually in the form of electromagnetic radiation.
If the amount of energy is greater, electron E may instantaneously reach a more external orbit. As a consequence of the greater range
of energy achieved, radiation emited when the electron returns to base f will be richer in energy.
Therefore, the different layers of energy correspond to a perfectly determined level of energy, and, thus, there are not intermediate
levels. Thus, it is deduced that in order to excite an atom, an exactly determined amount of energy is necessary. This is emitted in the
form of radiation and/ or heat loss when the atom recovers its fundamental shape.
91
Chapter 8. LAMPS
The emission of energy transformed in this process from an atomic point of view takes place in portions or discontinuous parts known
as energy quants (Bhr postulated that the atom may not rotate at any distance from the nucleus, but in certain orbits only). However,
in the field of practical lighting engineering, light emitted in this tranformation is considered to be emitted in a continuous way, in the
form of electromagnetic waves, which is acceptable for normal cases of its application.
By means of the theory of energy quants formulated by Max Plank, it is proved that different chemical elements, when excited, do not
emit a continuous spectrum due to the different structure of their electronic layers, but only very particular wavelengths (lines) within all
the electromagnetic spectrum. These spectra are known as linear spectra. Each substance has a characteristic linear spectrum and also
luminescent gases like, sodium vapor, whose spectrum is composed by a double yellow line whose wavelengths correspond to 589
and 589.6 nm, respectively.
According to the physical technique used to excite atoms, the type of radiation and the form in which it is emitted, several types of
luminiscence may be distinguished.
Electric discharge light within a gas

In all gases, especially in those contained in discharge lamps, besides neutral gas atoms, some free electric charges are found
(electrons).
E
E
Figure 4. Gas discharge tube.
If a continuous current is applied to the anode A (+) and to the cathode C (-) of the discharge tube (Fig. 4), an electric field
is created between A and C which accelerates negative charges (electrons) and hurries them towards the anode. When an
electron reaches a certain speed, it has enough kinetic energy to excite a gas atom. If the speed of the electron when crashing
against the atom gas is even greater, the impact may even cause the separation of an electron from the atomic cortex, so the
atom lacks an electron in its configuration. That is to say, a positive ion is obtained. This phenomenon is known as impact
ionization. This way, the number of free electrons is even higher. It is even possible that they will increase enormously if the
electric current produced by them is not limited by means of an appropriate resistance (stabilizer).
Together with the free or separated electrons, positive ions may be also found moving in the opposite way of electrons. That is
to say, towards the cathode. Due to their small speed, they may not produce any excitation of other gaseous particles. On the
contrary, after a short period of time, they take an electron again in exchange for an energy emission.
Depending on the noble gas or metal gas with which the discharge container is filled, by means of the previously mentioned
atomic excitation, linear spectra or light colours characteristic of the chosen chemical element will be formed. For example, if
the gas is neon, the light colour is red- orangish, and if it is mercury vapor, it will be white- bluish.
All these phenomena take place within a volume ranging between two electrodes, and it is limited by the discharge container
wall. This volume forms a discharge gaseous column.
If the discharge tube receives an alternating power supply, instead of a continuous one, electrodes change their function
periodically, sometimes behaving as a cathode and some other times as an anode. Otherwise, the luminous production
phenomenon is exactly the same.
Electric discharge conditions for light production in a gas essentially depend on the gas or vapor pressure inside the discharge
tube. So, there are three kinds of discharge, namely:
- Low pressure discharge.
- High pressure discharge.
92
Chapter 8. LAMPS
- Very high pressure discharge.

The higher pressure is, the wider spectral lines, forming even greater bands, so that the chromatic spectrum improves.
Metal vapor lamps need the metal to be vaporized first since it is in a solid or liquid state when cold. This is the reason why
these lamps are filled with a noble gas which is the first one to inflame, supplying the heat necessary for metal vaporization.
High voltage electric discharge between cold electrodes (noble gas tubes)
In order to administer enough free electrons in this type of discharge, cold electrodes are used mostly built with a chromiumnickel metal.
The filling of the discharge tube is with noble gases like neon which emits an intense red- orangish light, or helium which emits
a light pink coloured light and also with metal vapors, especially mercury vapor which emits a white- bluish light, and when
mixed with the neon gas an intense blue light.
Starting and working voltages are high, 600 to 1,000 volts being necessary for half a metre in length. The average voltage
consumption also for half a metre in length is of about 33 W, with a luminous performance of 2.5 to 5 lm/W.
Due to this low luminous performance, noble gas tubes have been barely used for indoor lighting, but they really have played an
important role in luminous advertisement due to their particular easiness to be modelled in the shape of letters.
Low voltage electric discharge between hot electrodes (metal vapor lamps)
If a certain amount of solid sodium or liquid mercury is introduced inside a glass tube previously evacuated in order to transform
metal into vapor through the electric discharge, a metal vapor discharge in gas is obtained. This may be even produced at a
regular low voltage (220 V), with prehated or heated electrodes (hot cathodes). Sodium and mercury vapor lamps work
according to this principle.
From everything that has been exposed until now, it is deduced that light emitted by metal vapor lamps especially depends on
the linear spectrum of the metal vapor chosen. Thus, sodium vapor lamps produce a monochromatic light of a yellow- orangish
light and mercury vapor lamps one of a green- bluish characteristic.
Discontinuous spectra of these lamps are improved through different ways:
Mercury lamps:
- Through combination with an incandescent lamp (blended light lamps).
- Through combination with a fluorescent layer (mercury vapor lamps, corrected colour).
- Through addition of metal halides (metal halide vapor lamps).
Sodium lamps:
- Through combination with mercury light in a metal transparent recipient, at high pressure filling (high pressure sodium
lamps).
Photoluminescence (low pressure fluorescent lamps)

Photoluminescence is fundamentally understood as the excitation of certain substances to luminescence by means of radiation,
usually produced by short wave ultraviolet radiation. The luminescent substances used only emit light while they are being
excited by short wave ultraviolet radiation which is transformed into a longer wave radiation (visible spectrum light).
Luminescent substances used are, among others, calcium wolfram, magnesium wolframite, zinc silicate, cadmium silicate,
cadmium borate, halophosphates, etc.
Each of these luminescent substances emits a certain light colour. By mixing these substances in an appropriate way, any desired
composed light colour may be obtained. If the emission light of each of these chromatic components is achieved to be
superimposed, a continuous spectrum is obtained which may also vary from daylight white to warm white.
Fluorescence are all those luminescent phenomena in which luminous radiation remains during the excitation. The opposite
situation is known as phosphorescence.
93
Chapter 8. LAMPS
Phosphorescence
Phosphorescence takes place when luminous radiation persists in certain luminescent substances even after excitation is over.
This phenomenon corresponds to the fact that under certain energy levels (belonging to certain electronic layers) of some
chemical components, like sulphures, seleniures or oxides of alkali earth metals, apart from this, there is an acummulation level
that prevents electrons from quickly returning to their initial position.
Electrons, that because of their excitation reach this acummulation level, can only in a slow fashion recover their fundamental
state. It is then when the substance continues emitting light. This phenomenon may last fractions of seconds or months
(depending on material type and temperature).
Electroluminance
In order to produce this phenomenon, instead of an exciting radiation, also an electric field may be directly used to rise
electrons at a higher level of energy. This is achieved by inserting a luminescent substance between two conducting layers
and applying alternating current to the group, as for plaque condensers.
This way to obtain light (manifested by a sparkle of a moderate splendor) has been performed in the so- called luminous
plaques to be applied in hospital rooms, building numbering, stair lighting, etc.
Injected luminescence
To a certain extent, it is the opposite case to that of the photoelectric principle, in which photometres to measure light are based.
Whereas there is a luminous energy transformation in the photometre into electric energy (in the form of a minicurrent), on
applying injected luminescence to the so- called solid body lamp of an electric energy, a luminous energy is reciprocally
produced (chromatic radiation). This kind of radiation has a very good application for simple procedures of unimportant marking.
A solid body lamp is obtained by inlay in the net of a semiconductor certain strange atoms, in such a way, that it will remain
divided into two parts, one with an excess of electrons and the other with a defect.
Radioluminescence (light produced by radioactive substances)

In this case, the luminous emission is based on radiation from a luminescent substance with rays which result from the natural
desintegration of radioactive matter, like for example, uranium and its isotopes. This light production principle, the so- called
isotope lamp, is applied which does not need power supply at all to work.
Bioluminescence
Bioluminescence is a luminous phenomenon which is weakly manifested in Nature. It consists of a sparkle emitted by light
worms, some classes of fishes, marine algae, rotten wood and similar. This phenomenon is due to the oxidation process of
some special chemical or organic substances, like the ones glow worms and photogene bacteriae have when in contact with
the air or water oxygen.
So far, it has not been possible to reproduce this phenomenon of Nature artificially.
8.4. Conditions to be met by lamps

8.4.1. Total radiation spectral distribution
For lamps as energy transformers to work with a high performance, almost all the energy absorbed should be transformed into
visible radiation. Besides, their light should be white like daylight and with a good chromatic reproduction which requires a
continuous spectrum containing all main colours from purple to red. But, since eye sensitivity is maximum for yellow- greenish
radiation, the best thing to do, as far as luminous performance is concerned, is to obtain the highest percentage possible of
radiation in the 555 nm zone.
94
Chapter 8. LAMPS
8.4.2. Luminance
Light lamps preferably used outside must not have a high luminance so that their glare effect is kept within bearable limits. The
admissible luminance value depends on the type of application.
On the contrary, lamps used in luminaires may have great luminances, since they trimmer the glare effect. In general, luminance
to be obtained from a lamp depends on the system adopted for light production, that is to say, on the physical nature of the
source of light and on the fact that it may be pointed, linear or plane.
Lamps luminance may never be increased by means of any optical system but it may be weakened, for example by diffusing
layers.
8.4.3. Luminous intensity distribution

Lamp radiation is not equal in all directions in the space. It is affected by the position of the base, the supports of the luminous
body, etc. All this determines that each type of lamp possesses a distribution typical of its luminous intensity.
Luminous distribution curves are essential to project lighting installations, as well as for luminaire design, because their optical
system must be adjusted in such a way to the lamp luminous distribution curve and light is directed to the place or point where
it is needed the most.
8.4.4. Emitted radiation biological effect

Lamps must not emit any unnecessary or harmful radiation for human beings, either immediately or in the long run. With
thermal radiators like incandescent lamps, this condition is observed from the beginning (most of the radiation produced is
infrared). Some gas discharges, mainly mercury vapor, naturally contain a percentage of ultraviolet radiation that may be
classified into:
- UV-A: Sun tanned or long wave (between 315 and 380 nm.).
- UV-B: Anti- rachitic or medium wave (between 280 and 315 nm.). It favours the production of vitamin D in the body.
- UV-C: Bactericide or short wave (between 200 and 280 nm.). It kills germs and organic matter. These effects may increase
due to weakening of the atmospheric ozone layer.
- UV-C: Ozonosphere or short wave (between 100 and 200 nm.). This type of radiation is able to create ozone with the same
characteristics as that of the atmosphere.
The permanent effect of UV-B or UV-C radiations produces burns on the skin and conjunctivitis in the eyes which are not
protected. In general lighting lamps, this may be avoided with the use of appropriate glass classes that absorb critical radiation.
8.4.5. Appropriate colour for each application

The light colour of a lamp is determined by the spectral composition of its radiation. In Chart 2, light groups are established for
lamps used in general lighting:
Light colour
Color temperature
Incandescent-fluorescent
2 600-2 700 K
Warm white
2 900-3 000 K
White or neutral white
3 500-4 100 K
Cold white
4 000-4 500 K
Daylight white
6 000-6 500 K
Chart 2
Whereas incandescent lamps, due to their high content in the power supply (with the exception of coloured lamps), may only
radiate a warm white colour, light colours of discharge lamps are determined by gases or vapors chosen for them. For example,
95
Chapter 8. LAMPS
yellow for sodium vapor discharge, or pale blue for mercury vapor. Other chromatic variants may be used, combining different
metallic vapors or modifying vapor pressure. With fluorescent lamps the possibility of achieving any shade that may be desired
is offered by means of the selection or mixture of a great amount of well- known luminescent substances, in order to adapt
them to each type of application.
8.4.6. Chromatic reproduction quality

Chromatic reproduction refers to the aspect of the colour illuminated surfaces have. Their reproductive quality not only depends
on the incident light colour tone, but also on their spectral composition. Therefore, colour temperature technically refers to the
colour of light, but not to its spectral composition. Thus, two sources of light may have a very similar colour and have, at the
same time, some very different chromatic reproduction properties. Most of the times what is required from a lamp is a good
chromatic reproduction, which means a spectral distribution different from the necessary one to obtain a high luminous
performance.
8.4.7. Luminous flux constants

In practice, it is not possible to maintain the luminous flux value at a 100% during all the life of the source of light, since physical
and technological reasons are against it.
Luminous flux indicated in catalogues refer, as far as incandescent lamps are concerned, to lamps which have not been working
yet, and as far as discharge lamps are concerned, to lamps with 100 hours of working, to which this has been stabilized.
8.4.8. Luminous performance

As seen in chapter 5, the maximum luminous performance to be achieved in the most favourable situation is 683 lm/W.
Although this value may not be reached, nowadays, lamps with a quite high performance have been achieved that allow the
obtaining of high lighting in a relatively economic way.
Nevertheless, in many cases it must be decided which property of the lamp is the most priceless: whether a high luminous
performance or an extraordinarily good chromatic reproduction.
8.4.9. Average rated life and service life

Average rated life is an statistical concept which represents the arithmetic means of the duration in hours of each of the lamps
of a group representative enough of the same model and type.
Service life is a measurement referred to practice, also given in hours, after which the luminous flux of a certain lighting
installation has decreased to such a value that the lamp is not profitable although the lamp may go on working.
8.4.10. Repercussions in power supply

Any modern lamp requires its working not to have an important repercussion in the power supply. With incandescent lamps,
this repercussion is limited to an upsurge in the connection moment, due to its small resistance with the cold lamp. Electric
discharge lamps generally work in connection with an inductance, representing an apparent resistance for the circuit.
This gives rise to obtaining a low power factor (cos ), which means an additional charge for the power supply and it must be
then compensated.
8.4.11. Stabilization of lamps with negative resistance characteristics

Negative resistance is the property some electric resistances have, for example, a discharge arc one, to decrease its value as the
intensity of the current circulating through it increases. This obliges to stabilize current in discharge lamps so that it will not
acquire excessive values that may destroy it. This is easily done by locating inductive, capacitive and ohmic resistances in the
lamp circuit.
96
Chapter 8. LAMPS
8.4.12. Variations in power supply

Variations in power supply influence the lighting engineering data of any lamp. In incandescent lamps, they affect duration and
colour temperature very much, and in discharge ones, relations of arc pressure and also discharge conditions.
8.4.13. Time needed until the luminous flux acquires the normal regime
Incandescent lamps ignite immediataly emiting their total flux. Fluorescent lamps may also do it if quick ignition starters are used.
If not, ignition will be done later on, after one or several attempts.
The other discharge lamps require some minutes as ignition time, until metal vapor acquires the necessary pressure and the
luminous flux reaches it maximum value.
8.4.14. Possibility of immediate reignition

It is the possibility that a lamp, after having been turned off, will be immediately reignited while still hot with full emission of the
luminous flux. This condition is only met by incandescent lamps, metal vapor ones present certain differences regarding their
immediate reignition possibility, as indicated below:
- High pressure mercury lamps: They need some time (minutes) for cooling down before reignition while still hot, and
some more time to reach the total luminous flux.
- Metal halide lamps: They behave exactly like mercury ones. There are some types which may reignite while still hot
by means of special devices.
- High pressure sodium lamps: Those types which have a separated ignition device reignite while still hot within a
minute and reach their total flux virtually with no delay. Other types without a separate ignition device behave in a
similar fashion as mercury lamps.
- Low pressure sodium lamps: They behave like mercury lamps.
8.4.15. Stroboscopic effect

In all artificial sources of light which work with alternating current their emission stops every time current goes through the zero
point. This takes place twice per period, so for a 50 Hz. frequency (periods per second) corresponds 100 instants of darkness
per second. The filament of incandescent lamps has a lot of thermal inertia. Thus, a slight descend of luminous emission takes
place due to such a reason. This is not perceived by the eye except when low power lamps work with a 25 Hz voltage.
For discharge lamps working with 50 Hz. voltages, the eye is not able to appreciate such quick light variations which are
produced. It may be the case, too, that lamps illuminate zones in which rapid movements are made, these being observed as
if they were made intermittently or even as if they were stationary. This phenomenon is known as the stroboscopic effect and
it may be reduced to make it unobservable by means of a lamp special power supply mounting, or wherever a three- phased
line is available, distributing its connection between the three phases.
8.4.16. Working position

An electric lamp is generally made for a certain working position in which it has optimal working properties. Outside this position,
properties worsen, either by an excess of heating of the spiral, the base or the glass outer bulb, by deviation of the discharge
lamp arc or by variations of the surrounding heat. This is the reason why tolerances given in the corresponding lamp catalogues
must be accepted in order to avoid their premature depletion because of an inadequate working position. Abbreviations used
indicate the main working positions and the admissible tilt angle in degrees.
Main working positions:
S (s) = Vertical (standing, base downwards).
H (h) = Vertical (hanging, base upwards).
P (p) = Horizontal (base sideways).
97
Chapter 8. LAMPS
HS (hs) = Vertical (base upwards or sideways).

Universal = Allows any position.
Admissible tilt angles: After the main working position, there is a figure that indicates the admissible tilt in degrees in relation to it.
20
45
60
45
p 20
p 45
p 60
h 45
150
110
30
h 110
h 150
hs 30
NON admissible position
Admissible position
Figure 5. Working position sketch.
98
45
hs 45
Chapter 8. LAMPS
8.5. Incandescent lamps

As it has been said before, the incandescent lamp is the oldest source of electric light and, nowadays, the most commonly used one. It
is also the one that possesses the widest variety of alternatives and it may be found in almost all installations, specially when a low
luminous flux is required. A relatively recent discovery is the halogene incandescent wolfram lamp, which has quickly dominated many
lighting application areas.
8.5.1. Conventional incandescent lamps

Incandescent lamps produce light through the electric heating of a wire (the filament) at a high temperature, emitting radiation
within the visible field of the spectrum.
Base
Filament
Filling gas
Figure 6. Conventional incandescent lamp.
The main parts of an incandescent lamp are the filament, the filament supports, the glass bulb, the filling gas and the base.
Filament: The one used in modern lamps is made out of wolfram (high fusion point and low evaporation degree). A higher
luminous efficiency would be achieved by twisting the filament as an spiral.
Glass bulb: It is a cover of sealed glass which encloses the filament and avoids contact with the air outside (so that it does not
burn).
Filling gas: Filament evaporation is reduced filling the glass bulb with an inert gas. The most commonly used gases are argon
and nitrogen. In these lamps, luminous energy obtained is very little compared to the heat energy irradiated, that is to say, a
great amount of the transformed electric energy is lost as heat and its luminous efficacy is small (it is a waste- energy lamp).
The advantage of these lamps is that they are directly connected to the electric current without the need of an auxiliary
equipment for their working.
8.5.2. Wolfram halogen lamps

The high temperature of the filament for a normal incandescent lamp makes wolfram particles to evaporate and condense on
the wall of the glass bulb, darkening this, as a result. Halogen lamps have a halogen component (iodine, chlorine, bromine),
added to the filling gas and work with the halogen regenerative cycle to prevent darkening.
The evaporated wolfram is combined with the halogene to form a halogene wolfram compose. As opposed to wolfram vapor,
it is maintained in the form of gas, the glass bulb temperature being high enough as to prevent condensation. When such a gas
approaches the incandescent filament, it is decomposed due to the high temperature in wolfram that is again deposited in the
filament, and in halogene, which continues with its task within the regenerative cycle (Fig. 7).
99
Chapter 8. LAMPS
Temperature lower than 1 400 C

Temperature higher than 1 400 C
Halogenes
Tungsten filament
Tungstene particles
Tungsten halide
Glass bulb
Figure 7. Halogene cycle.
The main difference between an incandescent lamp, apart from the halogene additive mentioned before, is in the glass bulb.
Due to the fact that temperature of the glass bulb must be high, halogene lamps are of a smaller size than regular incandescent
lamps. Their tubular- shaped glass bulb is made out of a special quartz glass (which must not be touched with the fingers).
Since their introduction, wolfram halogene lamps have entered almost all applications where incandescent lamps were used.
The advantages of wolfram halogene lamps with regard to regular incandescent lamps are the following: longer duration, greater
luminous efficiency, smaller size, greater colour temperature and little or no luminous depreciation in time.
8.6. High pressure mercury discharge lamps

In this section, discharge lamps in whose discharge tube mercury is introduced, are going to be studied. Fluorescent lamps, compact
fluorescent lamps, high pressure mercury lamps, blended light lamps and metal halogene lamps are included.
8.6.1. Fluorescent tubes

Fluorescent tubes are a low pressure mercury discharge lamp in which light is produced predominantly through fluorescent
powder activated by the discharge ultraviolet energy.
The lamp, generally with a long tubular- shaped glass bulb and a sealed electrode for each terminal, contains low pressure
mercury and a small amount of inter gas for ignition and arc regulation. The glass bulb inner surface is covered by a luminiscent
substance (fluorescent powder or phosphorous) whose composition determines the amount of emitted light and the lamp
colour temperature).
Fluorescent coat (luminophorous).
Lamp holder
Wolfram electrodes
with electron emitting matter
Visible light
Free electron
1
2
Ultraviolet
radiations
Argon and mercury

atmosphere
Mercury
atom
Transparent glass tube

Length
Figure 8. Fluorescent lamp.
100
Chapter 8. LAMPS
The main parts of the fluorescent lamp are the glass tube, the fluorescent layer, the electrodes, the filling gas and the base.
Glass tube: The glass tube of a regular fluorescent lamp is made out of sodium- calcium glass softened with iron oxide to control
short wave ultraviolet transmission.
Fluorescent covering: The most important factor to determine the characteristics of the light of a fluorescent lamp is the type
and composition of the fluorescent powder (or phosphorous) used. This establishes colour temperature (and, as a
consequence, colour appearance), colour reproduction index (R) and, lamp luminous efficiency, to a great extent.
Three groups of phosphorous are used to produce different series of lamps with different colour qualities (standard
phosphorous, tri- phosphorous and multi- phosphorous).
Electrodes: Electrodes of a lamp which possesses an adequate layer of material emitter serve to drive electric energy to the
lamp and provide the necessary electrons to maintain discharge.
The majority of fluorescent tubes have electrodes that are preheated by means of an electrical current just before ignition (they
are given the name of preheating electrode lamps; this preheating is begun by an independent starter).
Filling gas: Filling gas of a fluorescent lamp consists in a mixture of saturated mercury and an inert gas trimmer (argon and
krypton).
Under normal working conditions, mercury is found in the discharge tube both as a liquid and as vapor. The best performance
is achieved with a mercury pressure of about 0.8 Pa., combined with a pressure of the trimmer of about 2 500 Pa. (0.025
atmospheres). Under these conditions, about 90% of the radiated energy is emitted in the ultraviolet wave of 253.7 nm.
In fluorescent lamps, colour temperature ranges between 2 700 K and 6 500 K., with a discontinuous spectral distribution curve
reproducing colours depending on the composition of the fluorescent substance that covers the inner wall of the tube.
Each resulting total luminous radiation is the sum of the radiation of discontinuous spectrum plus that of a continuous spectral
distribution, more efficient each time, with the use of special phosphorous.
Thus, fluorescent tubes with several light tones and chromatic reproduction indexes are manufactured. According to the C.I.E.
norms, these are divided into three main groups:
- Daytime white light: TC > 5 000 K.
- Neutral white: 5.000 K TC 3 000 K.
- Warm white: TC < 3 000 K.
There are several tones for each group, with a wide range of colour temperatures and chromatic reproduction indexes,
depending on each manufacturer. These cover the needs for a wide range of applications.
These lamps require an auxiliary equipment formed by a ballast and an igniter (starter), besides a compensation condenser to
improve the power factor.
Working nominal values are reached after five minutes. When the lamp is turned off, due to a great pressure in the burner, it is
necessary to cool down between four and fifteen minutes before it is turned back on.
8.6.2. High pressure mercury lamps

Since their introduction, high pressure mercury lamps have been developed to a point that lighting technology cannot be
thought of without it.
In these lamps, discharge takes place in a quartz discharge tube containing a small amount of mercury and an inert gas filling,
usually argon, to help ignition. One part of the discharge radiation occurs in the visible region of the spectrum as light, but some
part is also emitted in the ultraviolet one. Covering the inner surface of the blister, in which the discharge tube is located, with
a fluorescent powder which will transform this ultraviolet radiation into visible radiation. The lamp will offer higher lighting than
a similar version without such a layer.
Working principles
When the working of the high pressure mercury lamp is examined, three well differentiated phases must be distinguished:
ignition, turn-on and stabilization.
101
Chapter 8. LAMPS
Ignition
Ignition is achieved by means of an auxiliary electrode, placed very close to the main electrode and connected to the other
through a high value resistance (25 k ). When the lamp is turned on, a high voltage gradient takes place between the main
and the ignition electrodes, which ionizes the filling gas in this area as a luminescent discharge, the current being limited by a
resistance. Luminescent discharge is then expanded through the discharge tube under the influence of the electric field between
the two main electrodes.
When luminescent discharge reaches the most distant electrode, current increases in a considerable way. As a result, the main
electrodes are heated until the emission increases enough to allow the luminescent discharge to change completely to an arch
discharge. The auxiliary electrode lacks another function in the process as a consequence of the high resistance connected
serially to it.
During this stage, the lamp works as a low pressure discharge (similar to that of a fluorescent lamp). The discharge fills the tube
and gives it a bluish appearance. la corriente limitada por una resistencia. La descarga luminiscente luego se expande por todo
el tubo de descarga bajo la influencia del campo elctrico entre los dos electrodos principales.
Turn- on
The inert gas having been ionized, yet, the lamp does not burn in the desired way and does not offer its maximum production
of light, until mercury present in the discharge tube is completely vaporized. This does not happen until a certain amount of
time has elapsed, called turn-on time.
As a result of the arch discharge in the inert gas a heating is generated providing a quick increase of temperature inside the
discharge tube. This causes mercury gradual vaporization, increasing vapor pressure and concentrating discharge towards a
narrow band along the axis of the tube. With an increase in pressure, radiated energy progressively concentrates along the
spectral lines of greater wavelengths and a small portion of continuous radiation is introduced. This way, light turns whiter. With
time, the arc achieves a stabilization point and it is said that the lamp reaches the total thermodynamic balance point. All mercury
is then evaporated, and discharge occurs in non- saturated mercury vapor.
The turn- on time, defined as the necessary time for the lamp since the ignition moment to reach an 80% of its maximum
production of light, is approximately four minutes.
Stabilization
The high pressure mercury lamp, like most discharge lamps, has a negative resistance and, thus, it cannot work on its own in a
circuit without an adequate ballast to stabilize the flux of the current through it.
Main parts
In Fig. 9 the main parts of a high pressure mercury lamp may be observed.
Base
Wire beam lead
Hard glass ovaloidal glass

bulb
Ohmic resistance for each
auxiliary electrode in series
Fluorescent substance
Low pressure inert gas filling
Auxiliary electrodes
Discharge tube
Principal electrodes
Support
Wire beam lead
Figure 9. High pressure mercury lamp.
102
Chapter 8. LAMPS
Discharge and support tube: The discharge tube is made out of quartz. It has a low absorption of ultraviolet and visible radiation.
Also, it stands high temperatures of the work involved.
Electrodes: Each main electrode is composed of a wolfram bar, whose extreme is covered by wolfram serpentine impregnated
with a material that favors the emission of electrons. The auxiliary electrode is simply a piece of wire of molybdenum or wolfram
located near one of the main electrodes and connected to another one by means of a resistance of 25 k .
Blister: For lamps up to 125 W of potency, the blister may be of glass sodium- calcium. However, lamps with higher potencies
are manufactured, generally, with hard glass of borosilicate, since higher working temperatures and thermal shock are tolerated.
The blister, which normally contains an inert gas (argon or a mixture of argon and nitrogen), protects the discharge tube from
changes in the room temperature and protects lamp components from corrosion.
Glass covering: In most high pressure mercury lamps, the inner surface of the blister is covered by white phosphorous to
improve lamp colour reproduction and to increase its luminous flux. Phosphorous transforms a great amount of ultraviolet
energy radiated by the discharge into visible radiation, predominantly in the red extreme of the spectrum.
Gas filling: The discharge tube is filled with an inert gas (argon) and a precise dosis of distilled mercury. The first is necessary
to help originate the discharge and to secure a reasonable life for the covered emission electrodes.
The blister is filled with argon or with a mixture of argon and nitrogen at atmospheric pressure. The addition of nitrogen serves
to avoid an electronic arc between the wire supports of the glass.
These lamps require an auxiliary equipment which is normally a ballast with an inductive resistance or transformer of the
dispersion field, besides a compensation condenser.
When the lamp is turned off, it will not start again until it has cooled off enough to lower vapor pressure to the point where the
arc will be turned on again. This period lasts about minutes.
8.6.3. Blended light lamps

Blended light lamps are a combination of the high pressure mercury lamp and an incandescent lamp. They are a result of one
of the tries to correct bluish light of mercury lamps, which is achieved by inclusion within the glass itself, of a mercury discharge
tube and a wolfram incandescent filament.
Mercury discharge light and that of the fired filament are combined, or mixed, to achieve a lamp with totally different operative
characteristics compared to those which have both pure mercury lamp and an incandescent lamp.
Main parts
With the exception of the filament and the gas used in the blister, parts of a blended light lamp are the same as those described
for high pressure mercury lamps (Fig. 10).
Base
Wire beam lead
Hard glass ovoid
glass bulb
Tractional resistence
Fluorescent substance
Low pressure inert
gas filling
Discharge tube
Principal electrodes
Incandescent filament
Figure 10. Blended light lamp.
103
Chapter 8. LAMPS
Filament: The filament, which also acts as a resistance ballast for the discharge tube, is a coiled wolfram wire the same as that
of the incandescent lamp. It is connected with the discharge tube in series and located next or around it, to obtain a good
blended light and to favour a quick ignition of the tube.
Filling gas blister: As for incandescent lamps, the filling gas in blended light lamps is made out of argon but adding a percentage
of nitrogen to avoid an arc in the filament. Compared with the standard high pressure mercury lamp, a greater filling pressure
to keep evaporation of wolfram to the minimum is used.
Blended light lamps have the advantage of being connected directly to the power supply system (ballast and starter for is not
required their working). Ignition takes about two minutes and reignition is not possible before cooling- down.
8.6.4. Metal halide lamps

High pressure mercury lamps also contain rare earths like Dysprosium (Dy), Holmium (Ho) and Thulium (Tm). These halides
are partly vaporized when the lamp reaches its normal working temperature. Halide vapor is later on dissociated, within the hot
central zone of the arc, into halogene and metal, achieving a considerable increase of luminous efficacy and approaching colour
to that of daylight. Different halide combinations (sodium, iodine, ozone) are used to which scandium, thallium, indium, lithium,
etc. is added.
Main parts
Base
Base
Clear tubular
glass bulb
Electrodes
Quartz discharge
tube
Ellipsoidal diffuser
glass bulb
Figure 11. Metal halide lamps.

Discharge tube: It is made out of pure quartz. Sometimes, a white layer of zirconium oxide is applied to the outer part of the
electrode cavities, to increase wall temperature at that point.
Electrodes: They are similar to those of the high pressure mercury lamp.
Blister: The blister of metal halide lamps is made out of hard or quartz glass. Some do not even have an blister.
The inner surface of blisters with an ovoid shape has a phosphorous layer to transform discharge ultraviolet radiation into visible
radiation. However, halides used for the metal halide lamp produce only a small amount of ultraviolet, and mainly, it is radiated
in the ultraviolet spectrum wavelength zone, where conversion into visible radiation is poor.
Filling gas in the discharge tube: The discharge tube is filled with a mixture of inert gases (neon and argon or krypton- argon),
a dosis of mercury and appropriate halides, depending on the type of lamp.
Filling gas of the blister: The blister of a metal halide lamp whose discharge tube is filled with a mixture of neon- argon, must
also be filled with neon so that neon pressure inside and outside the tube is the same. In case the discharge tube is filled with
a mixture of krypton- argon, nitrogen may be used in the blister, or else, the latter may be eliminated, too.
Working conditions of metal halide lamps are very similar to those of conventional mercury vapor. They are prepared to be
connected in series with a ballast to limit current, a compensation condenser being necessary.
104
Chapter 8. LAMPS
Due to metal halides, the ignition voltage for these lamps is high. The use of a starter or ignition device with shock voltage of
0.8 to 5 KV is needed.
Most lamps allow for immediate reignition with hot lamps (right after being turned- off), by using shock voltage of 35 to 60
KV. If not, they must cool- down between four and fifteen minutes before being turned back on.
8.7. High pressure sodium discharge lamps

This section deals with those lamps with a discharge tube where sodium vapor is introduced. Low pressure sodium lamps and high
pressure sodium lamps are included.
8.7.1. Low pressure sodium lamps

There exists a great similarity between the working of a low pressure sodium lamp and a low pressure mercury lamp (or a
fluorescent one). However, while light in the latter is produced by transforming ultraviolet radiation of the mercury discharge into
visible radiation, using fluorescent powder in the inner surface, visible radiation in the former is produced by direct discharge of
sodium.
Working principle
The discharge tube of a low pressure sodium lamp is usually U- shaped and is located inside an empty tubular glass cover, with
indio oxide coat on the inner surface. The empty part, together with the layer, which behaves as an infrared selective reflector,
helps keep the discharge tube wall at an adequate working temperature. Such measurements are necessary for the sodium,
which is deposited in slits of the glass when condensed, and it evaporates with a minimum heat loss. Due to this fact, the most
luminous efficiency possible is achieved.
The neon gas inside the lamp is used to begin the discharge and to develop enough heat to vaporize the sodium. This responds
for the red- orangish luminescence during the firsts few working minutes. The metallic sodium is gradually evaporated, producing
the characteristic monochromatic yellow light, with 589 nm. and 589.6 nm. lines in the spectrum. The red colour, initially
produced by the neon discharge, is energetically suppressed during the working because sodium excitation and ionization
potentials are much lower than those of neon.
The lamp reaches its luminous flux established in approximately ten minutes. It will reignite immediately in case power supply
is momentarily interrupted, since vapor pressure is quite low and the voltage applied enough to reestablish the arc.
The lamp has a luminous efficiency up to 200 lm/W and a long life.
Therefore, this lamp is applied to those places where colour reproduction is of less importance and mainly where contrast
recognition matters, for example: motorways, ports, beaches, etc. Low pressure sodium lamps range from 18 W to 180 W.
105
Chapter 8. LAMPS
Main parts
Bayonet cap
Deposit area for non

vaporised sodium
Clear blister bulb
Double or triple spiral electrodes

with electrone emission matter
"U"- shaped discharge tube
Figure 12. Low pressure sodium lamp.
Discharge tube and supports: The discharge tube of a high pressure sodium lamp is U- shaped, to make the most out of space
and provide a better thermal isolation. It is made out of sodium- calcium glass, and has an inner surface covered with borate
glass to form a protective layer against sodium vapor.
The tube also contains a number of small slits or holes, where sodium is deposited during manufacturing.
Discharge tube filling: The discharge tube filling consists of metallic sodium of high purity and of a mixture of neon and argon,
which behaves as an ignition and trimmer gas.
Electrodes: Low pressure sodium lamps possess cold ignition electrodes. These consist of a triple wolfram wire, in such a way
that a great amount of emitter material may be maintained.
Blister: It is empty and covered by a thin film of infrared material reflector in its inner surface. The infrared reflector serves to
reflect most part of the heat radiation which returns to the discharge tube, keeping it, at the desired temperature, this way, while
visible radiation is transmitted.
These lamps precise an auxiliary equipment formed by a power supplier with an autotransformer or ballast and igniter with
impulse voltage depending on type. A compensation condenser is required.
Nominal values are reached after fifteen minutes after reignition. When the lamp is turned off, a few minutes are necessary
before reignition.
8.7.2. High pressure sodium lamps

Physically speaking, high pressure sodium lamps are quite different from low pressure sodium lamps, due to the fact that vapor
pressure is higher in the former. This pressure factor also causes many other differences between the two lamps, including
emitted light properties.
Discharge tube in a high pressure sodium lamp contains an excess of sodium to produce saturated vapor conditions when the
lamp is working. Besides, it has an excess of mercury to provide a trimmer gas, xenon excluded, to ease ignition and limit heat
conduction from the discharge arc to the tube wall. The discharge tube is housed in an empty glass cover.
High pressure sodium lamps radiate energy through a good part of the visible spectrum. Therefore, when compared to the low
pressure sodium lamp, they offer a quite acceptable colour reproduction.
Main parts
The main parts of a high pressure sodium lamp are the following:
106
Chapter 8. LAMPS
Clear blister bulb
Base
Discharge tube
Diffused blister bulb
Figure 13. High pressure sodium lamp.
Discharge tube: The discharge tube is made out of aluminium oxide ceramics (sintered aluminium) very resistant to heat and
to chemical reactions with sodium vapor.
Electrodes: Electrodes, covered by a layer of emitter material, consist of a twisted serpentine wolfram rod around it.
Filling: In the inside of the discharge tube are sodium, mercury and noble gases (xenon or argon) out of which sodium is the
main producer of light.
Blister: This glass is generally empty.
The shape must be either ovoid or tubular. The first one has an inner covering. However, since the discharge tube of the high
pressure sodium lamp does not virtually produce any ultraviolet radiation, the covering is simply a diffused layer of white powder,
to decrease the high brightness of the discharge tube. The tubular glass is always made out of clear glass.
Starters and auxiliary starters: Many of the high pressure sodium lamps have an incorporated auxiliary starter, which helps
reduce the measure of the ignition peak voltage needed for the lamp ignition. Sometimes, both the incorporated starter and
the auxiliary starter are in the lamp itself.
These lamps precise of an auxiliary equipment formed by a ballast and an igniter with impulse tension depending on type. A
compensation condenser is also needed. Nominal values are reached five minutes after ignition. When a lamp is turned off, due
to a great pressure of the burner, it needs to cool down between four and minutes before turning it back on.
8.8. Induction lamps

The most vulnerable parts of all discharge lamps are the electrodes. During their average rated life, lamps reduce and lose their emitting voltage by the impact of quick ions or by chemical reactions with energetic vapors in the discharge tube. Electrodes in high pressure discharge lamps also produce a great amount of infrared wasted radiation, which decreases efficiency of the lamp.
The induction lamp introduces a completely new concept in light generation. It is based on the low pressure discharge gas principle. The
main characteristic of the new lamp system is that it does not need electrodes to originate gas ionization. Currently, there are two different systems to produce this new ionization of gas without electrodes.
107
Chapter 8. LAMPS
8.8.1. High power fluorescent lamps without electrodes

Discharge in this lamp does not begin and end in two electrodes like in a conventional fluorescent lamp. The shape of close
ring of the glass of the lamp allows to have a discharge without electrodes, since energy is supplied from the outside by a
magnetic field. Such magnetic field is produced in two ferrite rings, which constitutes an important advantage for lamp duration.
Ferrite nucleus
Magnetic field
Fluorescent covering
Coil
Ultraviolet radiation
Electron
Visible light
Mercury atom
Figure 14. High voltage fluorescent lamp without electrodes.
The system has an electronic equipment (at a frecuency of approximately 250 kHz) separated from the lamp besides a
fluorescent tube without electrodes. This allows to preserve optimal energy of discharge in the fluorescent lamp and reach a
high luminous potency with a good efficacy.
The main advantages of this lamp are:
- Extremely long life: 60 000 hours.
- Lamp potency 100 and 150 W.
- Luminous flux up to 12 000 lumens.
- Luminous efficacy of 80 lm/W.
- Low geometric profile that allows the development of flat luminaires.
- Comfortable light without oscillations.
- Start without flickers or sparkles.
These lamps are essentially indicated for those applications where relamping increases maintenance expenses excesively, like
for example, illumination of tunnels, industrial premises with very high ceilings and difficult access, etc.
8.8.2. Low pressure gas discharge lamps by induction

This type of lamps consists of a discharge recipient which contains the low pressure gas and a voltage coupler (antenna). Such
a potency coupler, composed by a ferrite cylindrical nucleus, creates an electromagnetic field within the discharge recipient
inducing an electrical current in the gas generating its ionization. Enough energy to begin and maintain discharge is supplied to
the antenna by a high frequency generator (2.65 MHz) by means of a coaxial cable of a determined length, since it forms part
of the oscillating circuit.
108
Chapter 8. LAMPS
Bulb
Potency coupler
Figure 15. Gas discharge lamp by induction.
The main advantages of these lamps are:

- Extremely long duration: 60 000 hours.
- Voltage lamps with 55, 85 and 165 W.
- Luminous flux up to 12 000 lumens.
- Luminous efficacy between 65 and 81 lm/W.
- Instantaneous ignition free of flickers and stroboscopic effects.
- Light for a great visual comfort.
These lamps are used for many general and special lighting applications, mainly to reduce maintenance expenses, like in public
buildings, outdoor public lighting, industrial applications, etc.
8.9. Charts with characteristics

8.9.1. Fluorescent lamps
TL linear fluorescent
Average rated life : 7 500 hours
Nominal
Flux
Performance
Diametre
Length
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
18
1350
75.00
26
0.590
18
1150
63.88
26
18
1100
61.11
26
Lamp holder
R.I.
Chromatic
Ra
degree
G 13
85
1B
0.590
G 13
62
2B
0.590
G 13
75
2A
18
1000
55.55
26
0.590
G 13
98
1A
36
3350
93.05
26
1200
G 13
85
1B
36
2850
79.16
26
1200
G 13
62
2B
36
2600
72.22
26
1200
G 13
75
2A
36
2350
65.27
26
1200
G 13
98
1A
58
5200
89.65
26
1500
G 13
85
1B
58
4600
79.31
26
1500
G 13
62
2B
58
4100
70.68
26
1500
G 13
75
2A
58
3750
64.65
26
1500
G 13
98
1A
109
Chapter 8. LAMPS
Compact fluorescent TC-D of 2 pins

Power supply voltage: 230 V.
Average rated life: 10 000 hours.
Nominal
Flux
Performance
Width
Length
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
Lamp holder
R.I.
Chromatic
Ra
degree
13
0.900
69.23
27
138
G24d-1
85
1B
18
1200
66.66
27
153
G24d-2
85
1B
26
1800
69.23
27
172
G24d-3
85
1B
Lamp holder
R.I.
Chromatic
Ra
degree
Compact fluorescent TC-D of 4 pins

Nominal
Flux
Performance
Width
Length
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
13
0.900
69.23
27
131
G24q-1
85
1B
18
1200
66.66
27
146
G24q-2
85
1B
26
1800
69.23
27
165
G24q-3
85
1B
Lamp holder
R.I.
Chromatic
Ra
degree
Compact fluorescent TC-L of 4 pins

Nominal
Flux
Performance
Width
Length
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
18
0.750
41.66
38
225
2G11
95
1A
24
1200
50.00
38
320
2G11
95
1A
36
1900
52.77
38
415
2G11
95
1A
40
2200
55.00
38
535
2G11
95
1A
55
3000
54.54
38
535
2G11
95
1A
8.9.2. High pressure mercury lamps

Colour temperature: 3 500 K 4 200 K
Colour reproduction index (R): 50
110
Nominal
Flux
Performance
Diametre
Length
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
0.050
01800
36.00
55
130
Lamp holder
E-27
0.080
03800
47.50
70
156
E-27
0.125
06300
50.40
75
170
E-27
0.250
13000
52.00
90
226
E-40
0.400
22000
55.00
120
290
E-40
0.700
38500
55.00
140
330
E-40
1000
58000
58.00
165
390
E-40
Chapter 8. LAMPS
8.9.3. Blended light lamps

Colour reproduction index (R): 50
Power suuply voltage: 230 V.
Nominal
Flux
Performance
Diametre
Length
Lamp holder
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
160
03100
19.37
075
180
250
05600
22.40
090
226
E-40
500
14000
28.00
125
275
E-40
Lamp holder
E-27
8.9.4. Metal halide lamps

Average rated life: 2 500 14 000 hours.
Colour reproduction index (R): 60 93
Compact metal halide lamps
Nominal
Flux
Performance
Diametre
Length
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
035
03400
97.14
19
100
G12
075
05500
73.33
25
084
G12
150
12500
83.33
25
084
G12
Lamp holder
Double- based metal halide lamps

Nominal
Flux
Performance
Diametre
Length
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
0.070
005500
078.57
20
114
RX7s
0.150
013500
090.00
24
132
RX7s
0.250
020000
080.00
25
163
Fc2
0.400
038000
095.00
31
206
Fc2
1000
090000
090.00
40
Cable
2000
220000
110.00
40
Cable
Lamp holder
Metal halide lamps with a clear base and a clear tubular shape
Nominal
Flux
Performance
Diametre
Length
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
0.250
020000
080.00
045
225
E-40
0.400
042000
105.00
045
275
E-40
1.000
080000
080.00
075
340
E-40
2.000
240000
120.00
100
430
E-40
3.500
320000
091.42
100
430
E-40
111
Chapter 8. LAMPS
Metal halide lamps with a base in an ellipsoidal form with a diffusing layer
Nominal
Flux
Performance
Diametre
Length
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
Lamp holder
0.070
04900
070.00
055
140
E-27
0.100
08000
080.00
055
140
E-27
0.150
12000
080.00
055
140
E-27
0.400
43000
107.50
120
290
E-40
1000
90000
090.00
165
380
E-40
Lamp holder
8.9.5. Low pressure sodium lamps

Colour temperature: 1 800 K
Colour reproduction index (R): NULL.
Low pressure sodium with a clear tubular shape and an infrared reflecting layer
Nominal
Flux
Performance
Diametre
Length
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
018
01800
100.00
55
0.215
BY-22d
035
04600
131.42
55
0.310
BY-22d
055
08100
147.27
55
0.425
BY-22d
090
13000
144.44
70
0.530
BY-22d
135
22500
166.66
70
0.775
BY-22d
180
32000
177.77
70
1120
BY-22d
Performance
Diametre
Length
Lamp holder
Low pressure sodium with a light tubular shape

Nominal
112
Flux
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
026
03500
134.61
55
215
BY-22d
036
05750
159.72
55
310
BY-22d
066
10700
162.12
55
425
BY-22d
091
17000
186.81
70
530
BY-22d
131
25000
190.83
70
775
BY-22d
Chapter 8. LAMPS
8.9.6. High pressure sodium lamps

Average rated life: 12 000 18 000 hours.
Colour reproduction index (R): 20 65
High pressure sodium lamps with a tubular shape
Nominal
Flux
Performance
Diametre
Length
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
Lamp holder
0.050
004000
080.00
40
155
0.070
006500
092.85
40
155
E-27
0.100
010000
100.00
45
210
E-40
E-27
0.150
017000
113.33
45
210
E-40
0.250
033000
132.00
45
255
E-40
0.400
055500
138.75
45
285
E-40
0.600
090000
150.00
55
285
E-40
1000
130000
130.00
65
400
E-40
Lamp holder
High pressure sodium lamps with an ellipsoidal shape and a diffusing layer
Nominal
Flux
Performance
Diametre
Length
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
00.50
003500
070.00
070
155
E-27
00.70
005600
080.00
070
155
E-27
0.100
010000
100.00
075
185
E-40
0.150
014000
093.33
090
225
E-40
0.250
025000
100.00
090
225
E-40
0.400
047000
117.50
120
290
E-40
1000
128000
128.00
165
400
E-40
Lamp holder
High pressure sodium lamps with two bases

Nominal
Flux
Performance
Diametre
Length
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
070
07000
100.00
20
115
RX7s
150
15000
100.00
25
130
RX7s-24
250
25500
102.00
25
205
Fc2
400
48000
120.00
25
205
Fc2
Lamp holder
Luxurious high pressure sodium lamps with a tubular shape

Nominal
Flux
Performance
Diametre
Length
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
150
12.500
83.33
45
210
E-40
250
23.000
92.00
45
255
E-40
400
39.000
97.50
45
285
E-40
113
Chapter 8. LAMPS
Luxurious high pressure sodium lamps with an ellipsoidal form and a diffusing layer
Nominal
Flux
Performance
Diametre
Length
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
Lamp holder
150
12.000
80.00
090
225
E-40
250
22.000
88.00
090
225
E-40
400
37.500
93.75
120
285
E-40
8.9.7. High powered fluorescent lamps without electrods (induction)

Nominal
Flux
Performance
Width
Length
power
(lm)
Lm/W
in mm
L in mm
Lamp holder
R.I.
Chromatic
Ra
degree
100 W
8000
80.00
139
313
80 (840/835)
1B
150 W
12000
80.00
139
414
80 (840/835)
1B
8.9.8. Low pressure discharge gas lamps by induction

114
Nominal
Flux
Performance
Diametre
Height
power
(lm)
Lm/W.
in mm.
in mm.
Lamp holder
R.I.
Ra
55 W
3500
65
85
140.5
80 (840/830/827)
85 W
6000
70
111
180.5
80 (840/830/827)
165 W
12000
70
130
210
80 (840/830/827)
Chapter 9.
CONTROL AND REGULATION

AUXILIARY EQUIPMENTS
9.1.
General remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
9.2.
Ballasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
9.3.
Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
9.4.
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
9.5.
Energy- saving equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
9.6.
Control gears for different discharge lamps. Circuits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
115
116
Chapter 9. CONTROL AND REGULATION AUXILIARY EQUIPMENTS

The present chapter deals with auxiliary equipments lamps need for their correct functioning. The equipment to be installed depends
on the type of lamp.
Incandescent, halogene and blended light lamps may be connected directly to the power supply without the need for any kind of
auxiliary equipment, or by means of a transformer. Due to their characteristics, intensity going through them and tension applied are
proportional.
Discharge lamps have the particularity that the ratio between the intensity going through them and the tension applied is not
proportional. That is to say, the ratio power- current is not linear but negative. In other words, tension of the arc depends little on the
current that goes through it. Depending on the tension applied, if the start takes place, intensity of the current may increase enormously
until a destruction of the lamp takes place or current fluctuates without proportion with little power variations. Because of these reasons,
it is necessary to use some current stabilizing device if a correct working is to be achieved.
Discharge stabilization
The most simple element that could be applied is a resistance. This solution is not recommendable for alternating current
though, because the lamp illuminates virtually when the power applied to the whole reaches instantaneous values, higher than
the power of the arc. This is translated into flickering of the lamp. Hence, this type of stabilization is almost exclusively used with
continuous current.
Another element that may be also applied to discharge stabilization is a condenser. This solution is not tolerated in a normal
frequency of 50 Hz. (let alone for continuous current) because current of the lamp is greatly distorted when strong peaks of
short duration are produced. The lamp will emit light intermittently and it will run out prematurely. However, this system may
be used with higher frequency power supplies (above 300 Hz.). The advantage being greater luminous performance of the
lamp.
The most widely known element to stabilize discharge lamps in normal practice is formed by an inductive reactance which limits
the intensity of the discharge current, quite efficiently, simply and economically. Current distortion produced in the lamp is
tolerable and generally without flickering. Although it displaces the phase between the power of the lamp and the supply net,
this may be easily corrected by means of condensers in parallel with the line.
When power available in the line is not enough to allow lamp ignition, previous transformers or autotransformers may help. In
order to simplify the set, the so called leakage autotransformers (also called dispersion autotransformers) are used, too. They
incorporate the precise inductive reactance in their secondary body. Once an adequate leakage transformer is available, if a
fluorescent lamp is to work that requires heating of its cathodes for ignition, a starter is introduced. Or it may not be necessary
means of incorporating two new coils to the autotransformer for a correct heating.
Parallel to the previous evolution, the condenser necessary to correct the power factor was used. An inductive reactance in series
with a condenser constitutes an intensity regulator. By correctly using the elements with slight alterations of these, complex
equipments are built. In them, the condenser in series with the secondary one of the transformer, and sometimes with the
primary one, improves lamp stability when compared to strong power variations in the line. Besides, it simultaneously corrects
the power factor and cos of the whole to a better value than if a simple condenser in parallel to the line is used.
Discharge lamps auxiliary equipments

Let us analyze in a general way, equipments usually used by discharge lamps for their correct working. At the end of the present
chapter, some representative circuits of different discharge lamps will be shown.
Fluorescent lamps
A fluorescent lamp has negative resistance characteristics. Therefore, it must be operated as a whole with a limited current
device (ballast) to avoid current leakage. The ballast, which has positive resistance characteristics, may be:
- Resistive ballast: For continuous current.
- Inductive ballast: It is the most widely spread ballast used for normal alternating current applications.
- Electronic ballast: It is the most expensive, but it offers important advantages compared to the previous ones.
Power factor correction is achieved by placing a condenser in parallel to the circuit of the lamp. Also using capacitive ballasts for
117
half the lamps and inductive ballasts without compensation for the other half in circuits which contain several lamps.
For lamp ignition some type of help is needed, due to the fact that the fluorescent lamp inner resistance when turned
off is too cold to be turned on automatically when the power supply is applied to it. As far as ignition is concerned,
fluorescent lamp circuits may be divided into three groups:
- Circuits with preheated starter: Ignition is controlled by a conventional or electronic starter.
- Circuits without preheated starter: These lamps may operate with two different types of circuit, instantaneous ignition
(semiresonant circuit) and quick ignition (non- resonant circuit).
- Circuits with cold ignition: Specially designed for lamps provided with an inner band to ease immediate ignition
without preheating and without a starter.
High pressure mercury lamps
Apart from the reactance, a start equipment is not necessary for mercury lamps. Compensated inductive ballasts may be used
both in parallel compensation circuits and in compensation circuits in series. Both circuits take a condenser to compensate for
the power factor.
Metal halide lamps
Working conditions for metal halide lamps are very similar to those of conventional mercury one., They are arranged in such a
way that they may be connected in series with a current limiting ballast. Nevertheless, due to halides, power ignition of these
lamps is high and need the use of a starter or igniter.
The ballast to be connected to the metal halide lamp depends on its properties. For example, the so- called three band lamps
use ballasts designed for high pressure mercury lamps, but rare earth lamps work better with ballasts of high pressure sodium
lamps.
Low pressure sodium lamps
These lamps require an auxiliary equipment which may be:
- Ballast, with or without a separate igniter: Due to the lamp low voltage, these may operate in comparatively simple circuits
which consist, basically, in a ballast in series with the lamp and a starter in parallel. For the correction of the power factor, a condenser in parallel is used.
- Transformer with a separate igniter: In this circuit power of the lamp is almost always constant for all its life. It consists in a
ballast, a condenser in series for the correction of the power factor and an electronic igniter.
High pressure sodium lamps
As for metal halide lamps, high shock powers are necessary for ignition due to the high pressure to which the gas is kept. Thus,
high pressure sodium lamps operate normally with a ballast and a starter. Some lamps have an incorporated starter, but most
of them use an external ignition device.
Mainly, there are two types of circuits, either with the starter connected in series or in parallel with the lamp:
- Circuit with a starter in series: The starter is connected between the ballast and the lamp.
- Circuit with a semi starter in parallel: The starter is connected to the lamp through the reactance.
Correction of the power factor may be achieved through a condenser in the way of compensation in parallel in both circuits.
Induction lamps
Induction lamps are connected to the power supply through a high frequency generator, which is formed by a system of
electronic circuits. The connection between the lamp and the generator is achieved through a coaxial cable which forms part of
an oscillator circuit. Therefore, its length may not be modified.
118
9.2. Ballasts
9.2.1. Introduction
Reactances or ballasts are accessories to be used in combination with discharge lamps. As inductive, capacitive or resistive impedances,
alone or in combination, they limit the current which circulates through them to the values required for an adequate working.
Moreover, they supply power and ignition current required when necessary, and, in the case of quick start reactances, they also supply
low power necessary for the heating of lamp cathodes.
Given the characteristics offered for correct performance and working of the lamp, the most widely used are those of an inductive type.
The combination of inductive- capacitive reactance is also used.
Resistance and capacitive ones are not used alone since the first ones produce many losses, thus, providing low performance. The
second ones provide a very low power in the lamp due to great deformation of the current wave originated by them.
According to their installation principles, they may be classified into:
- Independent reactance, which is covered by a special protection to work outside.
- Reactance to be incorporated, which requires a secondary protection like a housing, a luminaire, etc.
9.2.2. Function of the reactance

The reactance is a fundamental element in any discharge lamp lighting installation because lamps would not work without it.
Given the great variety of lamps in the market, very different in type, size, colour, etc., adequate reactances to each of them are
required, so that the precise parameters are supplied in each case and for each situation. That is to say, starting needs and, later
on, normal operation ones are satisfactory.
Generally speaking, functions covered by reactances are the following:
- To provide cathode ignition or preheating current to achieve the initial emission of electrons in these.
- Supply enough output power in the vacuum to arc the lamp.
- Limit current in the lamp to adequate values for a correct working.
- Control variations in the lamp current, as opposed to variations in power supply. This is known as having a good
regulation.
9.2.3. Normative to be met by reactances

Reactances certification
Reactances must be manufactured according to corresponding national and international norms. As a consequence, the ones
that have been tested and certified by different organisms, will have the organization symbol printed (Fig. 1.).
AENOR SPAIN
GERMANY
IMQ-ITALY
IRAM-ARGENTINA
SLOVAQUIA
CENELEC-AENOR
Figure 1. Examples of certification brands of different organisms.

Having such certifications allows these products to circulate around countries comprised by such brands.
Reference norms
Norms regulating security and functioning of reactances for high intensity discharge lamps are the following:
119
UNE-EN 60922:
Reactances for discharge lamps (except for fluorescent tubular lamps). General and
safety prescriptions.
UNE-EN 60923:
Reactances for discharge lamps (except for fluorescent tubular lamps). Working
prescriptions.
ANSI C82.4:
Reactances for high intensity discharge lamps and low pressure sodium lamps.
UNE-EN 60662:
High pressure sodium lamps.
UNE-EN 61167:
Metal halide lamps.
UNE-EN 60188:
High pressure mercury lamps.
UNE-EN 60192:
Low pressure sodium lamps.
UNE-EN 60598:
Luminaires.
European directives
In order to be able to use electric and electronic devices in the European Union, it is compulsory for them to have the
mark "CE" which means European Conformity, and represents the compliance with the following European Directives
to which lighting products are subjected:
- Low Voltage Directive (LV) 73/23/EEC, in force since 1-1-97 and applicable to all electric devices of nominal voltage
from 50 to 1,000 V. in alternating current and from 75 to 1,500 V. in continuous current.
- Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC) 89/366/EEC, in force since 1-1-96 and applicable to all electric and
electronic devices that may generate radio- interferences or be affected by perturbances generated by other devices
in their surroundings.
Reference norms
For the Low Voltage Directive (LV), security norms on the product are compulsory.
For those corresponding to Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), the following norms are applicable:
UNE-EN 50081-1:
Electromagnetic compatibility. General emission norm.
UNE-EN 55015:
Radioelectric perturbations of fluorescent lamps and luminaires.
EN 61000-3-2:
Perturbations of power supply systems. Harmonics.
EN 61547:
Luminaires for general applications. Immunity prescriptions.
The applicable harmonic and immunity requeriments of radio- interference emission must be checked with the
luminaire or in the installation where reactances are going to be used.
Harmonics
A harmonic is a perturbation introduced in the power supply by electric equipments. In lighting systems, energy is supposed to
receive a unique frequency and to be constant. Frequency constancy in energy distributions is generally achieved. However, due
to several circunstances, the fundamental wave may be polluted with undesirable harmonics (for example, produced by
associated frequency converters, etc.).
The study of such pollution produced by harmonics is very complex because its consequences depend on the harmonic
frequency amplitude and order, as well as on the situation over the fundamental.
120
It is necessary to highlight that if the situation of harmonics over the fundamental wave makes composed waves to tend to be
square, impedance coils do not limit intensity received from the lamp sufficiently. Under these conditions, alternating voltage is
similar to a continuous pulsatory voltage to which inductive shocks do not respond in an efficient way.
A mathematical model may be established for the study of power in different elements of the electric circuit (lamp, ballast, etc.),
and decompose it in Fouriers series, taking the first two terms as an acceptable approximation.
The third and subsequent harmonics produced during the use of electromagnetic nuclei (magnetic ballasts) in lighting with
discharge lamps and the generation of odd harmonics produced by the lamps themselves, have two immediate consequences:
1st- Capacitors of power factor correction are not able to correct power factor down to the unit, but, on adding capacity
to such condensers, a capacitive circuit appears.
2nd- In threephasic systems with neuter, current in the neuter becomes similar to that of phases. The reason is that
even cancelling the fundamental frequency charges being equal, that is to say, with balanced phases, the third
harmonics are in phase and, therefore, they are summed.
If devices providing power supply of the threephasic line with neuter would take only the fundamental frequency, the neuter
would not carry current in case of charge balance over the phases. However, if devices take a current containing 33.3% of the
third harmonic, the neuter wire is charged with the same current as that of the phases, although its frequency is three times the
fundamental.
In practice, so that this does not happen with lighting lines, limits have been established in admissible current distorsions for
even harmonic cases , since odd numbers are cancelled (see IEC 1000-3-2, IEC 1000-3-3 or EN 61000-3-2 and EN 610003-3 Norms). Nevertheless, the neuter must be measured at the same size than those of phases, as demanded by the Low
Voltage Regulation, in order to avoid surprises with low quality materials.
Another typical problem with power supply polluted by frequency harmonics is the resonance phenomenon, which may take
place in those equipments composed by an inductive reactance and a condenser in series. These equipments are special and
known as regulators, autorregulators or constant power ballasts.
9.2.4. Electromagnetic ballasts

Electromagnetic ballasts are mainly composed by a large number of copper coils over a laminated iron nucleus. A heat loss
takes place in them through the coil ohmic resistance and the hysteresis in the nucleus. This depends a lot on the mechanic
construction of the ballasts and the copper wiring diametre.
Types of reactances
Shock reactance
This type of inductive reactance, formed by a simple coil with its corresponding magnetic nucleus, electrically connected in series
with the lamp, is the most comonly used. It constitutes a set of low factor power which may be corrected placing a condenser
in parallel with the power supply (Fig. 2).
Ballast
F
Power supply
Capacitor
N
Lamp
Figure 2
This type of reactance, economic, light and of a small size, provides poor power regulation , as opposed to variations in the
power supply voltage (around 20% of the power oscillation, for power supply variations of 10%) and starting current is high
with respect to the functioning; circuits must be measured for that value. This makes lamp life to be considerably reduced if
121
power supply volatge fluctuates more than 5%. Therefore, this type of reactances is adequate whenever adequate voltage
stability conditions are met.
Autotransforming reactance
When power supply has a voltage lower than 220 V, it is necessary to foresee an elevation system for that voltage which will
provide us with the necessary one for lamp ignition. This system may be simply an autotransformer and a normal shock
Ballast
reactance, which is correct from an electric point of view, but also very costly and bulky.
Power supply
Lamp
N
Figure 3
Normally, autotransforming reactances have been built for this function, whose basic structure is shown in Fig. 3. They are
formed by two magnetically decoupled winded, even with magnetic shunts between them. So, on top of raising voltage so that
the lamp may be ignited, they also control its intensity. This type of reactances have a very small power regulation. Thus, a
voltage variation of about 5% is transformed into lamp power oscillations of 12%. Besides, we are speaking about power low
factor reactances. In order to correct this factor, bearing in mind that power supply (normally 110 or 125 V), it is obligatory to
place condensers with a great capacity, and, thus, very costly ones.
Autorregulating reactance
This reactance combines an autotransformer with a regulating circuit. Due to the fact that part of the main coil is common to
the second one, its size is reduced. Since only the secondary coil contributes to a good regulation, its degree depends on the
portion of primary power coupled to the second one (Fig. 4).
Ballast
Capacitor
Power supply
Lamp
N
Figure 4
122
With this type of reactance, the following advantages are achieved:

- A good regulation of current and power of the lamp, as opposed to power supply variations (about 5% in power, as
opposed to voltage variations of about 10%).
- As a consequence from the above, an important increase in lamp life, reducing installation maintenance expenses.
- Power supply starting current is not higher than the normal functioning, so protection systems and power supply
cables may be measured for a minor current than in installations with shock reactances. Due to the same reason,
protection security increases since its values correspond to those of functioning.
- Compensation of the power factor is maintained above 0.9 independently from the power supply current voltage.
- Due to the great stabilization provided by these reactances, power supply voltage is low (at this power the lamp
extinguishes). Power supply variations, very much above the usual ones, are permited without producing lamp turnoffs.
Brands and indications

Reactances, besides their electric characteristics, have a series of printed indications which is convenient to know to make good
use of them. Thus, the maximum segurity, duration and electric performances are obtained.
tW
It is the maximum temperature to which coils of a reactance may be constantly working in normal
conditions, at their nominal voltage and frequency, to secure an average life of 10 years. Increases or
decreases of temperature in coils have an influence on their life.
t
Coil heating of a reactance over room temperature in which they are installed, working in normal
ta
Maximum room temperature at which a reactance may work in normal conditions. It is given by:
conditions and at nominal voltage and frequency.

ta =
tW - t
Losses
It is the autoconsumed power. If not indicated otherwise, this value is measured with nominal voltage
and frequency and with coils at a temperature of 25C.
It is the power factor.
Besides these, conformity prints from different organisms may appear as it was previously indicated.
9.2.5. Electronic ballasts

Electronic ballasts offer important advantages with respect to conventional inductive ballasts, such as:
- They improve lamp and system efficiency.
- They do not produce flickering or stroboscopic effects.
- They provide an instantaneous start without the need of a separate starter.
- They increase lamp life.
- They offer excellent possibilities to regulate the lamp luminous flux.
- Power factor is close to the unit, although harmonics in line must be carefully observed so that maximum admited
values are not exceeded.
- Connection is simpler.
- They have a smaller temperature increase.
- They do produce neither a buzz nor other noises.
- They are lighter.
- They may be used in continuous current.
Of course, these advantages correspond to electronic ballasts correctly designed, elaborated and verified.
Electronic ballasts are generally used for fluorescent lamps metal halide and high pressure sodium lamps of up to 150 W.
The most commonly used working principle in electronic ballasts for fluorescent tubes in normal alternating current connections
(220 V and 50 Hz) is as shown in Fig. 5.
123
Lamp
F
Electronic
control
Power supply
N
Lamp
Trimmer
capacitor
Narrow filter
Rectifier
High frequency
oscillator
Lamp stabilizer
Figure 5
As it may be seen, a narrow filter placed before reduces distorsion of the power supply current and avoids that high frequency
signals are reflected in the power supply. Besides, the electronic circuit must be protected from fortuitous impulses which appear
in 50 Hz alternating current.
Once the alternating current has been modified, and with the help of the coupling condenser, high frequency generation in
square wave is the following step, through two transistors, generally. This frequency must be higher than 20 KHz. to go over
audible limits and achieve the greatest performance.
Before applying high frequency to tubes, some solutions to limit current and ease ignition must be established.
It is also necessary to provide the necessary solutions to avoid ballast deterioration at the end of the tube life, etc.
Concepts associated to electronic ballasts

Power factor: In electronic ballasts, the power factor is corrected and has a constant value very close to the unit, controlled at
any time during its functioning by the power factor correction circuit.
Protection against surges: In threephasic installations with the neuter incorrectly connected or interrupted, if there is an
unbalance of charges, there is also an unbalance of voltages, originating surges in some phases. This may create working
problems and deterioration of lamps and auxiliary equipments.
Electronic ballasts are provided with a protection system against surges, avoiding problems which may be produced in circuits
due to this reason.
Current harmonics: A pure non sine wave is formed by a fundamental wave to which frequency waves multiple of the
fundamental one are superimposed. These superimposed waves are called higher order harmonics, as previously seen.
These harmonics are produced by elements with a non- linear behaviour, overloading power supply systems. They are frequently
discarded because they become a source of perturbations for other devices in the same power supply system and reduce the
power factor of the device affected by them.
Electronic ballasts must include input filters in their circuits to limit and maintain the level of harmonics equal or under the EN
61000-3-2 Norm exigencies.
Dispersion or stray currents: In order to reduce radio electric interferences filters which originate disperse currents or non
acceptable for a good electric functioning of the equipments are used.
Electronic ballasts incorporate interference suppression condensers with an earth connection for stray currents, with values
always lower than 0.5 mA. This does not constitute a problem for protection equipments and circuit differentials.
For a correct installation, it is always necessary to use the ballast earth terminal and connect it adequately.
Radio electric interferences: Electronic equipments functioning under high frequencies emit or generate harmful radio electric
interferences for the electric surrounding and devices related to it.
These emission levels must be located under the limit tolerated by the EN 55015 Norm.
Electronic ballasts are equipped with stages and filters which suppress radio electric interferences. Hence, their emission is
always inferior to the maximum normalized limits.
124
To maintain this low emission level of radio interferences, special attention must be paid to the installation wiring disposition,
following recommendations for this purpose at any time.
Normative to which high frequency ballasts must comply

In order to offer the maximum functioning and security guarantees, electronic ballasts must be designed according to the latest
European norms in order to achieve the following characteristics:
- Being electronic, they must be totally noise- free.
- Not to produce flickering during ignition.
- Corrected stroboscopic effect.
- Useful as emergency devices, admitting continuous current power supply.
- To allow a wide margin of power supply voltage.
- To have an automatic disconnection circuit as opposed to faulty or depleted lamps.
- To incorporate harmonic filters to avoid that these are introduced in the power supply.
Therefore, they must comply with or follow the norms established below:
UNE-EN 50081-1:
Electromagnetic compatibility. General emission norm.
UNE-EN 55015:
Radio electric perturbations of fluorescent lamps and luminaires.
EN 61000-3-2:
Perturbations of power supply systems. Harmonics.
EN 60928:
General and security prescriptions.
EN 60929:
Working prescriptions.
UNE-EN 50082-1:
Electromagnetic compatibility. General immunity norm.
Ignition through high frequency electronic equipments

Ignition time for an electronic ballast is the necessary time to begin lamp ignition. Depending on this period of time,
instantaneous ignition equipments (or cold ones) and ignition equipments with cathode preheating (or hot ones) will be
distinguished.
Instantaneous ignition electronic ballasts: They produce lamp ignition almost instantaneously.
This ignition takes place with cold lamp cathodes, without a previous preheating.
The use of these ballasts is recommended in installations where a limited number of daily ignitions is required, like
offices, shopping precincts, banks, etc.
Quick ignition electronic ballasts: These ballasts, as opposed to instantaneous ignition, have a short preheating time,
of approximately 0.4 seconds.
Preheating ignition electronic ballasts: These ballasts produce lamp ignition in an approximate time of two seconds.
Previous to ignition, lamp cathodes are preheated by a initial current that goes through them, which originates a softer
ignition, but not an instantaneous one. Nevertheless, in this type of installations, the life of the lamp subjected to
frequent ignitions is much shorter than that of a lamp subjected to few ignitions and long periods of continuous
working.
HF generator for induction lamps: The HF generator provides the signal of high frequency (2.65 Mhz) to the
antenna of the lamp to begin and maintain gas discharge. The generator electronic circuit system is inside a small
metal box which protects from radio frequency interference and drives heat generated in the circuit.
9.3. Starters
Mercury lamps have electrodes which allow starting with a low voltage, around 220 V. Therefore, no additional starting device is required.
However, metal halide and high pressure sodium lamps need very high ignition voltage which may not be supplied by the reactance
alone.
Supplying this ignition power is the role of starters, which are also used for ignition of some low pressure sodium lamps.
125
Working principles
They are based on the principle of taking advantage of energy stored in a condenser, which is discharged by means of an
adequate shooting system in the primary coil of a transformer. Due to the brusque flux variation in its nucleus, a voltage impulse
induced in the secondary one appears. Its peak value is very high and it is of a short duration. When superimposed to the power
supply, it arcs the discharge tube.
According to its working principle three different types of starters may be distinguished: independent starter, impulse transformer
starter and independent starter from two wires.
Besides this classification according to their working, starters may have a deactivation system inside that will interrupt their
working if the lamp does not start in a period of time. These are called temporized starters.
Independent starter or impulse superimposed starter (Starter in series)
It works as shown in Fig. 6. The starter of the condenser is discharged by means of the shooting circuit on the spirals of the
primary transformer, which amplifies the impulse at the adequate value. The impulse voltage depends exclusively on the starter
itself. It is compatible with any shock reactance and it does not bear ignition impulses, whose value is high in many cases.
Ballast
Transformer
F
Shooting circuit
Capacitor
Lamp
Power supply
Capacitor
Resistance
Starter
Figure 6
Impulse transformer starter (semi parallel starter)
It uses the reactance as an amplifier of the products by the starter and it works as shown in Fig. 7. The condenser of the starter
is discharged by means of the shooting device between points 2 and 3 of the reactance. Together with an adequate proportion
of spirals with regards to the total coil, it amplifies the impulse to the necessary value.
The value of the impulses depends both on the starter itself as well as on the reactance used. Due to this reason, it is not always
compatible with any combination of both. The reactance must have an intermediate feeding point and it must also be subjected
to high peak power voltage produced for ignition.
Ballast
2
Capacitor
Lamp
Power supply
Capacitor
Stater
Shooting
circuit
Resistance
Figure 7
126
Independent starter from two wires (parallel starter)

It works as shown in Fig. 8. The energy stored in condenser C is returned towards the lamp by the intervention of the shooting
circuit D, in the precise moment in which voltage reaches its maximum value. An impulse of a peak value between 2 and 4
times the instantaneous of the power supply, between 600 V and 1,200 V, is reached, but with a longer duration, and, therefore,
of more energy than those obtained with other systems of starters.
Ballast
F
Resistance
Lamp
Power supply
Starter
Capacitor
Capacitor
Shooting circuit
Figure 8
The may be only used for some metal halide lamps and low pressure sodium lamps of 35 W., which require voltage impulses
relatively low but of a certain duration.
Temporized starters
These starters have an inner device, which after a time previously fixed for impulse production, deactivates its working. If the
lamp does nor ignite due to exhaustion or failure, its stops subjecting all circuit to high voltage impulses.
The starter is active again after the interruption of the power supply circuit voltage, although only for a short period of time
(milliseconds).
127
Reference norms
Norms applicable to starters are the following:
EN 60926:
Starters (except for effluves). General and security prescriptions.
EN 60927:
Starters (except for effluves). Working prescriptions.
EN 60662:
High pressure sodium lamps.
EN 61167:
Metal halide lamps.
Recommendations for the use of starters

In the first place, the adequate starter for the lamps to be installed must be chosen so that the necessary peak voltage is
provided, the number of impulses required for lamp ignition and the charge capacity born by the cables to the lamp is admitted.
Location must be carefully chosen so that there is always the minimum distance from the starter to the lamp. Thus, the capacity
of cables is minimum, securing ignition. Such a capacity depends on the separation between cables and on their length.
The conductor bearing the high voltage impulse, indicated in all starters, must be of an insulation for a voltage in service of no
less than 1 KV., and be connected to the central contact of the base to favour its ignition.
The connecting form indicated in the sketch of the starter must be always respected.
Humidity, water or condensations in the housing of the starter must be avoided. Derivations between terminals or to earth may
be produced, which would cancel the high voltage impulse, failing ignition.
An excessive room temperature must also be avoided because it may provoke an overheating in the starter and risk its average
life. Temperature at the point indicated on the surface of the starter must not exceed the value indicated for tCC, when the
lamp is working and thermally stabilized.
The starter produces voltages of up to 5 KV. Thus, insulation of cables supporting them must be especially considered. It is not
advisable to work on the luminaire without being sure that power supply is off.
Connect the condenser for the voltage correction factor to avoid impulse losses towards the power supply.
Starters
This name is given to starters designed for fluorescent lamp ignition.
The most common type of starter is that called flicker, composed by a glass bulb full of neon gas at a low pressure. In its interior there
are two electrodes, one of them or both are bimetal lamellae which bend slightly by the action of heat. In parallel with the electrodes,
a condenser is connected to eliminate interferences. All this is housed in a cylindrical recipient made of aluminium or of an insulating
material. A plaque with two pins for contact and fixing are included. The starter is embedded in series with the lamp electrodes and
ballast, working automatically in the following way:
When the connection is established, a small electric discharge takes place between the lamellae through the gas, heating them enough
to bend till they get together. This union closes the circuit and eases the flow of current through the lamp electrodes for a short period
of time. When the electrodes are incandescent, they emit electrons around them in the form of a cloud. A bit later, when the lamellae
cool down, they separate opening the circuit and giving rise to the ballast spreading a power impulse tension through which discharge
of the arc and lamp working takes place. Once the lamp is turned on, the starter is out of service without an insufficient voltage reaching
it. If ignition fails, the starter behaves exactly in the same way.
However, electronic starters only make one ignition attempt (very determined) so that any flickering during the ignition stage is
eliminated. Additional advantages of electronic starters are high ignition reliability at low room temperatures and prolongation of lamp
life.
128
9.4. Capacitors
9.4.1. General remarks
Electric capacitors are a system formed by two conductors separated by insulation. If no element is between the two conductors,
air is the insulator. Nevertheless, generally speaking, air is substituted by another insulator with higher dielectric power. Hence,
conductors (frameworks) may be very close to one another without electric charges jumping from one to the other.
If frameworks of a capacitor are connected to the poles of an electric generator, equal and different sign charges are adquired.
So, once it has been disconnected, the capacitor stores electric charges.
The amount of charge stored by a capacitor is directly proportional to the power differential established between its plaques.
But it may also happen that two capacitors of a different form or size adquire different charges when subjected to the same
power difference.
Capacity of a capacitor is the quotient between the charge of one of its plaques and the power differential between both of
them.
C=
q
U
where:
C = capacity of the capacitor.
q = charge of the capacitor (coulomb).
U = power differential between the capacitor (V) plaques or pins.
Pure capacitive circuit

Capacity (capacitance) of an electric circuit or of an element of the circuit serves the purpose of delaying a variation in the
voltage applied between its terminals. That delay is caused by absorption or cession of energy and it is associated with the
variation in the electricity charge.
A pure capacitive circuit is that whose ohmic resistance equals zero (pure capacitance). Following the electric field laws, voltage
between the plaques of a capacitor is known to be proportional to the stored charge and that the ratio q/U is the capacity.
If instead of a continuous current, a capacitor is applied a sine alternating current, a variation of the same du will be necessary
to produce another variation in the charge dq = i dt in an infinitesimal time dt. That is to say:
dq = i dt = C du
If a sine alternating voltage is applied to the circuit u = Umax sin (t), and it is substituted in the previous equation, derivation
and operation is as follows:
i = Umax C sin( t + )
2
This equation indicates the advance suffered by the intensity with regards to voltage due to the capacitor effect.
Frequency effect
Capacity reactance
The capacity of a circuit serves to delay the increase or decrease of voltage, but under no circumstances does it avoid or limit
change. Nevertheless, frequency limits current amplitude in a value equal to 1. = . 1. . ohms. This value is called
C 2 f C
capacitive reactance XC, which increases when frequency decreases and it
decreases if frequency increases. Thus, for continuous current like f = 0 Hz, the capacitive reactance value is infinite and that of
current is zero amperes.
Inductive reactance
Inductance of a circuit serves the purpose of delaying the increase or decrease of current, but under no circumstances does it
avoid or limit the change. However, frequency limits amplitude of the current in a value equal to . L = 2 . . f . L ohms. This
129
value is known as inductive reactance XL, which increases when frequency is higher and decreases if frequency also does. Thus,
in continuous current, like f = 0 Hz., the value of inductive reactance is zero.
Resistance
Resistance offered by a conductor in alternating current may be said to be the same as that offered in continuous current (ohmic
resistance), whenever the Kelvin and corona effects, and resistance due to parasite currents, hysteresis, etc. may be disregarded.
Generalized Ohms law

In circuits, the electric current is limited by the resistance value (R), the inductive reactance (XL) and the capacitive reactance
(XC) of the elements forming the circuit. All these elements may undergo a sine alternating voltage which, as a permanent
regime, makes an alternating intensity current circulate in the same form and wave frequency. Also, generalized Ohms law for
alternating current is verified in them. The formula is as follows:
r Ur
Z = r
I
()
r
Z = Z . (cos + j . sin) = R + j . X
()
The real part of the complex number is the measurement known as resistance, R, represented in the real axis. Its module equals:
R = Z . cos = ZZ2 - R2
()
r
The imaginary part of this complex number, Z is the reactance X, represented in the imaginary axis in such a way that if it is of
an inductive nature, it is positive, +j . XL, and if it is of a capacitive nature, it is negative,-j . XC. Its module equals:
X = Z . sin = ZZ2 - R2
()
The angle is the phase different angle between tension and intensity, in such a way that if it is positive, it corresponds to an
inductive circuit. If it is negative, it corresponds to a capacitive circuit. As it is widely known, this angle is of great importance in
alternating current. It is called power factor and provides information about reactive energy and also quantifies it.
XL
-Xc
Z
X (inductive)
Figure 9
If the impedance triangle of Fig. 9 is multiplied by I2, the result obtained is its corresponding power triangle, in which:
(W)
Reactive power
P = R . I2 = U . I . cos
Q = X . I2 = U . I . sin
Apparent power
S = Z . I2 = U . I
(V A)
Active power
130
(V Ar)
S
Q
Figure 10
9.4.2. Power factor

Power factor (cos) may be defined as relative efficiency in the use of electric energy. Technically speaking, it is the ratio
between active power P (in W.) submitted to a receptor and apparent power S (in V.A.) supplied by the power line.
2
2
=
UI
S=
L
+Q
QL=UI sin
P=UI cos
Figure 11
It will always be lower than the unit, but the closer to it, the more advantage we are taking out of the energy from the power
supply.
Norms for reactances specify that an equipment (set of reactance lamp) has a high power factor when its value is equal or
greater than 0.85.
The use of high power factor reactances has the following advantages:
1- Compliance with requisites from electric energy supply companies of compensating the power factor, at least, at
0.85.
2- To avoid extra charges in light bills for reactive energy.
3- To reduce the section in power supply line conductors in installations.
4- To use high power factor equipments implies to install a larger number of luminaires per circuit so that protection
equipments are reduced and simplified (magnetothermal, differentials, etc.).
Power factor compensation
As usual, industrial use reactances are of an inductive type and their power factor is around 0.5. Reactances of a capacitive type
must be associated to them so that the power factor of the set is close to the unit. This capacitive reactance consists in one or
several capacitors, whose installation is convenient near the inductive reactance in order to measure conductors for the smallest
intensity possible. This would not be achieved if capacitors are placed at the beginning of the installation, next to the distribution
board, for example.
On selecting the necessary compensation method, location of capacitors and economic aspects should be considered (prices,
power supply parameters, acquisition initial expenses and equipment maintenance expenses). Apart from this, there are factors
such as system harmonics and surrounding conditions which may limit the effective use of capacitors.
There is not a compensation method which may be universally recommended. Nevertheless, several methods may be applied
in each case.
131
Compensation in parallel
Compensation in parallel is done as shown in Fig. 12 where a fluorescent lamp with ignition through a starter has been
represented as a typical example, but it may be applied to any other type of lamp.
Ballast
IL
Capacitor
Power supply
Starter
Lamp
Ic
IL
N
Figure 12
The capacitor connected in parallel to the power supply, must have the adequate value so that reactive intensity ahead of the
phase absorbed by it, IC, formed by the one circulating through the lamp, IL, gives a power supply absorbed intensity, IT, whose
power factor is close to the unit (Fig. 13).
Ic
Vpower supply
'
It
IL
Figure 13
Power to be born by the capacitor is that of the power supply, and tolerance admitted in capacity is usually 10% of its nominal
value.
Being:
VPOWER SUPPLY = Power supply tension.
IL =
Current absorbed by the equipment without compensation.
IC =
Current absorbed by the capacitor.
It =
Current in power supply after compensation.
and =Phase difference angles after and before compensation.

Calculation of the necessary capacitor
Calculation of capacity (C) of the necessary capacitor in an equipment may be solved with the help of the following formula:
C=
where:
132
P . (tag - tag)
(F)
. V2
cos =
initial power factor. ( = arc cos).
cos =
power factor to be achieved. ( = arc cos).
V=
power supply of the line.
=
frequency in radians. ( = 2. . F; F is the frequency in Hz.).
Compensation in series
As established before, compensation in parallel reduces the reactive power component of the power supply, and, thus, power
losses. With compensation in series reactive power is transmitted to a certain degree and the recover of the line remains
influenced when connecting capacitors in series to the power supply. The formula for the power loss in the line is given by:
U = Ia . R + Ir . (XL - XC)
This formula shows that, when XC = XL,, the power supply reactance is zero and the tension loss originated by the reactive power
transmission is also zero, as a consequence. When an adequate capacitor in series, is included, Xc may be greater than XL. In
this case, reactance of the power supply becomes negative. Thus, compensation in series may also reduce a power supply drop
caused by the transmission of active power.
9.5. Energy- saving equipments

In public lighting through discharge lamps, energy consumption may be reduced during early hours or in circumstances which require
less visual exigency by means of a reduction in illuminance for each point or in most of the corresponding luminous points.
In old installations, two lamps used to be mounted on each luminaire for road lighting so that two lighting levels were available
depending on conveniences. Nowadays, one luminaire with a single discharge lamp incorporated and with double level equipment is
used. This ballast allows a reduction of consumed power by means of the introduction of an additional inductance incorporated to the
iron nucleus of the main inductance in a separate nucleus in the lamp circuit. Figs. 14, 15 and 16 show three forms known of the double
level system referred to a vapor mercury lamp.
Relay
Double level ballast
Lamp
Figure 14. The relay switches the winding intake in a single nucleus.
133
Relay
Principal ballast
Auxiliary ballast
Lamp
Figure 15. The relay is inserted in series with the auxiliary shock circuit.
Relay
Auxiliary ballast
Lamp
Principal ballast
N
Figure 16. The relay opens the shock circuit derived from the main one.
In any case, lamp consumption is reduced since the relay acts, connecting with an important line existing in the installation. Also,
a temporizer in the equipment of each luminaire may be available, which programmed as required, passes from the normal
level to the reduced one.
The double level system being described may be applied to high pressure mercury lamps and high pressure sodium lamps
(having special care in ignition circuits). This system is not adequate for metal halide lamps because the colour of the light is
very much affected by the emitted power.
In energy saving systems with several lighting levels, the power factor of the installation must be carefully watched. Sometimes
it will be necessary to reduce the needed installed capacity for the maximum level in the minimum level. An added advantage
in double level equipments is the longer duration of equipments and lamps, since generally, harmful surges are produced in
lines during hours in which lighting is connected at a reduced level.
9.6. Control gears for different discharge lamps. Circuits

Fluorescent tubes
Fluorescent tubes are classified into two large groups, depending on whether cathodes are heated or not for ignition.
The most common ones are the hot cathode that may be ignited by means of a thermal starter (Fig. 17), heating of filaments
in the rapid ignition systems "rapid start" (Fig. 18), "trigger" ignition (the filament voltage is reduced once the tube has ignited),
semiresonant ignition (Fig. 19) and ignition through electronic means.
134
Another type of tubes is that of cold cathodes, which almost exclusively ignite through tension applied between their extremes.
Ballast
Capacitor
Starter
Power supply
Lamp
Lamp
Figure 17. Ignition through starter. Inductive ballast. Compensation of power factor in parallel with the line.
F
Power
supply
Capacitor
Figure 18. Rapid ignition. Circuit with autotransformer dispersion (with heating of electrodes in parallel).
Ballast
Power supply
Capacitor
Lamp
Figure 19. Rapid ignition. "Semi resonant" circuit with heating of electrodes in series.
High pressure mercury lamps

Electric equipments most commonly used are those with an inductance in series with the lamp limiting ignition and normal
regime intensities. The low power factor produced by the use of the inductance is corrected using capacitors in parallel with the
line (Fig. 20).
When voltage of the line is insufficient or excessively large for the one requiring lamps, a transformer between the line and the
stabilization inductance is coupled (inductance may be incorporated to the second transformer and it is then called dispersion
or stray transformer).
135
Ballast
F
Power supply
Capacitor
N
Lamp
Figure 20. High pressure mercury lamp connection scheme.
Low pressure sodium lamps

Equipments used for this lamp type in the recent past have been almost exclusively constituted by a high impedance
autotransformer in the second one and a capacitor in parallel with the line to improve the power factor (Fig. 21). Recently,
inductances in series or semiresonant circuits (low voltages, Fig. 22) and hybrid circuits constituted by more complex
autotransformers associated to electronic starters (Fig. 23) are used with new lamps in order to improve lamp performance and
Lamp
Ballast
reduce power consumption strongly.
Power supply
Capacitor
Figure 21. Dispersion autotransfomer.
Reactance
F
Power supply
Capacitor
Figure 22. Semiresonant starter.
136
Ballast
Capacitor
Power supply
Starter
Figure 23. Hybrid circuit. Electronic impedance and starter.
High pressure sodium lamps

For ignition of this type of lamps, electronic starters have been developed, which generate impulses lamps need for arc ignition
in combination with the ballast, or independently. These starters must stop in impulse emission once the lamp is ignited, in
order not to damage it.
There are two types of starters from the point of view of their association with the ballast: the ones which incorporate a
transformer for generation of high voltage impulses (Fig. 24) and those using inductance as a transformer (Fig. 25). The first
ones must be mounted very close to the associated lamp; the ballast may be also located far from the lamp. Those which use
impedance as a transformer are more economical and must harmonize the couple reactance- starter. The lamp may be far from
the equipment depending on the cable capacity allowed by the starter.
Anyway, stabilization in these lamps is strongly determined by the characteristic of the sodium arc, whose tension is not constant
along its life. The best stabilization system for this type of lamp is an inductance in series with constant power supply.
Ballast
Lamp
Capacitor
Power supply
Starter
Figure 24. Scheme with an independent starter.
Ballast
F
Capacitor
Starter
Lamp
Power supply
Figure 25. Scheme with a semiparallel starter.
137
Metal halide lamps

In general, special ballasts need not have developed for these lamps. Metal halide lamps with three bands use ballasts designed
for high pressure mercury lamps. Rare earth lamps and tin lamps work well with ballasts for high pressure sodium lamps.
Since the voltage of the ballast is not enough to start this lamp, an external starter is needed (Figs. 26., 27. and 28.)
Ballast
Lamp
Power supply
Capacitor
Starter
Figure 26. Scheme with an independent starter.
Ballast
F
Capacitor
Starter
Lamp
Power supply
Figure 27. Scheme with a semiparallel starter.
Ballast
Power supply
Capacitor
Starter
Figure 28. Scheme with a parallel starter.
138
Lamp
Chapter 10.
INDOOR AND INDUSTRIAL

LIGHTING
10.1. General remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

10.2. Lighting levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
10.3. Glare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10.4. Shadows and modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
10.5. Light quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
10.6. Lighting design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
10.7. Indoor lighting calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
10.8. Some recommended lighting levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
139
140
Chapter 10. INDOOR AND INDUSTRIAL LIGHTING

Human beings need to be informed about their surroundings in order to perform their activities in an easy and harmless fashion.
Most information about the environment reaches human beings through their eyes. Therefore, it is of a visual nature. The term visibility
(of an object) is used as a measure of easiness, fastness and precision an object may be detected and visually recognized. In
consequence, a good visibility of the surrounding environment, and everything it contains, is essential.
Good lighting is required for good visibility. Although good visibility of relevant objects is a necessary condition, it is not always enough
to perform activities easily and comfortably. In indoor areas, where a task is performed, the main function of lighting is to provide
comfort for visual tasks in this place. However, in circulation areas, resting areas or living rooms, visual capacity criterion is not so
important. Pleasantness and visual comfort is what matters.
Thus, the most important criteria related to lighting design for a particular application are visibility and visual satisfaction. Moreover, such
factors must be well balanced in relation to installation and working costs.
10.1.1. Visibility / visual performance

Working in indoor areas, the influence of lighting while doing the job is very important.
Performance for a specific person, for a concrete job, is esencially translated into a function of the persons ability to perform
a task (execution potential), on the one hand. On the other hand, the persons attitude towards the task execution (execution
attitude) is also relevant.
Attitude during execution determines, to what extent, the execution potential is efficiently used. It includes factors such as
motivation, dedication and concentration, of a social or psychological nature, and which lie outside our field of study.
Lighting, as well as other factors in the physic environment, may influence the execution potential, but, influence on real
execution also depends on the execution attitude.
Visual performance is the term used to describe the eye working speed and the accuracy with which a task is performed.
Visibility of a task is generally determined by visibility of the most difficult element which must be detected or recognized so
that work can be performed. This detail is known as critical detail. Visibility of the critical detail is a function of the difficulty
experienced in order to discriminate it visually from the background on which it is seen, from other details found in its most
immediate surroundings.
Luminance
In order to achieve good visibility at work, the most important factor is related to luminance of the task and its surroundings.
The general effect of luminance on visibility is due to the resulting adaptation, process by which properties of the visual
system are modified according to luminances of the visual field. For a given luminance distribution in the visual field, the
adaptation process reaches a final state expressed as adaptation luminance.
Visual system properties affected by adaptation to luminance are the following:
- Visual sharpness, which is the capacity of the system to discriminate between details or objects that are very close.
- Sensitivity to contrast, which is the capacity of the system to distinguish between small differences of relative luminance.
- Efficiency of eye motor functions for accommodation, convergence, pupil contraction, eye movements, etc.
Visual sharpness, sensitivity to contrast and efficiency of eye motor functions are larger with the increase of adaptation
luminance up to a maximum certain level.
For tasks where detail angular size is critical with respect to working visibility, an increase in visual sharpness due to another
increase in luminance is highly important to improve task visibility. However, when the angular size of the critical size is very
much above the threshold of visual sharpness, contribution to its increase is insignificant.
Something similar happens with the above mentioned factors. They may also be positively affected by an increase in
luminance. However, it will provide an improved visibility at work as a result, as long as such factors are critical with respect
to visibility of the task under consideration.
Diffusing objects and their surroundings
Luminance of a matte surface is proportional to the product of illuminance in the surface and its reflectance. Luminance as
a factor that influences visibility may be, in consequence, substituted by illuminance and reflectances for diffusing surfaces
141
and their surroundings. Reflectances form part of the intrinsic properties of the task and the indoor area. These are not
affected by lighting. Thus, for these tasks only illuminance remains a factor of the lighting system which affects visibility. It
should be born in mind that for these tasks, luminance contrast is not affected by illuminance, but it is determined by
reflectances of details and their background. Therefore, task visibility will be larger with the increase in illuminance up to a
maximum certain level. The effect of the illuminance increase over visibility will be larger as size is smaller, or the contrast
detail or the number of exigencies of the eye motor functions. For details of large angular size, with a high contrast with the
background and static in a known position, the effect of illuminance increase in visibility on a moderate level will be
insignificant.
Bright objects and their surroundings
Considering that luminance of a perfectly matt object is proportional to the product of illuminance and reflectance (diffuse),
luminance of a regular reflecting surface is proportional to the product of its reflectance (regular) and the environmental
luminance in the reflection direction.
In practice, however, most surfaces do not belong either to the perfectly diffused reflection or to the perfectly regular one.
Surfaces have mixed reflection properties in such a way that their luminance depends both on the illuminance properties of
the surface as well as on the luminances of the surroundings. In order to relate luminance of mixed reflection surfaces with
illuminance in a similar way as luminance of a matt surface is related to illuminance by its reflectance, the luminance factor
has been introduced.
Luminance factor of a surface in a given direction under certain lighting conditions, is the reason for the surface luminance
in that direction to the luminance of a perfectly diffusing white surface, when they are identically illuminated.
From this definition, it may be deduced that the luminance factor of a perfectly diffusing surface is constant and equal to its
reflectance in all directions and under all lighting conditions.
In an environment of uniform luminance L, luminance of a perfectly regular reflecting surface is L in all directions and
luminance of a perfect diffusing white surface is also equal to L. Luminance factors of that regular reflecting surface under
such lighting conditions, are equal to 1 in all directions.
In an environment of luminance equal to 0 except for a limited L luminance area (source), luminance of a perfect diffusing
white surface is smaller than L because illuminance is lower than illuminance in an environment of uniform luminance L.
Luminance of a regular perfectly reflecting surface is equal to 0 except in all reflection directions of the source in which
luminance is equal to L. Luminance factor of such regular surface, thus, is larger than 1 in the directions of reflection of the
source and 0 in all other directions.
Since bright surfaces have reflection properties partly regular and partly diffused, it may be deduced from all the above that
for such mixed reflection surfaces, luminance factor will be constant and equal to its reflectance (mixed) in all directions only
in a uniform luminance environment. In other environments, it may reach values between 0 and above 1, depending both
on reflection properties and lighting systems.
This also means that contrasts in objects which are not perfectly matt are affected by lighting because they are determined
by luminance factors of details and background. These may reach different values in different visual directions, especially in
directions of high luminance reflection.
In conclusion, for tasks and bright contours not only illuminance is important for good visibility but also lighting direction. This
is a general term which describes the special distribution of incident light in the task. It is determined by luminance
distribution of the environment and depends on factors such as geometry of installation, luminances of luminaires and indoor
reflectances.
10.1.2. Visual satisfaction

Visual satisfaction is a term used to describe visual condition acceptability.
For indoor work, visual satisfaction is essentially a function of easiness of work under real conditions, and pleasant or
comfortable visual environment, when both concentrate on the task and when they are improved or seek relaxation.
Visual satisfaction is affected by the luminous environment and individual preferences.
For indoor areas with matt surfaces and tasks, influential factors of the luminous environment are illuminances in different
142
surfaces and their task. Give origin to brightness by reflectio is. an important factor affecting visual satisfaction.
For indor areas with bright tasks or surroundings, environmental luminances reflected on surfaces and which may veil the
contrast of the task or give origin to brightness by reflection, are an important factor affecting visual satisfaction.
Much research has been conducted in order to determine a preferred range of horizontal illuminances surrounding indoor
areas. For such a purpose, carefully controlled values of surface reflectance in a room must be taken into account. Out of the
results obtained in Western Europe, for brightness free fluorescent lighting conditions, an average curve has been determined
indicating the percentage of observers which consider a particular illuminance as satisfactory. This curve is shown in Fig. 1,
together with the evaluation of too dark and too light.
%
100
80
Satisfactory
Too dark
Too light
60
40
20
0
2
10
10
10
(Lx)
Figure 1. Response combinations.
10.1.3. Visual capacity

Visual capacities vary from one individual to another, as it happens with other individual factors characteristic of people. Visual
capacity depends on factors such as shape and transparency of elements of the eye optical system, accommodation capacity,
convergence and aligning of eyes and retina spectral sensitivity. Reduced visual capacity due to refraction errors may be
corrected using prescription glasses.
Visual capacities are reduced with aging. The most important change when the eye ages is that the range on which it is
possible to adjust accommodation exactly at a given distance is reduced. Other physical changes in the aging eyes are a
reduction of light transmission by means of optical media and an increase in media dispersion. This means that old people
may be less sensitive to central light, which may reduce visibility, and more sensitive to peripheryl light, which may cause
glares. Providing a glare free adequate lighting is even more important for elder workers than for young people.
10.1.4. Lighting parameters

Level and quality of lighting provided by a given installation may be described by means of the following parameters:
- Lighting level.
- Glares.
- Shadows and modelling.
- Quality of light.
- Lighting design.
143
10.2. Lighting levels

The required lighting level in a certain situation is expressed in terms of illuminance. At the end of this chapter some charts are shown
where such a level may be consulted for most of the activities.
Reference surface
Reference surface of an indoor area is the surface where the recommended appropriate illuminance is supplied, selected
from the charts shown at the end of the present chapter. The reference surface does not need to be reduced to a single
surface area, but it may include a number of separate areas. Indoor lighting specifications must always include a clear
definition of the reference surface.
In indoor working areas, the reference surface will normally be the working plane. For indoor areas where tasks are not
restricted to fixed places, the working plane is considered to be the horizontal plane limited by indoor walls at a height of
0.85 m. above the floor. For indoor areas where task localizations are known and clearly specified, the reference surface may
consist in specific areas of working or task areas.
When the task is not performed in a horizontal plane or is at a different height, the reference surface will have the angle of
the task plane and be at its height.
In indoor areas where work is not done, the reference surface may be the floor, the wall, or any important plane.
Illuminance uniformity
Illuminance given on the reference surface by a lighting installation will never be totally uniform, either in space or in time.
Uniformity in space
Measurement of illuminance uniformity on the reference surface is the ratio between minimum illuminance and average
illuminance.
In general lighting, illuminance uniformity on the reference surface must not be lower than 0.8 to provide possible locations
of equivalent tasks in all the indoor areas.
In localized general lighting or lighting of general areas, average illuminance in areas surrounding tasks must not be lower
than one third of the level for task areas.
Ratio between average illuminances for two adjacent indoor areas (for example, an office and a corridor) must not exceed
5:1.
Uniformity in time
Average illuminance given by an installation will gradually decrease with time due to depreciation of the lamp luminous
flux and the accumulation of dirtiness in lamps, luminaires and surfaces in the room.
Initial lighting: it is the average illuminance when the installation is new and surfaces in the room are clean. Initial
illuminance must be chosen according to requisites imposed by the maintenance program. Its value should not be
used for illuminance recommendations.
Illuminance in service: it is the average illuminance during all maintenance cycle on the reference surface. In some
countries, it is used for illuminance recommendations.
Maintenance illuminance: it is the average illuminance on the reference surface during all the time between two
maintenance operations, substitution of lamps and/ or cleaning of luminaires and surfaces in the room. In some
countries, it is used for illuminance recommendations. In countries where recommended illuminance is established in
terms of illuminance in service, maintenance illuminance should not be under 0.8 of the recommended value.
10.3. Glare
Glare is the sensation produced by an exaggerated luminance within the visual field which alters sensitivity of the eye, causing
discomfort, reducing visibility or both.
Glare may take place in two different ways. Sometimes they occur separately, but generally, they take place simultaneously. The first is
144
known as physiological glare (or disability glare). It impairs visual capacity and visibility, but it does not necessarily produce discomfort.
The second is known as psychological glare (or discomfort glare). This type is discomforting but it does not necessarily impairs object
observation.
In indoor lighting, psychological glare (discomfort) is likely to be more of a problem than physiological glare (disability). Measurements
taken to control discomfort glare will have to take discomfot glare into account, too. The sensation of discomfort experimented by
discomfort glare tends to increase with the passing of time and contributes to nervous tension and fatigue.
Any given type of glare may be direct or by reflection. Direct glare is the glare directly caused by luminances of the sources of
light, such as lamps, luminaires and windows, which appear in the observers field of vision. Glare by reflection is the glare
produced by reflected luminances from surfaces with high reflectance, especially specular surfaces such as polished metals,
except when these form part of the luminaire. Glare by reflection must be distinguished from other types of reflection which
produce a reduction of the task contrast. They are more correctly described as veiling reflections (high luminance is reflected
by the task towards the eyes, veiling it and reducing its contrasts).
10.3.1. Glare control

Control of direct glare of lamps and luminaires consists in controlling their luminance in the direction of the observers eyes.
Nevertheless, the degree of experimented glare is not only a function of luminaires in the workers visual field, but it also
depends on the type of activity performed. The more light demanded by the visual task, and the higher the need of
concentration, the higher discomfort will be, too. However, in those situations where the worker must move to perform the
task, the experimented discomfort will be less.
Therefore, the luminance degree of control will differ according to the type of task or activity. The C.I.E. has classified tasks
and activities in five groups depending on the required luminance degree of control. In Chart 1, five groups referring to Quality
Classes are enumerated.
In general terms, the highest luminances in an indoor area produced by the lighting installation are those coming from lamps.
Generally speaking, such luminances are too high to use lamps without controlling their brightness in the direction of the
eyes. This is the reason why one of the luminaire functions is to limit luminance in the critical directions at an acceptable
level.
Quality
Glare
Class
A, very high quality
index (G)
1.15
B, high quality
Type of task or
1.50
activity
Visual tasks exceptionally difficult.
Visual tasks extremely difficult.
Tasks requiring moderate visual demand and high
concentration.
C, average quality
1.85
Visual tasks moderately difficult, moderate concentration

requirement and workers movement to a certain extent.
D, low quality
2.20
Visual tasks demanding low visual and concentration levels,

workers frequently confined to movement within a restricted
area.
E, very low quality
2.55
Interiors used with visual tasks not requiring a perception of

detail where workers are not confined to a specific work place
but they move freely from one place to another and not
continuously used by the same workers.
Chart 1. C.I.E. quality classes for glare limitation
10.3.2. Practical methods for glare control

Fundamentally, glare control means control of the focus luminance in the interval between 45 and 90 (Fig. 6). There are
several methods to perform this control. Among them, two are going to be studied below, devoting more attention to the
last one in section 10.3.3.:
145
- Control with translucent materials.

- C.I.E. design system.
Control with translucent materials
This method controls visible luminance surrounding lamps with a diffuser or prismatic material. Usually, the strictest limits are
imposed in the upper part of the interval.
Luminaire mounting height, room dimensions, degree of control of selected glare and in some cases, luminaire orientation,
notably influence the selection of appropriate limits for each interval.
These factors have been born in mind for different systems developed in order to determine the appropriate luminance limit
and/ or the degree of glare a determined installation is supposed to have.
C.I.E. design system
One of the main objectives of the C.I.E. on discomfort glare has been to develop a mathematical formula which may generate
glare values for simple sources as well as for a group of sources. The formula proposed is the mathematical average term
more usually applicable between different national systems. This formula is suggested to be rigurously checked bearing in
mind its possible adoption as a formula recommended by the C.I.E.
G= 8 . log 2
1+ Ed / 500
Ei + Ed
L2 . w
p2
where:
G: C.I.E. glare index.
Ed and Ei: vertical illuminances in the eye.
Ed: directly from sources of glare.
Ei: indirectly from background.
L: luminance of the source of glare.
w: size of the source of glare.
p: Guths position index (position index for each luminaire, which is related to the shift of the area of vision).
10.3.3. C.I.E. glare protection system

It is the system of luminance curve used in combination with a system of protective angle as an additional verifier for
luminaires having visible lamps, or parts of them, within the zone of critical vision. It is considered to be the simplest and
most practical method, and it is the one that will be described below.
Luminance limitation curves (Fig. 2), comprise a scale of glare indexes which represent quality classes from A to E, together
with different values of standard illuminance in service. Two diagrams depending on luminaire type and orientation according
to the direction of vision must be used.
Quality
1.15
1.50
1.85
2.20
2.55
A
B
C
D
E
Values E illuminance in service (lx)

2000
85
GM
1000
2000
500
1000
2000
=<300
500
1000
2000
=<300
500
1000
2000
=<300
500
1000
=<300
500
85
GM
=<300
ab c d
75
65
75
55
65
45
55
45
9 103
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Cd/m2 2
Diagram 2
9 103
Diagram 1
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Cd/m2 2
Figure 2. Diagrams of luminance curves for evaluation of direct glare.
146
Diagrams of Fig. 2 are diagrams of luminance curves for the evaluation of direct glare. Diagram 1 is for those directions of
vision parallel to the longitudinal axis of any elongated luminaire and for luminaires lacking lateral luminous panels observed
from any direction. Diagram 2 is for those directions of vision in right angles to the longitudinal axis of any luminaire with
lateral luminous panels.
Limitation of the required luminance depends on the type and orientation of the luminaire, the shielding angle, the
acceptance degree or quality class, and the value of illuminance in service.
Type of luminaire
The terms luminous laterals and elongated used to describe the types of luminaire are defined in the following
way:
- Luminous laterals: a luminaire is considered to have luminous laterals if it has a luminous lateral panel with a height
of more than 30 mm.
- Elongated: a luminaire is considered to be elongated when the ratio between the length and the width of the
luminous area is higher than 2:1.
Luminaire orientation
When using diagrams in Fig. 2, luminance distribution of the luminaire in two vertical planes must be taken into account: the
C0-C180 plane and the C90-C270 plane.
85
85
75
45
75
45
C90 - C270
C0 - C180
Figure 3. C- planes in which luminaire luminance must be verified.

When luminaires are mounted in the C0-C180 plane parallel to the axis of the premises, luminaire distribution on such a plane
is used to control glare limitation in the longitudinal direction of the room. Luminance distribution in the C90-C270 plane is
used to verify glare limitation in the transverse direction of the room.
When luminaires are mounted on the C90-C270 plane parallel to the premises logitudinal axis, such a plane must be used to
verify glare limitation in the room longitudinal direction, and luminance distribution on the C0-C180 plane to verify glare
limitation on the room transverse way.
For elongated luminaires on the C90-C270 plane this is chosen coincident with (or parallel to) the longitudinal axis of the lamp/
s. When such a plane is parallel to the direction of perceived vision, vision is supposed to be longitudinal. However, when
the C90-C270 plane is in right angles to the direction of vision, vision is considered to be transversal.
Shielding angle
For those luminaires which, when being observed from an angle of 45 or more with respect to the vertical, lamps or parts
of them may be seen, not only the average luminance of the luminaire according to curves must be limited in Fig. 4, but
also lamps must be well shielded depending on lamp luminance and quality class chosen.
The required shielding angles (Figs. 4 and 5) are shown in Chart 2. If the shielding angle is equal or higher than the tabulated,
glare will belong to the specified class or better.0
147
Figure 4. Shielding angles for several luminaires.
Shielding angle
90 - < S
90 - = S
90 - > S
Figure 5. Glare control due to shielding.

Types of sources
According to statistical experience, the minimum luminance threshold is that of 10-5 cd/m2 . Glare appears from 5 000 cd/m2
onwards and, under no circumstances must it go over 20 000 cd/m2. In order to control glare, it is convinient to divide
sources into two large groups, that is to say, those which have a luminance under 20 000 cd/m2 and those with a luminance
above this value.
Sources under 20 000 cd/m2 include all normal types of fluorescent lamps. Luminaires belonging to this group of sources
use, translucent materials and shielding for glare control. In some circumstances, lamp luminance is low enough to allow
bare use.
The group of sources above 20 000 cd/m2 includes for the most part compact lamp types, with an incandescent filament
and varieties of gas discharge. Although both methods of glare control mentioned before are used in low power lamps, the
shielding method is almost excusively used to control glare in the most powerful types, as far as industrial lighting goes. In
these cases, illuminance in the observers eye, such as luminance, must be taken into account. Because of this reason, both
flux coming out and mounting height must be carefully considered when calculating shielding angles convenient for sources
of this class.
148
Luminance range
Quality class of glare
lamp average (cd/m2)
Lamp type
limitation
ABC
20
Lower than 20 000

From 20 000 to 50 000
30
DE
10 *
20
Tubular fluorescent.
High pressure discharge
diffusers or fluorescent tubes.
More than 50 000
30
30
High pressure discharge

Light glass tubular tubes.
Light glass incandescent.
Chart 2. Minimum shielding angles required additionally.

Glare degree or quality class
Curves comprise a scale of five degrees of glare corresponding to five quality classes (Chart 1).
Degrees of glare emerge from glare subjective evaluation performed in a laboratory by a group of observers, using a nine point
scale where the main points were marked.
Standard servicie illuminance
Standard service illuminance value, 300 lux onwards, is used together with quality class, as a parameter to select the limit
curve of the adequate luminance.
Ratio a/h
Instead of the adequate range of critical ranges, a range of critical ratios a/h may be used, where a represents the horizontal
distance and h the vertical distance between the observers eye and the furthest luminaire (Fig. 6). These values are
represented on the right side of glare diagrams.
a
Critical vision zone
45
hs
tan =
a
hs
1.20 m.
Critical radiant zone
Figure 6. Critical radiant and vision zones.

Luminance values
Luminance distribution of luminaires in the C0-C180 and C90-C270 planes are initial values. Average luminance of the luminaire
in a given direction may be calculated as the quotient between luminous intensity in such a direction and apparent luminous
area.
* For linear lamps seen frontways: 0.
149
Limitation curves are valid for:

- General lighting.
- Lines of vision predominantly horizontal or downwards.
- Reflectances of 0.5, at least, for flat ceilings and walls, and, at least, 0.25 for furniture.
For a luminous ceiling, glare limitation will be enough provided luminance in angles greater than 45 does not exceed 500
cd/m2.
Process for the use of the protection system from glare
1. Determine average luminance between 45 and 85 and the type of luminaire chosen for the installation.
2. Determine the quality class and the level of illuminance required for the installation (provided it is new).
3. Select the adequate curve (class and level) of the corresponding diagram.
4. Determine the maximum angle, for the length and height of the room, between the level of the eye and the luminaire
plane.
5. Take the horizontal line of the glare limitation diagram for the value a/h found in the previous step. The part of curve over
this line may be ignored.
6. Compare luminaire luminance with the chosen part of the limitation curve.
There will not be psychological glare if the luminaire luminance value does not exceed the luminance specified by the chosen
limitation curve within the range of the emission angles. If the result is different, the design must be modified, for example,
selecting another type of luminaire. It is advisable to use this method only in indoor working areas. In other situations, that
is to say, in public places, halls and entrances, higher illuminances may be required since sources of light in these places
serve as an animation element.
New development
A new development in the area of glare systems is the C.I.E. Unified Glare Rating, UGR, which is a new evaluation system of
psychological glare in indoor lighting. Although this system has not been internationally approved, it may be adopted to
general use.
UGR formula
The formula to calculate the UGR value is the following:
UGR= 8 . log
0.25
Lb
L2 . w
p2
where:
Lb = background luminance (cd/m2).
L = luminance of luminous parts of each luminaire in the direction of the observers eye (cd/m2).
=solid angle drawn by the luminous parts of each luminaire in the observers eye (stereoradian).
p = position index for each luminaire, which is related to the shift of the area of vision (Guths position
index for each luminaire)
A more exact evaluation of glare is achieved by means of a direct application of the UGR formula for the considered
installation, for which a computer program is required.
UGR Charts
A simpler UGR value may be obtained, although not as exact, using standard UGR glare charts. These charts provide
the UGR value calculated for different standard situations and for different types of luminaires.
A disadvantage of these charts is that luminaires cannot be classified. Due to this reason, UGR limitation curves have
been developed.
150
UGR limitation curves

Glare limitation curves calculated using the UGR method are slightly different to limitation curves of the C.I.E. glare
limitation described before. These comprehend five lines instead of eight, and the range of luminances covered is
considerably larger.
C= 0-180
C= 90-270
UGR
85
13
16
19
22
25
28
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
2
8 10
3 4 5 6 8 10
3 4 5 6 8 10
3 4 5 6 8 10
2
2
L (cd/m )
Figure 7
The range of the glare index extends from 13 to 28 in groups of 3 units, this being the least increase provided by a
significative change in the sensation of psychological glare.
Another difference is that for these curves, luminaire classification is independent from illuminance. Thanks to curves
luminaires may be classified. However, they are not as exact as charts, since only the luminaire effect is considered and not
the effect of all the installation.
Glare produced by windows
Sky luminance in which glare begins to be perceived is approximately 2 000 cd/m2 and corresponds to horizontal illuminance
of 10 000 lux under cloudy conditions.
Since sky luminance may not be diminished, glare produced by windows may only be prevented using curtains, blinds or
lattices. Alternatively, working positions may be established in such a way that glare from windows does not interfere with
the occupants field of vision.
Psychological glare produced by windows may be reduced using very light decorations on surfaces close to window openings
and spreading decorations on them, allowing incident light to reduce contrast from the window.
Veiling reflections and reflected glare
Brightness of a source of light reflected by a matte or semi-matte surface in the observers eyes produces a slight or
considerable discomfort. When this reflection is produced in a task is known as veiling reflection. When glare is produced
outside the task, it is reflected glare.
On top of producing discomfort, veiling reflections reduce the context of the task, and, as a consequence produce a loss of
details.
Both veiling reflections and reflected glare may be minimized in the following way:
1. Designing a lighting system or locating working areas in such a way that no part of the visual task is within or near the
reflection angle of any bright source of light with respect to the eye.
2. Increasing the amount of light in both sides on the visual task, approximately in right angles to the direction of vision.
3. Using luminaires which possess a wide range of emission and low luminance.
4. Using working surfaces, paper, stationery, office machines, etc. with a matte surface to reduce effects from reflection.
151
10.4. Shadows and modelling

The appearance of indoor areas is improved when their structural characteristics, objects and people are illuminated in such a way that
silhouttes are seen in a clear and comfortable way, and shadows are formed with no confusion. Such a thing happens when light flows
in an evident way in one direction more than in any other. The term modelling is used to describe the form in which silhouttes
of three dimensional objects are stresssed by lighting.
Modelling may be strong or weak; the most effective degree for any indoor area depends on type of construction and activities implied.
When light comes from many directions and is too diffused, modelling may be light and the indoor area may be little interesting due
to the loss of luminance contrast. Besides, if the directional component is very strong, modelling will normally be severe and shadows
may be confused.
However, pronounced shadows, like the ones obtained with sources of light concentrated in a small area, may be used to produce
intentioned dramatic effects. Shops, art rooms and many other places will require lighting with a provision for modelled shadows in
several degrees.
A window or a big luminaire may produce good modelling without strong shadows, but if the source is very big in relation to the
distance to the illuminated object, like in the case of indirect lighting, modelling will remain weakened.
Profound shadows which produce excessive luminance contrasts may be softened by means of applying additional sources of light.
Finishes with high diffusing reflectances in the surfaces of the room result in efficient secondary sources of light also reducing shadows,
materially speaking, and reflecting a significant amount of diffused light within shadowy areas. Shadows with soft edges are obtained
with sources of large areas such as fluorescent lamp luminaires or indirect lighting systems.
10.5. Light quality

In chapter 4 devoted to The Colour, it was explained that the most important characteristics of the quality of light are Colour
Temperature (TC) and Colour Performance Index (R or Ra).
Colour Temperature (TC) has an important influence on the environment created as long as coldness or heat sensations go. At the
same time, it promotes or reduces object chromaticity in the same way. Moreover, the term TC cannot be manipulated in an
independient way, but it must be combined in an adequate way with illuminance so that disturbing effects of visual perception are not
ILLUMINANCE IN LUX
produced. Kruithofs curves delimit possible combinations between TC and illuminance calculation (Fig. 8).
5 000
500
50
5
2 000
2 500 3 000
4 000
5 000
COLOR TEMPERATURE K
Figure 8. Kruithofs curves for the ratio between Tc and illuminance.
152
10 000
The Chromatic Reproduction Index (R) is extremely important as far as quality of light goes, being the first measurement in activities
where an optimal chromatic reproduction is absolutely essential (see chapter 4).
Light and colour in indoor areas

Apart from lamp colour properties, another aspect of colour which influences visual comfort in a room, is the colour diagram
chosen for surfaces in a room. In general terms, light colours must be chosen to achieve high luminous efficiency for main
surface areas. A white surface will reflect around 80% of the incident light, a light colour about 50%, a medium colour
between 30% and 50%, and a dark colour less than 10%.
In order to achieve the best results, materials and colours must be selected under equal or similar light to the planned one
for the designed medium, apart from other factors of a subjective kind, climat, sex, age, colour surfaces which influence the
rest of the colours, etc.
153
10.6. Lighting design

Lighting is an art and a science. Therefore, there cannot be rigid or light rules regulating the design process. The basic purpose for a
good lighting design is to create a lighting installation which will provide a good visibility for the task and, at the same time, a satisfactory
visual environment.
The function of a space enormely influences the way in which lighting must be applied. Therefore, spatial visual requisites have to be
determined in the first place. Later on, and taken the results of these analysis as a basis, appropriate decisions for selection of lighting
systems, lamps and luminaires will be made.
In some cases, the lighting designer may choose the lighting system type; In other cases, architectural design and structural conditions
may dictate a particular type installation.
Indoor decoration and specially reflectances of the large surface rooms have a considerable influence in the lighting appearance.
However, the most important fact is to have the design process in mind, consisting in two well- differenciated stages. The first stage
begins with the client, and includes the study of different local factors which will influence the design. The second stage is the design
process itself, and, it is in this stage where the first decision out of many more regarding design is taken.
10.6.1. Luminance distribution on surfaces

Luminance distribution within a field of vision is an extremely important criterion in lighting design. It must be considered as
complementary of indoor illuminance distribution.
For a given lighting level, differences in luminance may be due to differences in surface reflectance. Although illuminance
may be appropriate for the visual task, it will not necessarily provide an acceptable luminance balance in the indoor area.
Such a balance will depend on chosen reflectances for surfaces. Lighting in this regard may contribute to improve the poorest
situation, but the result will always be visually unsatisfactory. Therefore, luminance distribution must be considered as
supplementary in indoor lighting projects.
The following aspects must be carefully considered:
1. Luminance of the task and luminance of its surroundings.
2. Extreme values of wall and ceiling luminance.
3. Glare suppression, limiting luminaire and window luminances.
In Fig. 9, the scale of luminances for indoor lighting may be observed. This is a very important fact for luminance distribution.
cd/m2
10000
5000
2000
Permitted luminance for

general lighting luminaires
1000
500
200
Task preferred luminance
100
Flat ceiling and wall

preferred luminance
50
20
Satisfactorily
perceptible
10
5
Permitted luminance for

luminaires in
VDU working places
Human face
features
Barely
perceptible
2
1
(Recommended luminance for paths)
Figure 9. Luminance scales for indoor lighting.
154
Luminance distribution for working areas

If possible, luminances for the immediate surroundings of the task should be lower than luminances for the task, but,
preferably, not lower than 1/3 of this value. This implies that the ratio for the immediate background reflectance of a task to
the task itself should be in the 0.3 0.5 range. This constitutes a practical or useful requisite for offices, but its application
is difficult, and sometimes, even impossible. In most factories, the task is usually dark and the lighting designer may rarely
specify the background reflectance.
10.6.2. Light emission depreciation

Illuminance provided initially by a lighting installation will decrease in a gradual way during its use due to a reduction in lamp lumens, to
lamps which burn down, and to accumulation of dirtiness in lamps, luminaires and surfaces of the room. However, it is possible to maintain illuminance at or above the minimum permitted value (known as maintained value) cleaning the lighting equipment and the room
surfaces as well as replacing burned down or used up lamps at adequate intervals, according to a previously agreed maintenance program.
The value for such maintenance program is indicated in Fig.10. Clearly for the case illustrated, illuminance in the non- maintained
system will decrease up to a 40% of the initial value within the first three years and it will continue to decrease. But with a yearly cleaning, relamping and paint changing every three years, illuminance reaches 60% of the initial value. In three years, the maintained
system provides an illuminance 50% greater than that of the system without maintenance.
Number of years, supposing 3 000 hours working per year
1
100
Loss due to lam
90
p deterioration
Lighting percentage
80
70
62
60
50
40
Cleaning twice a year and relamping
70
71
Loss for lamp

dirtiness
65
Benefit for cleaning

every six months
62
Cleaning once a year and relamping
55
Cleaning twice a year and initial lamps
Benefit for cleaning Relamping also benefitial

every six months
Cleaning once a year and initial lamps
30
Luminaires cleaned
every 12 months
20
Luminaires cleaned
every 12 months
10
0
1 000
2 000
3 000
4 000
5 000
6 000
7 000
8 000
9 000
Working hours
Figure 10. Depreciation combined curves showing the cleaning and renovation effect
for an installation of fluorescent lamps.
Factors to be considered in indoor lighting depreciation
Dirtiness in lamps and luminaires
For the most part, light loss may be attributed to dirtiness accumulated in lamps and light control surfaces (reflected, refracted
or diffused) of luminaires.
Depreciation speed caused by dirtiness which accumulates on light control surfaces is affected by the tilt angle, finish, and
surface temperature, by the luminaire ventilation degree or tightness, as well as by the atmospheric pollution degree
surrounding the luminaire.
Depreciation in the emission of light may be reduced selecting appropriate luminaires for each place. Those luminaires with
open bases and closed surfaces accumulate dirtiness more quickly than those with ventilation. In ventilated luminaires,
convection currents take dust and dirtiness out through holes or slits in the canopy or reflector, and out of reflection surfaces.
In highly polluted environments, it is better to use sealed or dustproof luminaires. Some of them possess a filter inside which
155
allows the necessary breathing to take place.

Dirtiness on the surfaces of the room
Dirtiness accummulated on ceilings (flat ceilings) and walls reduces their reflectance value and, thus, the amount of reflected
light. The connection between this and the calculation of illuminance will obviously depend on the size of the room under
study and on the luminaire light distribution. The effect will be more pronounced in small rooms or when there is luminaires
with an indirect component.
Depreciation of the lamp flux
Luminous performance of all lamps diminishes with use, but the speed of such diminution varies greatly according to
types of lamps and manufacturers. Hence, calculations for lighting must bear in mind specified depreciation of the
luminous performance of each lamp in particular.
It must be taken into account that data shown in figures are based on certain suppositions related to working
conditions. One or more of the following factors may influence the depreciation index:
- Room temperature.
- Lamp working position.
- Supplied voltage.
- Type of control equipment used, if relevant.
Lamp failure
Average life of a lamp depends on the type of lamp used and, for discharge lamps, on the ignition cycle. Failures in lamps
cause not only a reduction in illuminance levels, but also an inacceptable reduction in the lighting uniformity degree.
Maintenance factor (fm)
fm is defined as the ratio between illuminance produced by the lighting installation at a specified time, at the illuminance
produced by the installation itself when it is new.
fm, thus, combines losses caused by lamp depreciation flux, luminaire depreciation and depreciation of the room surface. If
each of these depreciation causes is quantified by a specific period of use, a general factor product of the three factors is
obtained.
fm = lamp flux loss factor x luminaire loss factor x room surface loss factor
When the light loss factor for different maintenance situations is calculated, it is possible to predict the illuminance situation
produced by the installation in relation to the time elapsed.
10.7. Indoor lighting calculations

10.7.1. Lighting levels and recommendations
Before beginning lighting calculations, required values will be obtained for the type of activity to be developed in the premises
to be illuminated. Such values may be found at the end of the chapter and they are:
- Average illuminance in service.
- Glare limitation quality.
Beside these requirements, values for the dimensions of the premises are fundamental, the working plane height, as well as
the luminaire mounting contour height.
10.7.2. Index of premises

Premises to be illuminated are classified according to the relation that exists between their dimensions, mounting height and
type of lighting. This is called index of the premises and it serves the purpose of determining the utilization factor.
The utilization factor is calculated in the following way:
- For direct, semidirect, direct-indirect and general diffused luminaires:
156
Ratio of premises =
A.L
h . (A + L)
- For indirect and semi-indirect luminaires:

Ratio of premises =
3.A.L
.
2 h . (A + L)
In both formulas:
A = Width of the premises (m.).
L = Length of the premises (m.).
h= Mounting height (m.). The distance between the luminaire down to the useful or working plane is considered.
The height of the premises, H, is the sum of the luminaire suspension contour height, C, plus the mounting height, h,
plus 0.85* m. to which the working plane is from the ground.
Since H and C are data previous to the installation, mounting height is calculated with the following formula:
h = H C 0.85 (m.)
10.7.3. Light loss or maintenance factor (fm)

In general terms, maintenance factors shown in Chart 3 may be established, which are the result of the working environment.
This factor is obtained by multiplication of three factors (lamp flux depreciation, luminaire depreciation and depreciation of
room surface), as it had been commented previously.
Working environment
Steel fabrication, melting areas
Fm
0.65
Welding industries, mechanized
0.70
Industrial offices, rooms
0.75
Operation patios, public premises
0.80
Offices, comercial and computing offices
0.85
Chart 3
10.7.4. Utilization factor or coefficient of utilization (fu)

Utilization factor of a lighting system is the ratio between luminous flux which reaches the working plane and the total flux
emitted by the lamps installed.
This is a very important fact for the calculation of lighting and depends on a diversity of factors, like: adequate value of lighting
level, lighting system, luminaires, dimensions of premises, reflection (ceilings, walls and floor) and maintenance factor.
In general, the reflectances method is used for its determination. Currently, there are also many situations and tabulated
values according to each manufacturer and even computer programs for their users. When this factor is to be used, whether
it is multiplied or not by the luminaire performance () must be taken into account. This will later be used in the lighting
calculation formula.
* Distance at which the working plane is from the ground according to the Construction Technological Norm.
157
10.7.5. Calculation process

Currently, this process is computerised (INDALWIN program). But in this section, the process to be followed to perform an indoor lighting project is going to be indicated. This will be done bearing in mind recommendations established by the C.I.E. as far as illuminances in service are concerned, direct glare quality limitation and colour rendering group (R or Ra) more highly recommended for a concrete installation (warehouses, offices, classrooms, etc.). The following steps must be followed:
1) Premises geometrical characteristics.
2) Reflection characteristics of different surfaces.
3) Obtaining required values for the type of activity to be developed in the premises (average illuminance in service,
glare limitation quality, R), of the C.I.E. charts.
4) Selection of the type of luminaire to be installed according to the characteristics of the premises, which will define
whether the luminaire is to be embedded, suspended or wall mounted.
5) Check that luminaires comply with the direct glare limitation quality.
6) Since an average level will be maintained in the installation, it is necessary to apply depreciation coefficients to initial
values. These have been previously seen.
7) When lighting calculation for premises is done using the utilization factor method, it is necessary to know luminaire
performance and utilization factor (for this reason, K value and ceiling, wall and floor reflections must be known).
8) Once all the data are known, the lighting fundamental formula is applied:
where:
Ems =
. N . . fu . fm
S
Ems = Average lighting in service.

= Lamp unitary luminous flux.
N = Number of lamps (to be determined).
= Luminaire performance.
fu = Utilization factor.
fm = Maintenance factor.
S = Surface to be illuminated.
10.8. Some recommended lighting levels

Construction areas in general
158
Kind of area
Illuminance in service
Quality class
Circulation areas, corridors
100
D-E
Bathrooms, restrooms
100
C-D
Businesses, warehouses
100
D-E
Stairs, Escalators
150
C-D
Assembly workshops
Kind of area
Rough work: heavy machinery
Illuminance in service (lux)

1.300
Quality classd
C-D
1.500
B-C
1.750
A-B
1 500
A-B
Illuminace in service (lux)

1.150
Quality class
C-D
Interior plant general area
1.300
C-D
Control rooms, laboratories
1.500
C-D
Pharmaceutical manufacturing
1.500
C-D
Pneumatic manufacturing
1.500
C-D
assembly
Medium work: vehicle body and
engine assembly
Fine work: office machinery and
electronics assembly
Very fine work: instrument
assembly
Plastic, rubber and chemical industries

Kind of area
Automatic processes
Inspection
1.750
A-B
Colour combination
1 000
A-B
Ironing

1.500
Quality class
A-B
Sewing
1.750
A-B
Inspection
1 000
A-B

1.300
Quality class
B-C
Clothing
Kind of area
Electricity industry
Kind of area
Cable manufacturing
Coil winding
1.500
A-B
Assembly of telephones, radios
1 000
A-B
Evaluation, adjustment
1 000
A-B
Assembly of high precission parts
1 500
A-B
Kind of area
Automatic process

200
Quality class
D-E
General work areas
300
C-D
Craft decoration
500
A-B
electronic components
Food manufacture
159
Smelting
Kind of area
Smelting areas

200
Quality class
D-E
300
C-D
500
A-B
Kind of area
Furnaces/furnace rooms

1.150
Quality class
D-E
Mixing rooms, rooms for
1.300
C-D
Finishing, enamelling and polishing
1.300
B-C
Polishing machine engraving
1.500
B-C
Polishing and manual engraving
1.750
A-C
Fine work
1 000
A-B

50
Quality class
D-E
200
D-E
300
D-E
500
A-B

1.300
Quality class
B-C
1.750
A-B
1 000
A-B
Preliminar workbench, preliminary

nucleus construction
Fine workbench, nucleus
construction, inspection
Ceramics and glass
formation, moulding and furnising
Metal manufacture
Kind of area
Totally automatic
production plants
Semi-automatic
production plants
Work stations with permanent
staff in production plants
Control and inspection platforms
Leather works
Kind of area
General work area
Pressing, cutting, sewing,
shoe manufacture
Classification, piling, quality
control
160
Machine and tool shops

Kind of area
Small part cast

1.200
Quality class
D-E
1.300
C-D
1.500
B-C
1.750
A-B
1 500
A-B

1.500
Quality class
C-D
Ordinary spraying and painting
1.750
B-C
Fine painting, spraying and
1 000
A-B

200
Quality class
D-E
Board and paper manufacture
300
C-D
Inspection, classification
500
A-B

1.500
Quality class
C-D
Binding
1.500
A-B
Composing, correcting,
1.750
A-B
Retouching, etching
1 000
A-B
Colour reproduction and printing
1 500
A-B
Copper and steel etching
2 000
A-B
Kind of area
Carding, patterned cloths

1.300
Quality class
D-E
Spinning, winding, dying
1.500
C-D
Preliminar workbench and machine

work, welding
Intermediate workbench and
machine work
Fine workbench and machine work,
inspection and verification
Fine work, complicated and small
part measurement and inspection
Painting works and spraying cabins

Kind of area
Washing, rough spraying
finishing, retouching and mixing
Paper factory
Kind of area
Automatic processses
Printing works
Kind of area
Printing machine
cutting, and enhancing rooms
Textile industries
Twisting, weaving
1.750
A-B
Sewing, inspection
1 000
A-B
161
Woodwork shops
Kind of area
Sawmills

1.200
Quality class
D-E
Assembly bench work
1.300
C-D
Wood machining
1.500
B-C
Finishing
1.750
A-B
Final inspection, quality control
1 000
A-B
Kind of area
Archives

1.200
Quality class
C-D
Conference rooms
1.300
A-B
General offices, typing,
1.500
A-B
Open and deep offices
1.750
A-B
Drawing offices
1 000
A-B

300
Quality class
A-B
500
A-B
Illuminance in sevice (lux)

300
Quality class
B-C
Self- service
500
B-C
Supermarkets, department stores
750
B-C
Offices
rooms where computer- related

activities are performed
Schools
Kind of area
Workshops, libraries, reading rooms
Classrooms, assembly halls,
laboratories, art rooms, sports halls
Shopping precincts
Kind of area
Conventional shops
162
Public edifices
Kind of area
Cinema auditorium

50
Quality class
B-C
Cinema foyer
150
B-C
Theater and concert hall auditoria
100
B-C
Theater and concert hall foyers
200
B-C
Light- sensitive exhibits in museums
150
B-C
300
B-C
Church naves
100
B-C
Chancel, sanctuary and platform
300
B-C

50
Quality class
B-C
and art galleries

Exhibits insensitive to light in museums
and art galleries
Houses
Kind of area
Bedrooms in general
Head of bedroom
200
B-C
Bathroom in general
100
B-C
Place to shave and make up in
500
B-C
House in general
100
B-C
Place to sew and read
500
B-C
Stairs
100
B-C
Kitchen in general
300
B-C
Kitchens work area
500
B-C
Desk
300
B-C
Childrens room
100
B-C

200
Quality class
B-C
100
B-C
Bedrooms and private bathrooms
300
B-C
Entrance lobbies and conference
300
B-C
500
B-C
the bathroom
Hotels and restaurants

Kind of area
Dining rooms
Bedrooms and bathrooms in
general
halls in general
Kitchens
163
Hospitals
Kind of area
Ward corridors at night

000.050
Quality class
A-B
000.200
A-B
Wards general lighting
000.150
A-B
Lighting in examination rooms
000.500
A-B
General lighting in local
001 000
A-B
Intensive care and observation
000.750
A-B
Nurses stations
000.300
A-B
Pre- operation rooms
000.500
A-B
1 000
A-B
100 000
A-B
000.750
A-B
005 000
A-B
000.750
A-B
001 000
A-B
000.500
A-B
000.750
A-B
Ward corridors during the

night/afternoon
examination rooms
General lighting in
operating rooms
Local lighting in operating
rooms
General lighting in post- mortem
rooms
Local lighting in post- mortem
rooms
General lighting of laboratories
and pharmacies
Local lighting of laboratories
and pharmacies
General lighting in
consulting rooms
Local lighting in
consulting rooms
164
Chapter 11.
FLOODLIGHTING
11.1 General remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

11.2 Utilitarian lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
11.3 Amenity lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
11.4 Sports lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
165
166
Chapter11. FLOODLIGHTING

The Committee for International Lighting (C.I.E.) defines floodlighting as: lighting of a place (scene, area) or of an object by means
of floodlights in order to increase lighting strongly in relation to their surroundings.
There is a great number of totally different application fields and lighting systems to which the term floodlighting is frequently applied
(also the term directed lighting is used). The common technique to all floodlighting installations consists in the use of floodlights to
obtain an increase in surface illuminance with regards to its surroundings.
This important branch of lighting technique is probably the most widely linked to the development of countries and is having a
generalized and important increase.
The scale of applications open to floodlighting with amenity and utilitarian purposes is wide and varied. However, the most important
ones are listed below:
- Utilitarian lighting (large working areas).
- Amenity lighting (buildings, monuments, bridges, parks and gardens).
- Sports lighting.
For each case, floodlighting is a problem to be solved individually. Sometimes, very narrow beams will be necessary, with a great
intensity in candelas to reach areas or objects located at great distances. Some other times, certain opening angles will be required to
achieve good uniformity in the lighting of the zone or field, adjusting the floodlight to its geometrical limits as much as possible.
If the enormous variety presented by the three most important variables intervening in all cases is added (type of area, geometrical
situation of lighting equipments and conditions of the environment or surroundings), it may be easily deduced that it is virtually
impossible to establish a norm. Only for most cases of sports lighting (measure unification, rules of the game, etc.) it is possible to
establish general norms, even though there are several variables.
Therefore, to help the specialist who is going to design the lighting installation project, only the most important basic rules,
recommendations, charts or data to bear in mind may be provided, always taking into account the specialists criterion in order to
supply deficiencies.
Data collection
It is the fundamental base to make ulterior decisions. The more data, the better, as far as planes, observations, possibility of locations,
lighting hours, dirtiness acummulation prediction, surroundings of the area, streets, crossings, roads or nearby roads, power supply
systems, estimate possibilities, etc. is concerned.
- Lighting hours, needs in peak hours, glares, favourable contrasts, atmospheric conditions, etc. must be carefully considered in security,
protection or production lighting.
- Possible colour effects, shadows and contrasts, floodlight angles, surface reflectance, brightness of the surroundings, etc., must not
be forgotten in decorative or architectonic lighting.
- Possible vertical lighting exigencies, avoidance of shadows and glares to users or the audience, contrasts and game features or class
(competition, club, training, leisure, etc.) will be preferably considered in sports lighting.
Illuminance determination
In case it is not provided, the recommendable level must be fixed bearing in mind all particularities and with the help of the charts
present throughout this chapter and at the end of it.
But not only the minimum luminous level for a correct perception of the object must be taken into account (always eased by the
extraordinary eye adaptation capacity), but also the slightest visual fatigue of people subjected to the action of artificial lighting for long
periods of time must also be avoided. Thus, accidents or a decrease of faculties may be avoided.
167
Chapter 11. FLOODLIGHTING
11.2. Utilitarian lighting

This lighting system is integrated by those cases in which floodlighting is necessary because of security, protection or production
purposes, constituting the only logic system to perform lighting. Many large areas, for example road intersections, ports, classification
areas in railways, construction areas, storage areas, container complexes, etc., are illuminated using floodlighting with high columns.
Lighting with high columns is preferred, mainly due to the fewer number of lighting columns used. This factor contributes to mobility
in the illuminated area.
Generally speaking, the high column system supposes a saving in expenses if compared to a system which uses lower columns. The
saving is mainly in the total cost of columns, lamps, luminaires and cables, although there is also a reduction in maintenance expenses.
General remarks
Column height
In order to calculate the column (tower or post) height in which floodlights will be mounted, avoiding a direct glare, the
abacus in Fig. 2 will be used. It is important the fact that with excessive heights, the price of columns increases considerably.
However, if heights are lower, the number of columns, lamps and luminaires increases very much. Also, if there are relatively
high constructions in different positions within the area, mounting heights lower than those shown in the abacus must be
used in order to avoid strong shadows projected on the area. When the emphasis lies in saving space and in the flexibility
of use of the area, the columns used must be higher than those of the abacus, since an increase in height also increases
the allowed space, and, the number of obstructions in the form of columns decreases, too.
Mounting height will be at least H=D/4
.
6m
0 m.
6 m.
12 m.
18 m.
24 m.
30 m.
36 m.
42 m.
48 m.
54 m.
60 m.
0 m.
MOUNTING HEIGHT
.
m. 5 m. 8 m. 1 m. 4 m. 7 m.
1
9 m 12
2
1
2
2
m.
30
m.
33
.
m
36
.
m
39
.
m
42
.
m
45
m.
48
.
m
51
.
m
54
.
m
57
m.
60
20 m. 40 m. 60 m. 80 m. 100 m. 120 m. 140 m.

TOTAL WIDTH OF THE SURFACE TO BE ILLUMINATED
Figure 2
168
MOUNTING HEIGHT
DISTANCE FROM THE COLUMNS TO THE EDGE OF THE AREA TO BE ILLUMINATED
Figure 1
Lighting levels
At least the level required in the horizontal plane (horizontal illuminance) must be defined. Sometimes also vertical
illuminance must be controlled (for example, where reading tasks take place, goods are inspected or moved).
The necessary lighting levels and uniformities depend on the difficulty of the visual task, on the one hand, and on the degree
of efficiency and security required, on the other hand. In Chart 1 level and uniformity requirements for different categories
of areas are indicated.
Visual task and
Example
category
Horizontal illuminance
Uniformity factor
recommended
maintained average (lux)
Security
Low risk areas
Industrial storage areas;
1:7
20
1:4
50
1:2.5
1:7
10
1:4
20
1:2.5
1:4
occasional transit only

Medium risk areas
Vehicle storage areas,

containerterminals with
frequent transit
High risk areas
Critical areas in petrochemical

works, chemical electricity
and gas plants
Movement and transit

Pedestrians
Only people movement
Slow moving vehicles
Load/ unload trucks and/ or

bicycles
Normal transit
Public lighting in container

terminals, manouver areas
General work
Very rough
Excavation, clearance
20
Rough
Woodwork
50
1:4
Regular
Masonery, woodwork
100
1:2.5
Fine
Painting, electric works
200
1:2
Chart 1. Recommended illuminances and uniformities for outdoor working areas.

Glare
The degree of glare limit required depends, of course, on the category of the area under study (C.I.E.: Glare evaluation
system for and outdoor sports area lighting).
In general, discomforting glare will be reduced with an increase in the mounting height. Choosing floodlights well and having
special care when pointing them may also help to maintain glare to the minimum. Sometimes, when glare is critical, special
lattices must be placed on luminaires.
Lamps
High intensity discharge lamps are recommended as appropriate for area floodlighting. The most frequently used lamps are
high pressure sodium discharge lamps, and metal halide ones. Even though when colour discrimination is not necessary and
lighting levels are not excessively high, low pressure sodium discharge lamp offers a good solution.
169
11.3. Amenity lighting

This lighting system is used when an advertisement, a facade, a building, artistic fountain or monument, etc. is to be illuminated due
to purely decorative reasons, with the idea of attracting people's attention, embellishing an area or expressing civic proud, sometimes
even used as an advertising way.
In these instances, lighting belongs to the architectural vocabulary, being an art in which brightness, lights, shadows, colours and
contrasts are manipulated.
11.3.1. Design general considerations

During daytime hours, a building is illuminated by direct sunlight, diffused light radiated from the sky or both. The result is
that the architectural characteristics of the building are highlighted by a varied show of lights and shadows. The design of a
good lighting installation through floodlighting requires a careful study of the most attractive characteristics of the building
and the effects of light on them. Therefore, the techniques to illuminate a building through floodlighting are not based on
lighting engineering, because feelings and understanding of aesthetical values are equally important.
Observation direction
Normally, there are several directions from which a building may be observed, but, in general, one direction in particular may
be considered as the main observation direction.
Observation distance
Observation distance is important since it determines the number of visible details on the structure to be illuminated.
Surroundings and background
If the surroundings and the background of a structure are dark, a relatively small quantity of light is necessary for the structure
to be highlighted against the background. If there are other buildings illuminated through floodlighting in the surroundings,
or buildings with illuminated windows, or a background with brightness, this will give a strong impression of luminance. Then,
more light for floodlighting to produce the desired impact will be necessary. Another solution may be to create colour
contrasts, instead of luminance differences.
Obstacles
Trees and railings surrounding a building may form a decorative element of the installation. An attractive way of doing so is
by placing the sources of light in front of them. This has two advantages: first, the sources of light are invisible for the observer
and, second, trees and railings are seen as silhouettes against the illuminated background of the facade, increasing the
feeling of depth.
Position and direction of floodlights
Once the main line of observation has been chosen, the installation and focusing of floodlights will depend on the shape
of the building or, better, on its ground plan or horizontal cross- section. Experience indicates that the best placing of
floodlights in a building with a rectangular ground plan is the one indicated in Fig. 3. The main observation line is indicated
by the arrow A and the position of floodlights by the points marked as B. Placing floodlights in the two extremes of the
diagonal, a good luminance contrast between the two neighbouring sides of the building is achieved, and also a good
perspective. Oblique beams of floodlights highlight the texture of materials forming the facade. As observed in Fig. 3, this
installation for rectangular buildings is also applicable to those of a square ground plan.
170
B
A
B
A
Figure 3
Also projecting elements (like balconies), walls or balustrades may enrich the appearance of a facade and must be taken
into account, if included in the lighting structure. In this case, floodlights must be placed at a certain distance from the facade,
in order to avoid excessively strong shadows. If there is not enough space for this, small floodlights placed on the projection
itself may be used as complementary lighting (Fig. 4).
Recess or concave elements like galleries or balconies will remain in the shadow when placing floodlights at a short distance
from the facade. In these situations, complementary lighting placed on the recess parts themselves may be used. Light of
another colour may be appropriate for this purpose. Lighting through floodlighting placed at a greater distance produces less
shadows and eliminates the need for additional lighting.
d
Change in the height of the shadow
produced by variation of
distance "d"
Supplementary local lighting to reduce shadow intensity
Figura 4
Some of the many alternatives to place luminous sources are: on public lighting posts or on posts specifically placed for this
purpose; on the roof of a neighbouring building; on supports fixed to the facade itself or on the ground, behind low walls,
bushes or hedges.
Recommended lighting levels
In order to determine the necessary level of illuminance to provide a structure with the required visual impact, factors such
as brightness of the surroundings and background, material used in the construction, etc. must be taken into account. Three
171
points are important:

1) The darker the material, the higher the illuminance necessary to provide an impression of satisfactory brightness on it.
2) For a normal installation in which light is directed upwards on a vertical surface, the amount of light reflected that reaches
an observer, and, therefore, brightness of the surface illuminated, will decrease with the increase of surface uniformity.
3) The necessary illuminance will be influenced by the combination degree between the spectrum of the source of light
used and the colour of the construction material to a certain extent. Favourable solutions are obtained when the colour of
the light is close to that of the illuminated surface. In Chart 2 elaborated bearing in mind those three points, recommended
illuminances for lighting through floodlighting are shown.
Facade material
Light-coloured stone
white marble
Medium-coloured stone
Cement
Light-coloured marble
Dark-coloured stone
Grey granite
Dark marble
Light yellow brick
Light brown brick
Dark brown brick
Pink granite
Red brick
Dark brick
Architectonic detail
Aluminium coating:
natural finish
Saturated lacquer thermic
finish (10%)
red, brown, yellow
Saturated lacquer thermic
finish (10%)
blue, green
Medium lacquer thermic
finish (30-40%)
red, brown, yellow
Medium lacquer thermic
finish (30-40%)
blue, green
Pastel lacquer thermic
finish (60-70%),
red, brown, yellow
Pastel lacquer thermic
finish (60-70%),
blue, green
RECOMMENDED LIGHTING LEVELS

Illuminance in Lux
Poor
Good
Very good
M
Correction coefficients
S
Clean
Dirty
20
30
60
1.0
0.9
3.0
5.0
40
60
120
1.1
1.0
2.5
5.0
100
150
300
1.0
1.1
2.0
3.0
35
40
55
50
60
80
100
120
160
1.2
1.2
1.3
0.9
0.9
1.0
2.5
2.0
2.0
5.0
4.0
4.0
100
120
60
200
150
180
100
300
300
360
200
600
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.2
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.1
2.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
120
180
360
1.3
1.1
1.5
2.0
120
180
360
1.0
1.3
1.5
2.0
40
60
120
1.2
1.0
2.0
4.0
40
60
120
1.0
1.2
2.0
4.0
20
30
60
1.1
1.0
3.0
5.0
20
30
60
1.0
1.1
3.0
5.0
Chart 2
Recommended lighting levels are those necessary to create a luminance of 4, 6 or 12 cd/m2 on the facade when the
surroundings are poorly illuminated, well illuminated or with a lot of brightness, respectively. Values are valid for lamps with
172
a wolfram filament of 2 800 K and clean surfaces of buildings . Correction coefficients shown are multiplying.
11.3.2. Lighting of buildings

The convenience that a building is illuminated through floodlighting is determined by several factors, including the shape
and surfaces of the building, its features (which may be difficult to define), its architectural merit, its historical or social
meaning and its surroundings.
The appearance of a surface illuminated through floodlighting depends, among other factors, on its texture. Rough surfaces
reflect some light in all directions and, thus, when it is illuminated, it appears more or less bright independent from the angle
from which it is being observed. Moreover, glasses and other very polished surfaces, reflect all the incident light on them as
a mirror. Due to this reason, they appear as dark and lifeless when illuminated and seen from normal positions (Figs. 5, 6,
7 and 8).
Figure 5. Specular reflection (bright, polished surfaces, etc.).
173
Figure 6. Composed reflection (irregular, rough surfaces, etc.).
Figure 7. Mixed reflection (barnished, non- polished surfaces, etc.).
174
Figure 8. Diffused reflection (matte surfaces, etc.).

It is obvious that these differences in the reflection properties of the surface of the material makes necessary a different
lighting for each facade to obtain the desired luminosity in each case. Even the amount of dirtiness on the facade is
important; the reflection factor of a clean facade may be more than twice that of the same dirty facade.
The surroundings have a powerful influence in the effect produced by the buildings illuminated through floodlighting. For
example, if there is a lake, river, channel, etc. near the building, this will be highlighted when its reflections are projected in
water.
Cathedrals, churches, castles, public buildings, bridges and old monuments are examples of buildings which generally
respond well to floodlighting; some industrial and commercial buildings may be illuminated through floodlighting as an
advantage for themselves and for their surroundings.
Design basic conditions
Apart from the ideas exposed before in "design general conditions", the following comments are generally applied to lighting
design through floodlighting. The relevant aspects of each comment varies with the type of building and lighting requisites.
a) Lighting contrasts are generally more important than their homogeneity, and shadows are as important as light
reflexes.
b) Lighting through coloured floodlighting allows the highlighting of different planes and the production of
coloured shadows. As a general rule, colour should be used moderately and discreetely.
c) The aspect of a building illuminated through floodlighting and specially that modelled with shadows, differs
quite a lot from its appearance during daylight, mainly because the direction and distribution of light are different.
This also changes with the direction of observation, and especially with the change of angle between the direction
of observation and the direction of the main light flux.
d) As commented before, the visual impact of a building illuminated through floodlighting depends considerably
on the brightness of the surroundings; the darker the background, the more dramatic the effect and the less the
amount of light necessary to highlight the building.
175
e) The form of a building illuminated through floodlighting is best highlighted when its contours are visible, its
solidity is emphasized, and the corners are emphasized too, by illuminating the neighbouring walls with a
different luminance. The shape of a building with a non- peaked roof is evidently complete when both, roof and
wall, are illuminated through floodlighting.
f) The solidity of towers, domes and column heads is emphasized if illuminated through floodlighting from no
more than three directions in azimuth.
g) A good pronounced modelling is always desirable, but it does not make sense to highlight small details on flat
facades when the building is seen from a certain distance.
h) Height is more pronounced if building lighting is reduced progressively from its base upwards. If the lowest
parts of a building are hidden from observation at a certain distance by the structures of the surroundings, maybe
it will be convenient to reduce brightness in the opposed direction, for example, towards the ground.
Lighting of contemporary design buildings
New materials and building methods have played an important role in the development of a distinctive style of contemporary
buildings. For example, external and internal walls of modern buildings with a steel structure are not load- bearing walls and,
therefore, they may be made of light materials and be pre- manufactured before installation; structures of reinforced
concrete, some with roofs of 40 meters or more in height, are another typical element of the contemporary landscape.
On condition that the structure is adequate, lighting through floodlighting may be used to emphasize social and architectural
meaning of many civilian, commercial and educative buildings recently built. Maybe, it will also be propaganda for the
products of the company which owns or rents the building. For example, in Fig. 9 an office building may be seen. It has a
pre- manufactured reinforced concrete facade which was built for a company which manufactures concrete; lighting through
floodlighting strongly reveals the forms of the material.
Figure 9
176
11.3.3. Monuments
Monuments should be illuminated through floodlighting in a way that indicates their style, age and their historical meaning
wherever possible.
Floodlights for monument lighting are similar to those for historical buildings in general. The effects of erosion and, if ceilings
and walls have been destroyed or partially destroyed, should be reported. Lighting should be designed to achieve an effect
without and apparent cause (Fig. 10).
Figure 10
Floodlights for lighting of castles in ruins and similar monuments should be designed to emphasize the compact character
of their structures and reveal the shape of their towers and other prominent elements (Fig. 11).
Figure 11
The historical importance of a monument may be indicated by coloured light. For example, blue light may be used to create
a mysterious atmosphere, and red light to indicate the scene of a battle.
The splendour and magnificence of a monument may be manifested to the maximum only by means of a close and
continuous cooperation between the architect of the project, the lighting engineer and, wherever appropriate, the
archeologist, whose main interest is the preservation of the monument. The lighting equipment should not be attached to
the structure of the building unless a special permission has been granted.
177
11.3.4. Bridges and viaducts

In general, bridges are attractive elements and, when conveniently illuminated, they contribute to improve night- time
landscape (Fig.12). There are too many types of bridges. Discussing lighting of each and every one of them individually is
impossible, but the following criteria are applicable from a general point of view:
Figure 12
- The shape and main elements of the bridge must be visible from a considerable distance. Most of the times it is desirable
for bridges on roads to include accesses in the lighting project so that it is seen as a part of the road and not as an isolated
element of the complex. Amenity lighting luminaires for roadway lighting should be treated as part of the lighting design.
- The convenience for a bridge to be illuminated through floodlighting depends on the surroundings, the main directions and
the observation distances, the importance of the structure and architecture of the bridge, its importance in the night- time
decoration, and the materials with which it has been built.
- Stone and reinforced concrete bridges generally respond well to lighting through floodlighting, but it may be difficult to show
the shape and details in iron and steel bridges this way, due to the low reflectance and the small area projected of the
members of the structure. However, other methods may be used. For example, lighting with ornamental lights, lamps
supported by cables and chain, have been used in some hanging bridges with satisfaction, but an effective maintenance may
be difficult.
- Lighting should not distract attention from traffic (motorized, highway or maritime traffic) which goes under or above the
bridge. If coloured lighting is used, a special care must be taken to avoid confusion with traffic signals.
- Illuminance necessary to show the effective shape of the bridge will mainly depend on the type of bridge, its surroundings
(including district lighting) and reflectance of the building materials. When the lighting system and location of floodlights has
been decided, its type, number and voltage may be estimated using the INDALWIN calculation program. After the lighting
system has been installed, the effects must be valued from a critical point of view, and adjustments must be done in situ.
- The sides of a stone bridge or similar crossing a valley, a clearing or a river may be usually illuminated through mounted
asymmetric rectangular floodlights in one or both banks. If light is directed from one of the sides mainly, the arches, wring
walls, counterforts and balustrades will be emphasized through coherent shadows which will be formed.
However, this system is not likely to be applied if the bridge is very long. Preferably, floodlights should be mounted under the
bridge platform to minimize glare for traffic and pedestrians going over or under the bridge (Fig. 13). Floodlights that,must be
mounted over the bridge height due to practical reasons should be conveniently oriented so that glare is restricted as much
as possible. This type of bridges may be illuminated also through luminaires mounted on the bridge or near it and hidden
from the normal observation angles or by a continuous row of waterproof fluorescent luminaires mounted on the railing.
178
The latter system may be applied for the lighting of pedestrian bridge by using luminaires which direct part of the light to
the sidewalk and part to the sides of the bridge. Often, the appearance of an arched bridge is improved if the lower part of
the arches is illuminated, preferably with a different colour of light to the one used on the sides of the bridge. A very dramatic
effect is produced leaving the sides without lighting (in the dark). It is difficult to delineate cables and chains of hanging
bridges except for festive lighting, but their support towers may be generally illuminated by floodlights with a great advantage,
using circular symmetrical floodlights with a narrow beam, mounted in the bridge or next to it and aiming upwards. Lighting
of the zone of the bridge for motorized traffic is normally done with public lighting luminaires.
Asymmetric floodlight
Asymmetric floodlight
Figure 13
11.3.5. Lighting of entertaining and leisure areas

Night- time lighting of public parks and gardens is essential for security purposes, especially of children, and increases the
time during which leisure elements may be used. Lighting shows the beauty of flowered gardens, trees, bushes and
fountains or lakes. Another objective is that of lighting dark areas.
Trees and bushes: During the day, a tree is generally seen as a silhouette against a bright sky. If the tree is illuminated during
the night, the situation is the opposite: the tree clearly protrudes against the dark sky. This dramatic effect is highlighted if
the sources of light are hidden.
Tree lighting
sideways
from below
Figure 14
Luminaires may illuminate the foliage from a certain distance or be located next to the trunk lighting its branches from the
ground upwards (Fig. 14). The first technique is appropriated for trees with a dense foliage, whereas the other type of
focusing is appropriate for light foliage trees. Beautiful effects may be achieved using different coloured lights (Fig. 15).
179
Figure 15
If a superior frontal or vertical lighting is not desired or it is not applicable, flowered trees or with naked branches may be
projected against a white or light coloured wall, fence or railing. Another subtle effect more interesting than frontal lighting
from a visual point of vie, may be obtained by illuminating trees and bushes from behind.
But in most cases, floodlights should be placed between the public and the objects to be illuminated. Glare may be avoided
placing screens on floodlights, even though most gardens have many places to hide them, such as bushes, tree trunks or
stumps, rocks, fences, small walls, etc. Alternatively, floodlights may be embedded in the ground (in this case, drainage
possibility must be born in mind).
In general, it is neither economical nor practical to illuminate but a few trees in the park; and due to aesthetical reasons,
uniform lighting of the totality of an area through floodlighting is satisfactory very few times. The trees chosen should be
important and beautiful species and placed in positions where depth and subtlety are given to the scenery.
11.4. Sports lighting

11.4.1. General remarks
The goal of lighting indoor or outdoor sports facilities is to offer an adequate environment to practice and enjoy sport events both on
the part of the spectators and the players. From a logical point of view, needs will vary according to installation types (recreation,
entertainment or competition) and activity level (amateur, professional or television broadcasting).
11.4.1.1. Basic requisites

When designing sports facilities ligthing, requisites and comfort of the following users must be taken into account: sportmen
or players, judges or referees, spectators and broadcasting and mass media.
Players and referees
Players (sportmen) and referees (judges) must be able to observe clearly everything that is hapenning on the playfield to
so that the sport event takes place in the best possible circumstances.
Spectators
Spectators must be able to follow the players activity and the sport action making the least effort. The surrounding
environment must be comfortable, which means that not only must the playfield or court be seen, but also the immediate
180
surroundings. Lighting must help the spectator to enter and exit the sport installation security. This security issue is also very
important for players.
T.V. broadcasting
For T.V. broadcasting, lighting must provide conditions that will secure a good quality colour image (Publication C.I.E. n 83),
both for general images of the play and close- ups of spectators and players.
Transmission continuity
In order to comply with T.V. transmission continuity, requirements in case of failure of the normal lighting system, a secondary
system is generally installed to provide an emergency T.V. lighting.
11.4.1.2. Lighting criteria

The most important lighting criteria for sports lighting are the following ones.
Horizontal illuminance
The illuminated area where the sport activity is taking place is the main part of the visual field of sportmen and spectators.
Therefore, horizontal plane illuminance at ground level serves the purpose of establishing visual adaptation. Due to this fact,
and also to the playfield area being used as a visual background, it is very important that there is an adequate horizontal
plane illuminancce to achieve the correct contrast against the background.
Horizontal illuminance is also very relevant in circulation areas, like anti- panic ligthing, used in case there is a failure of the
normal lighting system to secure spectators movement in and out of the sports field.
Recommended average illuminances in Chart 4 are maintained values. That is to say, they are values that must be reached
during an installation operation period. For the required initial values, maintained values must be multiplied by the inverse
of the maintenance factor (fm).
Vertical Illuminance
Enough contrast must exist for the players body to be identified. This is only obtained if vertical planes are well illuminated,
since this kind of illuminance is essential to recognize objects.
Vertical illuminance is characterized by magnitude and direction. For players, a vertical illuminance is important from all
positions. However, for spectators and cameras occupying a certain position, vertical illuminance must only be considered
for such positions. For cameras with different positions, vertical illuminance on the four lateral planes of the field must be
taken into account.
In practice, vertical illuminance required for players and spectators is automatically obtained if horizontal illuminance
requisites are observed. Therefore, from a practical point of view, vertical illuminance which must be measured at a 1.5
metre height over the playfield, is only a design criterion when considering T.V. transmission continuity, since it plays a major
influence on image quality.
Vertical illuminance must guarantee not only a players recognition or image quality but also the fact that spectators and
players are easily able to follow a ball, a ring, etc. that are flying over the playfield.
Spectators and tribunes are part of the camera visual medium. Therefore, an adequate vertical illuminance must also be
created for tribunes.
Illuminance uniformity
A good vertical and horizontal illuminance uniformity in horizontal and vertical planes is important. It avoids adaptation
problems for players and spectators and it eliminates the need for continuous adjustment of cameras in different visual
directions. If uniformity is not good enough, there is the possibility (especially with television cameras) that a ball or player
will not clearly be seen in certain positions in the field.
Uniformity may be expressed as the ratio between minimum illuminance and maximum illuminance (U1) or as the ratio
between minimum illuminance and average illuminance (U2).
In order for cameras to obtain the best possible visual conditions, the ratio between average illuminance on the horizontal
181
plane and average illuminance on the vertical one must be kept between 0.5 and 2 in general.
Glare
Glare occurs whenever a discomfort bright area approaches or enters the visual field, producing a disturbing effect for players
and spectators.
Glare may be minimised paying careful attention to floodlight or luminaire choice. We must also make sure that they are
carefully focused, taking into account the main visual directions.
Evaluation of glare
The C.I.E. has developed a basis to evaluate the subjective impression of glare in outdoor areas.
Essentially, it includes a glare index in which the lower the reaching is also, the lower the glare. Glare Rating (GR) is obtained
this way:
GR = 27 + 24 . log
EE R R
Lvl
Lve
0,9
where:
Lvl = veiling luminance produced by luminaires.
Lvl =
eyej
i 2
where Eeye,i is the eye illuminance produced by the source of light (lux) i, and i is the angle between the direction of vision
and the direction of incident light from the source of light i (degrees).
Lve = veiling luminance produced by the medium.
Lve may be approached from the horizontal average illuminance where the sports event is taking place, Ehav, using the
following formula:
p
Lve = 0.035 . Ehav .
where p = the area reflectance.
For Lvl the sources of light are luminaires, whereas for Lve the field and luminous surroundings are considered as an infinite
number of small light sources.
It is necessary to calculate GR for the observers most critical positions, defined in Fig. 16. for a football playfield.
182
300 m.
300 m.
1A
300 m.
10
300 m.
9
1/4 A
1/2 A
1/4 A
300 m.
7
6
11
1/4 B
1/2 B
1B
1-11 Observers position for GR calculations
Reference positions to calculate veiling luminance

outside the playfield area
Figure 16
Nowadays, international sport associations are introducing their own GR norms and veiling luminance.
External glare
In past times, glare was only taken into account for players and spectators who were in the illuminated area or very close to
it. Nevertheless, in case of outdoor lighting sports, the disperse light of the installation may bother spectators who are outside
the playfield: for example, for traffic on adjacent roads or for those people who live in the surroudings.
Currently, the C.I.E. is studying a direct parameter to quantify such disturbance, which is directly related to the optical quality
of the floodlights used. This means that in order to avoid this inconvenience, floodlights must be chosen taking into account
the limitation of the disperse light outside the main beam. They must be focused and mounted in an adequate manner.
Recommendations
Although glare ratio, or GR, is not specified in the recommendation sections, it is highly important for all sports lighting
installations. It must coincide with the GR values established in the Publication C.I.E. n 83.
The calculated GR value depends partially on the reflectance area where the sports activity is taking place. For grass courts,
a diffused reflectance of about 0.15 to 0.25 is generally presupposed.
The GR value must be determined for the observers positions of such a sport, at a height of 1.5 metres over the area where
the sports activity is taking place. The observer must see all points at ground level. For an outdoor installation, the effect of
disperse light outside the precinct at a distance of 300 metres from the centre of the area must be calculated. This means
that veiling luminance must be calculated at a 1.5 metre height over the ground for the five most extreme positions.
Modelling and shadows
Modulate is the lighting capability to reveal forms and textures. This is particularly important to provide a general vision of sportmen,
183
players, ball or other elements and spectators who are in the area where the sports activity is taking place or near it.
The efficacy of modelling depends on directions from which light sources come from as well as on the number and type of sources
used in it. Modelling may be hard, produced by means of deep shadows, for example, using floodlights with a narrow and simple
beam; or soft, resulting from lighting without shadows from a luminous ceiling, for example. None of these extremes is advisable.
However, for the latter case, it is possible to add some small floodlights to improve modulate.
Good quality television images require a good modulate for lighting. This is the reason why up to 60% of the installed total flux may
come from the side of the main camera, and 40% or even more, from the opposite side, in order to limit length and hardness of
projected shadows for sportment where an asymmetric arrangement of floodlights is used.
Colour appearance and reproduction
A good colour perception is important in most sports, and, although some distortion due to artificial light is accepted, it must
not be so much as to produce colour discrimination problems (between partially distorted colours).
Two important aspects related to colour must be distinguished.
- Light colour appearance: It is the colour impression in all the medium created by the lamp.
- Light colour reproduction: It is the ability of light to reproduce colours of objects.
Both colour appearance and colour reproduction of the light emitted by lamps depend on the distribution of spectral energy
of theemitted light. One indication of the colour appearance of a lamp may be obtained from its colour correlative
temperature, measured in Kelvin (K), which varies between 2 000 and 6 000 K. If colour temperature is lower, light colour
impression will be warmer. The higher colour temperature, the colder or more bluish light colour impression.
Colour reproduction properties of a luminous source may be indicated by the colour reproduction index (R). The maximum
theoretical value of the colour reproduction index is 100, which may be compared with daylight. The visual characteristics
of the surroundings depend on the R. The higher the R, the more comfortable the environment.
11.4.2. Design considerations

11.4.2.1. Luminaire type
Floodlights
Floodlights are classified according to their light distribution:
Circular floodlights (Fig. 17)
There are two types of circular floodlights used in sports floodlighting:
a) With a symmetric beam in a conical shape. They may have a narrow beam or a wide beam.
b) With a slightly asymmetric beam on the vertical plane. They may have a narrow, medium, wide and very wide beam.
Figure 17. Circular floodlights.

Rectangular floodlights (Fig. 18).
There are two types:
a) With asymmetric distribution of light on horizontal and vertical planes. The beam is wide on the horizontal plane, whereas,
it may be wide or narrow on the vertical plane.
b) With symmetric distribution of light on the horizontal plane and asymmetric distribution of light on the vertical plane. The
184
horizontal beam is wide.
Figure 18. Rectangular floodlights.

Circular floodlights require the use of a source of light more or less narrow, such as a short discharge tube of a high intensity
discharge lamp. When it is not focused downwards from a vertical point of view, the conical beam emits an elliptical or
almost elliptical light modelling over the field (Fig. 17).
Rectangular floodlights are used together with their linear sources such as tubular discharge lamps and halogene ones. A
fan- shaped beam produces a very trapezoidal model of light on the sports area where the activity is practiced (Fig. 18).
Figure 19. Lateral disposition.

When rectangular floodlights are mounted in a not very separate way on the sides of a sports area (normal disposition for a small
area) two advantages are met if compared to the circular unit: light distribution is more uniform and light loss is less (Fig. 19). However,
the circular floodlight is more efficient than the rectangular unit when used in the four corners, diagonal disposition (Fig. 20), whenever
several units per column are used.
Figure 20. Diagonal disposition.

For all types of symmetric rectangular floodlights, a special shielding device or louver may be used, on condition that the floodlight is
focused towards a direction producing glare. Such floodlights are designed in such a way that their maximum intensity is not
in the centre of the beam, but towards one side. Luminous intensity diminution on each side of the axis beam is placed in
such a way that when it focus a certain point on the surface, a more or less uniform horizontal illuminance is produced.
In order to limit glare, intensities decrease rapidly from a certain light incident angle, making light distribution even more
asymmetric.
185
When glare may produce important discomfort to people outside the area where the sports activity is practiced, luminous
intensities outside the current beam must be the lowest possible. For this application, a floodlight that may distribute light
totally under the horizontal plane is recommended.
11.4.2.2. Lighting design
Lighting calculations
In daily practice, it is very common to use computer programs (INDALWIN) to design sports lighting installations. The results
of the program show quantitative values for most of the parameters, such as vertical and horizontal illuminances, uniformity
and glare ratios.
Floodlight orientation and location
Calculations done with the computer assume that small groups of floodlights in a power supply network are located in a
single point, that is to say, in the centre of the group. Such calculations are generally exact enough for general applications.
However, when there are large groups of floodlights and the spacing between the external units is considerable, the
calculation may result inexact in the focusing (Fig. 21). In these cases, a point of reference is determined for each small
group of floodlights.
Error in the focusing of floodlight S when the same focusing

angle is used for very spaced floodlights.
Figure 21
Calculation matrix
Since the distance between the matrix points is relatively small, the value shown for each point represents the area
surrounding such a point (Fig. 22.). Matrix sizes commonly used are:
- from 1 to 2 m.:
For small playing areas.
- from 5 m.:
For football, hockey or rugby.
In order to specify horizontal illuminances, the matrix must be at ground level, whereas in order to specify vertical
illuminances, it generally is at 1.5 m. over such a level.
186
1/2 Sx
Sx
1/2 Sy
Sy
=Sx, Sy. matrix spacing

=Point on which lighting is calculated.
=Calculated value valid for this area (Sx, Sy)
Figure 22
The positions of the observer and the observation or vision directions used when calculating glare are defined in the matrix.
Camera positions
Camera positions must be known to secure that lighting in such directions is adequate. These are specified as points of
reference in the computer program, and generally speaking, separate calculations are done for a number of points.
11.4.2.3. Football fields
Because of practical reasons, lighting requisites for different activities taking place in different periods of the year
in outdoor football fields, must have floodlighting systems. Therefore, they may be defined in general.
Illuminance
When the events are regularly broadcasted from a stadium or football field, the floodlight lighting project is generally designed
to provide the high illuminance necessary to comply with television requisites. The necessary horizontal illuminance for a
play field depends on:
a) The competition level taking place on it.
b) The speed of the ball (also the rapid movement of players must be taken into account).
c) The maximum distance between players and between any of them and the ball during the game.
If the play field has tiers for spectators and the distance between the centre of the field and the most distant spectator is
greater than the maximum distance existent between a player and the game object, the latter is the one that must be taken
into account as a reference criterion. In Fig. 23, the minimum horizontal illuminance levels recommended for different
distances between spectators and the centre of the field are represented.
187
Distance from the spectator to

the centre of the playfield
Horizontal
illuminance
Competition level
Professional/
colour T.V.
Competition
Training
Leisure
Figure 23
Vertical illuminance is characterized not only by its magnitude but also by its direction. Vertical illuminance is considered
on a vertical plane in a straight angle with the observers line of vision (Fig. 24).
Position of
observer 1
Position of
observer 2
Figure 24. Vertical illuminance planes for different observers positions.

An adequate vertical lighting from all directions is very important for players. Nevertheless, if it is checked in the four directions
parallel to the play field exterior lines, it will be the adequate one in the rest of directions. For spectators and cameras occupying
a fixed position, only vertical lighting seen from that place must be verified.
In the charts at the end of the chapter, minimum vertical illuminance levels recommended for T.V. broadcasting are shown.
188
Uniformity ratio
Illuminance uniformity necessary on the field and surrounding courts depends on what is happening. For example, greater
light uniformity is required for television broadcasting than for game development or following of a competition without
broadcasting by the naked eye. A lower uniformity may be accepted for training than for competition. See Chart 3.
Glare
Glare should not be discomforting unless:
a) Floodlights with a precise light control are used and correctly pointed.
b) Floodlights are mounted far from the important observation directions. Mounting angles measured from the centre of the
field should be higher than 20 on the horizontal.
c) The least number of floodlight groups is used or a onesided disposition. The number of groups in any of the field sides
should not be greater than 4.
d) Illuminance on the field of vision (which includes the field and the areas opposed to spectators) is as high and uniform
as possible, consequent with the avoidance of too much illuminance in the spectators' eyes. In practice, this means that
average illuminance on planes vertical to the height of the spectators eyes opposite it should not be greater than half their
average value on the vertical over the field, and preferably not more than 1/3.
If these requisites are met, the size and luminosity of individual sources and the number of floodlights in each group is not
very important with respect to glare. They have a stronger effect on illuminance on the field. Experience has proved that glare
of a correctly planned installation does not increase when illuminance is greater.
Illuminance on vertical planes; modelling
If floodlights are mounted at more than 30 on the horizontal measured from the centre of the field, the expense of towers
is normally unaffordable. The reason for illuminance on vertical or almost vertical planes to that of horizontal ones is lower
than expected, and modelling is not satisfactory.
In general, the best balance between glare degree and illuminance on vertical planes is obtained when floodlights are well
pointed and illuminance at the level of the spectators' eyes in front of it is within the given limits.
The most adequate modelling is obtained with floodlights mounted in 4 towers at the corners (Fig. 28). The effect is lower
with 6 towers, even less with groups of floodlights laterally mounted, and even less with continuous lines close to laterally
mounted floodlights. Moreover, with lateral lighting, illuminance on vertical planes opposed to the band line is higher than
with the systems of towers in corners. The advantages and disadvantages of the various floodlight lighting systems are
discussed later in the chapter.
Floodlight lighting systems
To a great extent, the following descriptions of floodlight lighting systems reflect conditions which are necessary for football
or similar games, but they will be generally satisfactory when other events take place in the stadium.
Lateral lighting systems
A lateral lighting system using 4 groups of floodlights on each side of the field is observed in the upper half of Fig. 25. The
lower half shows the design for 3 groups of floodlights.
189
l/8
l/4
l/4
l/4
l/8
Design for four poles
Design for three poles

l/6
l/3
l/3
l/6
Figure 25
Small training fields may be illuminated from fewer positions and sometimes only from one side. Rectangular symmetric or
asymmetric floodlights (which produce a fan- shaped beam) are used for most lateral lighting projects. The recommended
mounting height is deduced from Fig. 26, the characteristic angles being measured from the longitudinal line of the centre
12 m. minimum
of the field and the band line.
75 max.
45 min.
Objective 25
Maximum 30
Minimum 20
Figure 26
When three groups of floodlights are used, these should be pointed to obtain an acceptable illuminance uniformity along
the nearby band line. Choosing an appropriate number of floodlights for each tower, illuminances that may be provided go
from adequate low values for training fields, up to high values necessary for colour T.V. broadcasting. Illuminance on vertical
planes on the play area is approximately equal to that of the horizontal planes. Modelling is relatively insignificant and several
shadows may be clearly seen. A careful pointing is necessary to avoid inadequate glare.
Fig. 27 shows the design of lateral floodlight systems where floodlights are mounted in single rows under each side of the
field and provide the necessary high illuminance for colour T.V. Mounting heights of floodlights are defined by the angles
given in Fig. 26. The row of floodlights should be preferably extended beyond the goal lines in order to maintain a reasonable
illuminance uniformity, especially in the areas, and provide light over the players so that they are seen behind the goal posts.
190
However, this extension may not be possible in practice. Then, trimmer in illuminance towards the goal lines should be
restricted by a reduction of the space of floodlights towards the end of lines or by the pointing of final floodlights outwards.
As for other systems of lateral lighting, average illuminance on vertical planes on the play area is approximately equal to that
of the horizontal ones and a careful pointing is necessary to avoid excessive glare. Where floodlights are mounted on ceilings
(shelters) of tiers, the compensation distance may not be large enough to provide adequate vertical illuminance on the
closest band line. Then, extra floodlights will be needed and should be mounted under the ceiling (shelter) at the necessary
compensation distance.
Figure 27
Systems of towers in corners
The design used for 4 towers in corners is the one observed in Fig. 28. Recommended heights for the tower are deduced
from Fig. 26. Normally, symmetric circular- shaped floodlights are used giving a symmetric beam. Individual beams may be
joined to fill what is seen as a playing area in a non- rectangular form from the above structure. This allows an adequate
illuminance design to be increased over the field. Angular compensations of 5 and 15 degrees, respectively, from the
centre of the band line and the goal entrance provide adequate locations for the towers. In practice, location of the tower is
ordered more often by the disposition of the place than by the ideal lighting requisites.
Large stadiums, and specially those with courts outside the play field, are difficult to illuminate enough from the 4 corners.
Very high towers would be necessary to comply with the angular requisites in Fig. 26, and glare from the long reach
floodlights which would be necessary, would be probably excessive. Because of these reasons, the 6 tower system seen in
Fig. 29 is preferred. The tower height is defined from the centre of the half of the field and approximately twice as many
grouped floodlights in the central towers as those in the corners. Pointing angles are sharp and glare may be controlled quite
easily. The illuminance ratio between vertical planes and horizontal planes is approximately 0.7.
191
5
15
Figure 28.
5
15
Figure 29
Shadows of tiers
The position of shadows projected in the field by tier ceilings and other obstacles may be obtained from the sketch seen in
Fig. 30. If possible, height and location of the tower must be chosen so that shadows do not fall on the play field. Wherever
this is not possible, additional floodlights should be mounted under the tier ceiling and directed towards the shadowed areas
with the same average angle of the main floodlights.
192
D= d h
h-H
Tower
a= d H
h-H
Tier
d
D
Tier
Shadow area
Tower
Figure 30
Atmospheric absorption losses
Dust and humidity in the air make light to be lost by absorption and dispersion, depending on the amount lost of the stadium
localization, projection length of floodlights and atmospheric conditions at the same time. The UEFA and CIE recommend
that a discount of 30% of light lost should be done in calculations.
Dispersion of light caused by fog, mist or rain produces veiling glare with the consequent reduction of visibility. Very little may
be done about this, but there is evidence and it is that the effect is the least with the tower systems in corners that with the
lateral lighting systems.
193
HORIZONTAL ILLUMINANCE LEVEL CHARTS

Sport
Activity level
E (lux)
U1
U2
Tc
t/r
100
0.3
0.4
60
2000
0.3
0.4
60
2000
Group
Archery (indoors)
- shooting zone
- target
ca
500
cp
n.a.
t/r
300*
n.a.
n.a.
60
2000
ca
500*
n.a.
n.a.
60
2000
cp
n.a.
Archery (outdoors)
- shooting zone
- target
t/r
50
0.3
0.4
60
2000
ca
100
0.3
0.4
60
2000
cp
n.a.
t/r
100*
n.a.
n.a.
60
2000
ca
200*
n.a.
n.a.
60
2000
cp
n.a.
t/r
200
0.3
0.5
65
2000
Athletics
- indoors
- outdoors
A
ca
300
0.4
0.5
65
4000
cp
500
0.5
0.7
65
4000
t/r
100
0.2
0.3
20
2000
ca
200
0.2
0.3
20
2000
cp
400
0.3
0.5
65
4000
t/r
300
0.4
0.6
65
4000
ca
600
0.5
0.7
65
4000
cp
800
0.5
0.7
65
4000
t/r
150
0.3
0.5
65
4000
ca
300
0.4
0.6
65
4000
cp
750
0.5
0.7
65
4000
t/r
100
0.2
0.3
65
4000
ca
200
0.3
0.4
65
4000
cp
500
0.4
0.5
65
4000
t/r
300
0.4
0.6
65
4000
ca
400
05
0.7
65
4000
Badminton
Baseball
- in the field
- outside the field
Basketball
- indoors
- outdoors
cp
600
0.5
0.7
65
4000
t/r
100
0.2
0.3
60
2000
ca
200
0.3
0.4
60
2000
cp
n.a.
Cycle racing
- indoors
- outdoors
194
B
t/r
200
0.3
0.4
65
ca
300
0.4
0.5
65
4000
4000
cp
500
0.4
0.5
65
4000
t/r
100
0.2
0.3
20
4000
ca
200
0.4
0.5
65
4000
cp
400
0.4
0.5
65
4000

Sport
Activity level
E (lux)
U1
U2
Tc
all
500
0.5
0.7
85
3000
t/r/ca
cp
150
300
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
65
65
4000
4000
Bowls
- approximations,
- greens and rinks
t/r
200
0.3
0.5
65
3000
- pins
ca
cp
t/r
ca
cp
200
400
300*
300*
500*
0.3
0.3
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
0.5
0.5
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
65
65
65
65
65
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
t/r/ca
cp
t/r/ca
cp
750
1.500
500
1.000
0.5
0.7
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.8
0.5
0.6
65
65
65
65
4000
4000
4000
4000
100
200
300
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.3
0.4
0.5
65
65
65
4000
4000
4000
Billiards
Sleigh
Boxing
See martial arts
Cricket
- in the field
- outside the field
Curling
- tees/court
A
t/r
ca
cp
Darts
A
t/r
ca
cp
300*
500*
1.000*
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
85
85
85
3000
3000
3000
t/r/ca
cp
200
500
0.5
0.5
0.7
0.7
20
65
2000
4000
t/r
Ca
cp
300
600
800
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.7
65
65
65
4000
4000
4000
t/r
ca
cp
t/r
ca
cp
300
400
600
100
200
500
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.6
0.7
0.7
65
65
65
65
65
65
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
t/r
ca
cp
t/r
ca
cp
50
50
n.a.
30*
30*
n.a.
0.2
0.4
0.3
0.5
65
65
4000
4000
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
65
65
4000
4000
Greyhound racing
Fencing
Football
- indoors
- outdoors
Golf driving
- tee/green
- fairway/range
Group
195

Sport
Activity level
E (lux)
U1
U2
Tc
t/r
ca
cp
300
400
600
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.7
65
65
65
4000
4000
4000
t/r
ca
cp
t/r
ca
cp
300
400
600
100
200
500
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.6
0.7
0.7
65
65
65
65
65
65
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
t/r
ca
cp
t/r
ca
cp
300
600
800
100
250
500
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.6
0.7
0.7
65
65
65
65
65
65
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
4000
Gynastics
Handball
- indoors
- outdoors
Lawn hockey
- indoors
- outdoors
Ice hockey
- indoors
- outdoors
Equestrian sports
- indoors
- outdoors
B
t/r
ca
cp
t/r
ca
cp
300
600
800
100
250
n.a.
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.7
0.7
0.5
0.6
65
65
65
20
65
4000
4000
4000
2000
4000
t/r
ca
cp
t/r
ca
cp
300
400
600
50
150
300
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.3
0.5
0.5
65
65
65
20
65
65
4000
4000
4000
2000
4000
4000
t/r/ca
cp
200
500
0.5
0.5
0.7
0.7
20
65
2000
4000
t/r
ca
cp
300
400
600
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.7
65
65
65
4000
4000
4000
t/r
ca
cp
100
200
500
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.7
65
65
65
4000
4000
4000
t/r
ca
cp
500
1000
2000
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.7
65
65
65
4000
4000
4000
Horce racing
Judo
Karate
See martial arts
Lacrosse
Martial arts
196
Group

Sport
Car racing
- indoors
- outdoors
Activity level
E (lux)
U1
U2
Tc
B
t/r
ca
cp
t/r
ca
cp
300
400
600
50
100
200
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.6
0.3
0.4
0.4
65
65
65
20
20
65
4000
4000
4000
2000
4000
4000
t/r
ca
cp
250
500
750
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.6
0.6
0.6
60
65
65
2000
4000
4000
t/r
ca
cp
250
500
750
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.6
0.6
0.6
60
65
65
2000
4000
4000
t/r
ca
cp
100
200
500
0.2
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.5
0.5
20
65
65
2000
4000
4000
t/r
ca
cp
100
200
500
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.7
65
65
65
4000
4000
4000
t/r
ca
cp
t/r
ca
cp
200
400
n.a.
500*
1.000*
n.a.
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.4
60
60
2000
2000
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
60
60
2000
2000
t/r
ca
cp
t/r
ca
cp
100
200
n.a.
200*
400*
n.a.
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.4
60
60
2000
2000
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
60
60
2000
2000
t/r
ca
cp
t/r
ca
cp
300
600
800
100
250
n.a.
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.5
0.6
65
65
65
20
65
4000
4000
4000
2000
4000
t/r
ca
cp
t/r
ca
cp
200
300
500
100
200
400
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.5
0.5
0.3
0.5
0.5
65
65
65
20
65
65
4000
4000
4000
2000
4000
4000
Tennis
Pelota court
Roller skating
Rugby
Shooting (indoors)
- shooting zone
- target
Shooting (outdoors)
- shooting zone
- target
Figure skating
- indoors
- outdoors
Speed skating
- indoors
- outdoors
Group
197
HORIZONTAL ILLUMINANCE LEVEL CHART

Sport
Activity level
E (lux)
U1
U2
Tc
50
0.2
0.3
20
2000
Skiing
B
t/r
ca
100
0.2
0.3
20
2000
cp
200
0.2
0.3
20
2000
t/r
100
0.4
0.5
60
2000
Skiing jump
- sliding
- winning post
B
ca
200
0.4
0.5
60
2000
cp
200
0.4
0.5
60
2000
t/r
200
0.3
0.5
65
4000
ca
400
0.3
0.5
65
4000
cp
400
0.3
0.5
65
4000
t/r
200
0.3
0.5
60
3000
Swimming
- indoors
- outdoors
Group
A
ca
300
0.3
0.5
60
3000
cp
500
0.3
0.5
60
3000
t/r
100
0.2
0.3
65
4000
ca
200
0.3
0.5
65
4000
cp
400
0.3
0.5
65
4000
t/r
300
0.4
0.6
60
4000
Table tennis
C
ca
400
0.5
0.7
60
4000
cp
600
0.5
0.7
60
4000
t/r
500
0.4
0.6
65
4000
4000
Taekwondo
See martial arts
Tennis
- indoor (PPA)
- indoor (TPA)
- outdoor (PPA)
- outdoor (TPA)
B
ca
750
0.4
0.6
65
cp
1.000
0.4
0.6
65
4000
t/r
400
0.3
0.5
65
4000
ca
600
0.3
0.5
65
4000
4000
cp
800
0.3
0.5
65
t/r
250
0.4
0.6
60
2000
ca
500
0.4
0.6
65
4000
cp
750
0.4
0.6
65
4000
t/r
200
0.3
0.5
60
2000
ca
400
0.3
0.5
65
4000
cp
600
0.3
0.5
65
4000
t/r
300
0.4
0.6
65
4000
Diving board
A
ca
400
0.5
0.7
65
4000
cp
600
0.5
0.7
65
4000
t/r
300
0.4
0.6
65
4000
Volleyball
- indoor
- outdoor
198
B
ca
400
0.5
0.7
65
4000
cp
600
0.5
0.7
65
4000
t/r
100
0.4
0.6
65
4000
ca
200
0.5
0.7
65
4000
cp
500
0.5
0.7
65
4000
Legend for chart 3:

t: Training (amateur and professional).
r: General recreation.
ca: National competition.
cp: National and international competition without T.V. requisites.
E: Minimum average horizontal illuminance at ground level or, when it is signalled with *, minimum vertical
illuminance.
n.a.: Non applicable.
U1= Illuminance extreme uniformity (Emin/Emax)
U2= Illuminance average uniformity (Emin/Emed)
R: Colour reproduction index.
Tc= Colour temperature (in Kelvins degrees).
Group
Maximum
distance
Illuminance
Main
Secondary
camera
camera
Uniformity
U1
U2
500 lux
500 lux
0.4
0.5
0.3
0.5
65
4 000
Vertical
Horizontal
U1
U2
Tc
A
25 m
75 m
700 lux
500 lux
0.4
0.5
0.3
0.5
65
4 000
150 m
1 000 lux
700 lux
0.5
0.6
0.4
0.6
65
4 000
25 m
700 lux
500 lux
0.5
0.6
0.3
0.5
65
4 000
75 m
1 000 lux
B
700 lux
0.5
0.6
0.3
0.6
65
4 000
1 400 lux 1 000 lux
0.6
0.7
0.4
0.6
65
4 000
25 m
1 000 lux
700 lux
0.5
0.6
0.4
0.6
65
4 000
75 m
1 400 lux 1 000 lux
0.6
0.7
0.4
0.6
65
4 000
Tc
150 m
C
150 m
n.a.
n.a.
Chart 4. Recommended lighting for national T.V.
Group
Maximum
distance
Illuminance
Main
Secondary
camera
camera
Uniformity
Vertical
U1
U2
Horizontal
U1
U2
A
25 m
700 lux
700 lux
0.4
0.5
0.3
0.5
65(1)
4 000(2)
75 m
1 000 lux
700 lux
0.5
0.6
0.3
0.5
65
(1)
4 000(2)
1 400 lux 1 000 lux
0.5
0.6
0.4
0.6
65(1)
4 000(2)
25 m
1 000 lux
700 lux
0.5
0.6
0.3
0.5
65(1)
4 000(2)
75 m
1 400 lux 1 000 lux
0.6
0.7
0.4
0.6
65(1)
4 000(2)
150 m
1 750 lux 1 250 lux
0.6
0.7
0.4
0.6
65
(1)
4 000(2)
25 m
1 400 lux 1 000 lux
0.6
0.7
0.4
0.6
65(1)
4 000(2)
75 m
1 750 lux 1 250 lux
0.7
0.8
0.5
0.7
65(1)
4 000(2)
150 m
B
150 m
n.a.
n.a.
Chart 5. Recommended lighting for international T.V.

(1)
(2)
An R of 65 is admissible, but 90 is advised.

A Tc of 4 000 K is admissible, but 5,500 K is advised.
199
200
Chapter 12.
ROAD LIGHTING
12.1 Decision making criteria on road lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

12.2 Project situations, types of lighting systems and lighting levels . . . . . . . 205
12.3 Lighting engineering calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
12.4 Lighting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
201
202
Chapter 12. ROAD LIGHTING
12.1. Decision making criteria on road lighting

12.1.1. Objectives
The fundamental objective of road lighting is to allow a secure and comfortable vision during the night. Such qualities may
protect, ease and improve motor traffic. An adequate use of public lighting as an operative instrument provides economic and
social benefits like:
a) Reduction in accidents at night- time, including human endangered lives and economic losses.
b) Help to police protection and safety of population.
c) Easier traffic.
d) Promotion of transport and travelling at night.
The aim of public lighting is to provide the driver with the necessary visibility to distinguish obstacles and road layout with
enough time to maneuver in order to guarante security, apart from providing the automobilist with visual comfort while driving.
12.1.2. Night- time driving and users visual capacity

The visual environment of an automobilist driving at night is basically formed by the roadway. Visibility of an obstacle located
on the roadway, will depend on the luminance difference between the obstacle and the background, constituted by the
roadway on which it may be seen. In the case of a light- coloured object on a dark background, its contrast is positive. However,
an object darker than its background is seen as a silhouette and its contrast is negative. Road lighting generally produces
negative contrasts for dark objects or obstacles or those with low reflectance.
Night- time driving implies a mesopic or twilight vision comprised in the interval between 10-3 and 3 or 4 cd/m2. It is
characterized by a reduction in visual sharpness and a diminution in contrast differential sensitivity. A high luminance contrast
threshold is necessary for obstacle visibility. Likewise, this kind of vision in night- time driving implies an important alteration in
distance judging (deficient binocular vision), a limited perception of lateral obstacles and, finally, rare and unusual chromatic
vision.
It must be taken into account that vehicle headlights only illuminate a limited area ahead of them, while public lighting provides
light to the road and its surroundings, opening the field of vision to the driver. This results in an approach to daytime light
conditions, which may be important in certain traffic or environmental circumstances.
On the other hand, differential sensitiveness to contrast for any same driver is more than three times higher in a road provided
with lighting (2 cd/m2), when compared with that provided by a vehicle traffic beam (0.2 to 0.3 cd/m2). Visual sharpness
during night- time driving evolves in such a way that for a driver on a road provided with lighting, visual sharpness becomes
two and a half times higher than for the same driver using only the vehicle dipped headlights. For night driving with a vehicle
dipped headlights (0.2-0.3 cd/m2), the efficacy of binocular vision is reduced to one third (1/3) of that reached during the
day. Consequently, distance perception and judgment decreases considerably, implying a higher risk of accidents.
12.1.3. Decision making criteria for the need of road lighting

A selection of possible road segments must be conducted in order to determine which should be provided with public lighting.
There is a need, then, for establishing factors and criteria which will determine the introduction of such installations.
Factors influencing lighting
Some factors to take into account when implementing public lighting are the following:
1. Road type (motorways, dual carriageways, express roads or conventional roads), its location and its layout.
2. Conflict areas, such as crossroads, complicated crossings and special parts.
3. Traffic intensity and composition.
Lighting installation criteria in road segments recommend to bear in mind factors influencing the need for lighting, as well as
considering situations in which due to traffic intensity, only the car dipped headlights can be used for a long period of time.
In conventional roads, changes from full lights to dipped lights in order to avoid glares must be done at an approximate
203
distance of 500 m. between vehicles circulating in opposite directions. Therefore, the maximum number of vehicles driving
with full headlights per hour, at an average speed of 75 Km/h., is that of 150. This number is equivalent to a total of 300
vehicles per hour during the night on a straight stretch.
Chart 1 offers guiding criteria by indicating values for traffic daily average intensity (IMD) that may be adopted to take into
account the possibility of road lighting.
Likewise, in order to avoid the so-called "black hole" effect, it would be convenient to consider lighting stretches between
merging areas whose distance is inferior to 6 Km. in separate carriageway roads, and to 2 Km. in single carriageway roads.
Besides, it would be advisable to bear in mind those road stretches where there exists a considerable percentage of accidents
during the night when compared to daytime conditions.
Road type
Minimum IMD to illuminate (Veh/hour)
Conventional roads
12 000
Motorways and dual carriageways
22 000
Intersections
4 000
Merging areas
7 000
Chart 1. IMD limit values recommended for lighting.
204
12.2. Project situations, types of lighting systems and lighting levels

12.2.1. Project situation classification
Regarding present recommendations, the following situations compiled in Chart 2 must be considered.
PROJECT SITUATION CLASSIFICATION

Types of users
Road type
Project
situations
Roads with separate carriageways, flyovers and access control

(motorways, expresss roads).
A1
Two- way circulation road and access control (express roads)
Urban traffic routes with no separation for walkways or cycle paths.
Access roads and by- passes. Restricted urban traffic routes.
A2
0
A3
TYPES OF USERS
Main user
0
Motor traffic
Other permited users
Slow moving vehicles
Excluded users
Bicyclists
Pedestrians
Chart 2
12.2.2. Lighting class selection

Once the project situation has been established according to Chart 2, lighting class is chosen. It must satisfy the illumination
needs required for the mentioned project situation.
The following lighting classes ME series are defined for roads on dry conditions: ME1, ME2, ME3 (a, b) and ME4 (a, b). These
are established from greater to lesser need of lighting levels.
Each ME series lighting class comprises the following lighting levels:
- Road surface average luminance.
- Luminance overall uniformity.
- Luminance longitudinal uniformity.
- Disability glare (increase in threshold contrast).
- Environmental ratio (lighting of roadway adjacent areas).
Chart 3 includes lighting classes corresponding to A project situations.
Chart 4 comprises a total of 4 lighting classes ordered from greater to lesser lighting engineering need, expressing the levels
as minimum values in service. This means with maintenance of installation, except for the threshold increment TI which is
maximum initial value. In turn, ME3 and ME4 lighting classes are divided into a and b, whose difference lies in their longitudinal
uniformity.
205
LIGHTING CLASSES FOR TRAFFIC ROADS

PROJECT
SITUATIONS
TYPES OF USER
LIGHTING
CLASS*
Roads with separate carriageways, crossings at grade and access control (highways,
motorways):
Traffic density and complexity of road layout:
High (IMD) > 25,000
Medium (IMD) Between 15,000 and 25,000
Low (IMD) < 15,000
A1
ME 1
ME 2
ME 3a
Two- way circulation roads and access control (high speed roads):
Traffic density and complexity of road layout:
High (IMD) > 15,000
Medium and low (IMD) < 15,000
Urban traffic routes with no separation for walkways or cycle paths.
A2
Traffic density and complexity of road layout.

Traffic control and separation of different user types.
Specific parameters.
Distributor roads and by- passes.
Intercity roads with no access control.
A3
Traffic density and complexity of road layout.

Traffic control and separation of different user types.
Specific parameters.
ME 1
ME 2
ME 1
ME 2
ME 3a
ME 4a
ME 1
ME 2
ME 3b
ME 4a
ME 4b
* For all project situations (A1-A2 and A3), whenever nearby areas are light (light backgrounds), all traffic roads will increase their exigencies to that of
their immediately above lighting class.
Chart 3
Luminance is expressed in cd/m2, whereas uniformities, understood as a ratio between luminances, lacks a unit. Disability glare
appears as a percentage, and again, the environmental ratio also lacks units because it is a quotient between luminances.
From the point of view of lighting engineering, the most interesting project situations are the ones belonging to group A-1.
Situations for A-2 and A-3 lighting class are treated in a more general way.
For A1 project situation, Chart 3 summarizes the specific kind of lighting to be adopted, depending only on traffic intensity and
road layout complexity.
For the rest of project situations A2 and A3 there are several options to choose the kind of lighting. In each case, it is selected
according to traffic intensity and road layout complexity, traffic control and separation of different kinds of users, as well as
dominant specific parameters, specified below:
A2 project situation. Dominant parameters:
- Crossroad type (merging areas, intersections).
- Number of junctions.
A3 project situation. Dominant parameters:
- Roadway separation.
- Crossroad type (merging areas, intersections).
- Number of junctions.
12.2.2.1. Lighting engineering requirements for project situations
In Chart 4, lighting levels corresponding to each ME series lighting class are detailed.
206
LIGTHING CLASSES ME SERIES
LIGHTING CLASS*
ME1
ME2
ME3
ME4
a
b
a
b
ROADWAY SURFACE LUMINANCE IN DRY

CONDITIONS
Average
Overall
Longitudinal
luminance
uniformity
uniformity
Lm (cd/m2)
U0
U1 *
2.00
1.50
0.40
0.40
1.00
0.40
0.75
0.40
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.60
0.60
0.50
DISTURBING SURROUNDINGS
GLARE
LIGHTING
Threshold
Surrounding
increase
ratio
TI (%)**
SR***
10
10
0.50
0.50
15
0.50
15
0.50
*The levels for the chart are minimum values in service with maintenance of the lighting installation, except for TI, which are maximum initial values. In order
maintain such service levels, a depreciation factor not greater than 0.8 must be considered, depending on luminaire type and degree of pollution in the air.
** When low luminance level sources of light are used (fluorescent tubes and low pressure sodium), a 5% threshold increase (TI) is allowed.
*** The surround ratio SR must be applied to those traffic roadways where there are not other adjacent areas to the roadway with their own requisites.
Chart 4
12.2.2.2. Road lighting for wet conditions

In the particular case of wet roadways, the surface reflects light in a more specular or directed way than in a diffuse
one (same luminance in all directions in space). Roadway luminance uniformity is lessened negatively affecting
obstacle visibility on the road.
In those geographic areas where rain intensity and persistence provokes the roadway surface to be wet during a
significant part of night- time hours, criteria shown in Chart 5 will be taken into account. For these recommendations,
as an orientation, areas with an average higher than 100 rainy days in a year fall within this category. In these cases,
calculation of luminances overall uniformity will be done according to the method described in the publication CIE
n 47 (1979), bearing in mind the photometric features of normalized pavements in that case.
LIGHTING CLASSES MEW SERIES
ROADWAY SURFACE LUMINANCE IN DRY AND WET CONDITIONS
WET
ROADWAY
DRY ROADWAY
LIGHTING CLASS
DISTURBING SURROUNDINGS
LIGHTING
GLARE
Average
luminance
Lm (cd/m2)
Overall
uniformity
U0
Longitudinal
uniformity
U1 *
Overall
uniformity
U0
Threshold
increase
TI (%)
Surrounding
ratio
SR
2.00
0.40
0.60
0.15
10
0.50
MEW2
1.50
0.40
0.60
0.15
10
0.50
MEW3
1.00
0.40
0.60
0.15
15
0.50
MEW4
0.75
0.40
0.15
15
0.50
MEW1
* This criterion is not restrictive but may be applied, for example, to motorways, dual carriageways, two- way traffic single carriageways with access control.
Chart 5
207
12.2.2.3. Conflict areas

Conflict areas may be defined as such due to the complexity of vision and maneuver problems that vehicles
circulating on it have. Some examples are:
- Junctions (merging areas and intersections), and traffic circles.
- Areas where the number of lanes is reduced or the roadway width is decreased.
- Areas where new lanes are merging.
- Underpasses.
- Overhead crossings.
Likewise, conflict areas are those sectors with great difficulty because of a high presence of pedestrians, cyclists or
other users of the roadway or lanes.
Lighting installation must reveal or stress the conflict area, as well as all its characteristics, such as position of kerbs,
pavement markings, different delineations, traffic directions, etc. Following the same policy, the presence of
pedestrians, cyclists, obstacles, other vehicles and their movement in the surroundings of the conflict area must be
made evident.
a)
Luminance criterion
Whenever possible, luminance criteria, overall and longitudinal uniformities, disability glare and environmental ratios
defined for different lighting classes, will be applied to conflict areas. In all cases, lighting class defined for the conflict
area will be one degree higher than the degree of the roadway to which such a conflict area corresponds. For
example, if a road is to be provided with an ME4 lighting class, a conflict area included in its route will need an ME3a
lighting class. If several lanes meet in a conflict area, as it may happen with crossroads, the lighting class will be a
degree higer than the degree of the roadway that has the highest lighting class.
b)
Illuminance criterion
Only when luminance criteria cannot be applied, will illuminance criteria be used. This situation may take place when
the sight distance is lower than 60 m. (minimum value used for luminance calculation), and whenever the observer
may not be properly located due to convolution and complexity of road layout.
In such situations, lighting criteria will be applied by means of average illuminance and its uniformity, which
correspond to the CE series lighting classes (Chart 6). Limitations of glare or lighting pollution control, represented
by G series intensity classes (Chart 7), will also be observed.
LIGHTING CLASS CE SERIES
LIGHTING
CLASS*
HORIZONTAL ILLUMINANCE
CEO
Average Illuminance
Em (lux)
50
Average Uniformity
Um
0.40
CE1
30
0.40
CE2
20
0.40
CE3
15
0.40
CE4
10
0.40
CE5
7.5
0.40
* The levels of the chart are minimum values in service with lighting installation maintenance. In order to keep
such service levels, a depreciation factor not lower than 0.8, depending on luminaire type and air pollution
degree, must be considered.
Chart 6
208
According to Chart 8, ME and CE lighting classes, with identical numbers (for example CE3 and ME3), have a similar
lighting level. When the illuminance criterion is used, lighting class defined for the conflict area will be one degree
higher than that of the corresponding conflict area road. For example, if a road is attributed an ME2 lighting class, a
CE1 lighting class would correspond to a conflict area included in it.
Supposing there is a conflict area in which there is an ME1 lighting class road merging, the conflict area will continue
also as an ME1 lighting class or its equivalent, CE1. When this conflict area offers special complexity and a high risk
of accidents, in the worst situation and circumstances, a CE0 (50 lux) lighting class will correspond to such an area
or its similar luminance level of 3.3 cd/m2. For intermediate situations, lighting classes ranging between the CE1 and
CE0 interval may be adopted, corresponding to illuminance levels of 35, 40 and 45 lux or their similar values of 2.3,
2.7 and 3 cd/m2, respectively.
Conflict areas whose sidewalks or shoulders are not provided with a specific lighting, this will be considered as a
lighting level of, at least, 50% of that foreseen for the roadway.
INTENSITY CLASSES G SERIES
MAXIMUM INTENSITY
(cd/Klm)**
INTENSITY CLASS
At 70 *
500
350
350
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
At 80 *
200
150
100
100
100
100
At 90 *
50
30
20
10
10
0
OTHER REQUIREMENTS
None.
None.
None.
Intensities above 95 must equal zero.
** Any direction formed by the specified angle from the vertical downwards, with the luminance installed for its working.
** All intensities are proportional to lamp flux for 1 000 lm.
NOTE: Intensity classes G1, G2 and G3 coresspond to semi cut-off and cut-off photometric representations, concepts traditionally used for lighting
requirements defined in section 7.5.2. Intensity classes G4, G5 and G6 designate luminaires with very strong cut-off distribution, like for example,
luminaires with glass flat closing, in any position near the horizontal of the opening or the horizontal position strictly.
Chart 7
When an exhaustive requirement on glare limitation or light pollution control is needed, intensity classes G1, G2 and
G3 may be adopted. Supposing the conflict area typology, due to its configuration, complexity and potential
dangerousness, requires a greater glare limitation or light pollution control, only G4 and G5 intensity classes can be
chosen. Only under extreme circumstances, will G6 intensity class be mandatory.
12.2.2.4. Layout losses

Nowadays, there are no methods to quantify visual guidance provided by the installation of lighting on motor traffic
roads. Nevertheless, there are certain practical considerations which may be helpful when there are layout losses.
It is obvious that for safe driving, road layout, edges, possible crossroads and any other conflict area must be perfectly
visible. Lighting must contribute to achieve this goal, and so, the following points must be carefully considered:
- Lighting must increase road visibility with regard to adjacent areas and visibility of vertical, horizontal signaling and
beacons.
- Disposition of aiming points (luminaires) must allow detection of road layout, crossroads and other conflict areas
beofre reaching them, marking the route.
- Change in the source of light of a different colour compared to the colour of the traffic road at junctions,
intersections, traffic circles, by-passes and conflict areas where the ratio between night- time and daytime accidents
is high. This helps visual guidance.
Regarding vision of horizontal signalling, and pavement markings, to be exact, the essential point is to secure good
visibility at night, as well as for wet roadway conditions. In this case, rows of luminaires, retro reflective post mounted
209
delineators and contrasting pavement markings, being over the roadway water film caused by rain, maintain visibility
provided by road lighting and vehicle own headlights, preserving visual guidance and road security.
12.2.3. Reference area

Defined as part of the public working area, under consideration or study, several assumptions must be made according to
project situation groups specified below.
A project situation groups
The reference area will be constituted by the totality of the motor traffic roadway width, between its edges. For double
carriageway roads, the reference area will be formed by the total width of both roadways including the central reservation
between the two of them, unless their width is such that each roadway may be considered separately. The width of their
adjacent bands for the SR surrounding ratio, will be equal, at least, to the width of a traffic lane, 5 m width if possible. A specific
requirement will be the application of such ratio around the roadway adjacent bands, according to the ME series lighting classes
(Chart 4), MEW series (Chart 5) or CE series (Chart 6).
If there are parallel roads next to the motor traffic road, there are two alternatives:
1) Consider the total area
The reference area will be formed by the width of the motor traffic roadway, including parallel roads between their extreme
edges.
2) Consider the roadway and the parallel roads separately
The reference area of the motor traffic road will be exclusively the width of the roadway.
The reference area of the parallel road will be only its width. For cycle paths and pedestrian areas, the reference area, apart
from the width of such roads or lanes, must include 2 m. on each side.
12.2.3.1. Lighting classes with similar lighting levels
For all project situations or A traffic roads, lighting engineering levels must be specified for each reference area. The
difference between two adjacent areas should not be greater than two comparable lighting classes or those of a
similar lighting level, as established in Chart 8.
Once lighting levels of the ME, MEW and CE lighting classes series have been detailed, Chart 8 establishes lighting
classes with similar lighting level for such series.
LIGHTING CLASSES WITH SIMILAR LIGHTING LEVEL

COMPARABLE BY COLUMNS
CE 0
ME 1
MEW 1
CE 1
ME 2
MEW 2
CE 2
ME 3
MEW 3
CE 3
ME 4
MEW 4
CE 4
ME 5
MEW 5
CE 5
For ME/MEW classes r-chart C 2 roadway surface reflectance

(Publication CIE n 66)
Chart 8
210
ME 6
12.2.4. Lighting class temporal variations

In order to save energy in all project situations, lighting class may be momentarily changed to another one with an inferior level
of lighting engineering at certain hours at night during which traffic intensity is fundamentally lower. This can be done by means
of the corresponding regulation of the lighting level system. Lighting class temporal variations should not be done in conflict
areas . When lighting level is reduced, that is to say, it is changed from one lighting class to another at a certain hour, (midnight
lights out), changes will be such that, if average luminance is reduced to a lower class (for example, go from M2 to M3), glare
and luminance uniformity criteria established in Chart 4 must be observed.
12.2.5. High mounting support lighting

This name is given to lighting through aiming points whose mounting height is higher than 16 m., and whose maintenance
cannot be performed with a vehicle provided with a hydraulic basket.
This system is used each time the use of lighting conventional solutions is not satisfactory, due to the handling of supports
and to the difficulty of their installation in their corresponding location.
Lighting by means of high mounting supports is related to lighting of large surfaces, and is usually applied, in the following
situations, among others:
- Complex motorways, dual carriageways or road junctions.
- Traffic circles.
- Toll areas.
Lighting installation by means of high mounting supports is a solution when the installation of classic shafts or columns
originates problems in the surroundings, such as:
- Loss of perspective and level separation between supports (crossroads of motor traffic roads at different levels).
- Dimensioning problems (large areas), or aesthetics and visual guidance confusion (multiplicity of supports).
For this type of lighting the most frequent installation heights are 30 and 35 m. supports, even though in concrete situations
like complex crossroads, they may be higher than 40 m. The number of lighting sources will be reduced as much as possible,
by using discharge lamps with high lighting efficacy and potency. Luminaires provided with a conventional, adjustable or
specific optical system as well as floodlights may be installed, always paying attention to convenient solutions to achieve the
established goals.
In order to perform maintenance operations, accessibility to luminaires, control gears and lamps will be done by means of
fixed scales attached to the supports, up to a height of 20 m. For higher columns, the installation of an impeller system is
convenient.
In order to decrease glare, the tilt angle of floodlight maximum intensity will amount to 65%, limiting, as far as possible,
intensity values above this angle. Besides, the installation of grids or other antiglare devices may also be contemplated.
LIGHTING WITH HIGH SUPPORTS. LIGHTING CLASSES

DESCRIPTION OF ROAD TYPE
Very complex crossings with high traffic density and complex
road layout and field of vision
Complex crossings, traffic circles
Toll areas
LIGHTING
CLASSES
CE 0
CE 0
CE 1
CE 2
NOTE: In lighting situations corresponding to very complex crossings with high traffic density and complex road
layout and field of vision, in some special cases, luminance average uniformity will be 0.5.
Chart 9
211
12.3. Lighting engineering calculations

12.3.1. Luminance calculation of lighting installation
12.3.1.1. Method
Luminance at a point of the roadway is calculated using the following formula:
L=
E (c, ) r (,h tg) R (cm/m )

2
where the sum () comprises, in theory, all luminaires in the installation. Luminous intensity values (I(c,)) and
reduced luminance coefficient (r(, tg)) are obtained by square interpolation of the luminaire intensity matrix and
the pavement reflection chart. Lastly, variable h is the luminaire maximum height (Fig. 1).
Q
h
Observer
Figure 1. Luminance at a point.

Calculated luminance values are influenced by the maintenance factor as decreasing, which takes into account the
lamp luminous depreciation caused by dirtiness. In all calculations, a value lower or equal to 0.8 will be adopted,
depending on luminaire type and local degree of atmospheric pollution.
12.3.1.2. Hypothesis
The following sections are applicable to straight roadway stretches or large radius curves (radius >= 300 m.). In
another kind of configuration, each case will be studied separately, applying certain criteria for special situations.
Moreover, as it has already been indicated, calculations are established for pavement in dry conditions.
12.3.1.3. Selection of calculation lattice
The lattice calculation is the set of points in which luminance values will be calculated. In a longitudinal sense, the
lattice will cover the stretch of roadway between two consecutive luminaires in the same side.
In a transversal sense, it must comprise the width defined for the reference area.
Calculation points will be distributed as shown in Fig. 2 and their number will be:
- From a longitudinal point of view: 10 points for separations between luminaires lower than 50 m., or the least
212
number of points that will provide distances equal or inferior to 5 m. between them, for separations between
luminaires higher than 50 m.
- From a transversal point of view: 5 points per lane, one of them located in its center. The two most external points
will remain inside the roadway, with respect to its edge, at 1/6 of the lane width.
Luminaire
Luminaire
a/2
a
a/6
: Lattice point
Figure 2. Calculation lattice.

12.3.1.4. Observers position
a) Height: 1.5 m. over the roadway surface.
b) Longitudinal situation: At 60 m. from the first transversal line of calculation points.
c) Transversal situation:
- For the calculation of average luminance and overall uniformity, the situation will be at 1/4 of the roadway total
width, measured from the right edge of the roadway.
- For the calculation of longitudinal uniformity, for roads with traffic in two directions, the situation will be in the center
of each of the lanes of the direction under study.
12.3.1.5. Number of luminaires
The number of luminaires that contribute to luminance of a calculation point must be restricted to those previously
located at five times their mounting height, and at twelve times their mounting height, in the circulation sense.
Likewise, as for luminaires placed in a transversal way to the direction of circulation, only those which are at 5 times
less than their mounting height will be taken into account.
12.3.1.6. Calculations
- Average luminance: luminance average value calculated in the lattice points.
- Overall uniformity: quotient between the minimum luminance calculated in a lattice point and its average
luminance.
- Longitudinal uniformity: for each of the lanes, it is obtained by dividing minimum and maximum exact luminance
calculated on the axis of the lane.
213
12.3.2. Calculation of horizontal illuminances

12.3.2.1. Method
Horizontal illuminance at a point of the roadway is calculated using the following formula:
E=
E (c, )
cos3
h2
(lux)
being the angle formed by the direction of incidence at the point with the vertical (Fig. 3). The sum () comprises,
in theory, all luminaires in the installation.
E=
d
dS
Figure 3. Illuminance at a point

Illuminance calculations, as that of luminances, will be affected by a maintenance factor lower or equal to 0.8,
depending on the type of luminaire and the local degree of atmospheric pollution.
12.3.2.2. Selection of calculation lattice
The same as described in section 12.3.1.3 will be used.
Illuminances produced by luminaires will accumulate in the lattice points little by little, evolving from the closest to
the furthest ones, up to a point in which a luminaire will not produce a level higher than 1% of the accumulated
value in any of the lattice points.
- Average illuminance: average value of illuminances calculated in the lattice points.
- Average uniformity: quotient between minimum illuminance calculated at a point of the lattice and average
illuminance.
- Extreme uniformity: quotient between minimum and maximum illuminances calculated at a point of the lattice.
12.3.3. Disability glare calculation

12.3.3.1. Method
It is based on the calculation of veiling luminance:
214
Lv = 3 10-3
Eg
( )
2
(cd/m2)
where Eg (lux) is the illuminance produced by the eye in a plane perpendicular to the line of vision, and (rad) is
the angle between the direction of light inciding in the eye and the observation direction. The sum () is extended,
in principle, to all luminaires of the installation (see 12.3.3.4.).
The increase of the perception threshold is calculated according to the following formula:
TI = 65
Lv
(Lm)0.8
... (in %)
which is a valid formula for roadway average luminances (Lm) between 0.05 and 5 cd/m2.
12.3.3.2. Shielding angle
For disability glare calculation purposes, luminaires whose observation direction forms an angle greater than 20 with
the vision line will not be considered, since they are shielded by the roof of the vehicle.
12.3.3.3. Observers position
a) Height: 1.5 m. over the roadway surface.
b) Longitudinal situation: in such a way that the closest luminaire to be considered in the calculation will formed
exactly a 20 angle with the vision line. For staggered dispositions, two different calculations will be done (with the
first luminaire on each side at 20). The highest value of the two will be the result provided.
c) Transversal situation: at 1/4 of the roadway total width, measured from its right edge.
d) Observation point: The observer always looks at a point on the roadway placed at 90 m. in front of him, in the
ne
same transversal situation in which he finds himself.
iel
d
ing
p la
Ig
Sh
20
=1
O
W
1/4W
Figure 4. Observers position.
215

All luminaires placed at less than 500 m. from the observer are considered to contribute to disability glare.
- Veiling luminance: for each row of luminaires, the closest one is first considered, progressively driving away and
accumulating veiling luminances produced by each of them until their individual contribution is lower than 2% of the
accumulated one. The maximum is up to luminaires located at 500 m. from the observer. Finally, veiling luminance
of all rows of luminaires will be summed.
- Increase in perception threshold: it will be calculated with veiling luminance values obtained according to 12.3.3.1.
and with average luminance according to 12.3.1.6.
12.4. Lighting systems

12.4.1. Distribution of aiming points in crossroads, traffic rounds and curves
In crossroads and intersections lighting levels will be those established for conflict areas and, at least, from a 10 to 20% higher
than those corresponding to the road class whose lighting level is higher between those that merge in the same point.
Consequently, the situation of aiming points will be ideal in order to achieve such mentioned levels. By way of an example,
Walkway
Walkway
ground plan dispositions are indicated in Figs. 5 and 6.
Walkway
Walkway
Roadway
Walkway
Walkway
Figure 5
Walkway
Roadway
Walkway
Walkway
Figure 6
H mounting height of aiming points (Figs. 7 and 8) must be equal to that of the points of the main road that merges in the
traffic round to be illuminated. In case the central area of the traffic round lacks lighting higher or equal to 1.5 times the main
roadway average illuminance, supplementary lighting will be required.
216
lk
Wa
Wa
lkw
ay
Roadway
wa
y
a
Ro
dw
Ro
ay
Walkway
ad
wa
lk
Wa
Wa
lkw
ay
Roadway
Figure 7
wa
y
y
wa
ad
Ro
Walkway
Ro
ad
wa
Figure 8
If the central part of the traffic round has a diameter lower than 18 m., a special aiming point in a column or multiple arm
shaft will be installed in its center (Fig. 7). If its diameter is greater than 18 m. or it has trees in the center, aiming lights will
be placed in the prolongation of the circulation axis (Fig. 8).
With regard to installation of aiming points in curves and in relation to lighting, curve stretches are considered those whose
radius is inferior to 300 m. When their radius is greater than such a figure, they will be considered as straight stretches.
If the width A of the traffic road is lower than 1.5 times its mounting height H, aiming points must be installed in the outer
part of the curve, locating an aiming point in the prolongation of the circulation axis (Figs. 9 and 10). Separation between
aiming points will be inversely proportional to the radius of the curve, varying between 3/4 and 1/2 of the calculated average
separation of a straight stretch of such a traffic road.
For traffic roads whose width is greater than 1.5 times their mounting height H, the installation of aiming points must be twosided coupled. In any case staggered distribution must be avoided.
Walkway
Roadway
Roadway
Figure 9
217
ay
y
lkw
ay
wa
Wa
ad
lkw
Ro
Wa
Figure 10
12.4.2. Installation of aiming points in straight stretches

For traffic roads in straight stretches, five basic types of distribution of aiming points will be considered.
12.4.2.1. One- sided
When aiming points are situated in a single side of the traffic road (Fig. 11). It will generally be used when the A
width of the roadway is equal or inferior to the mounting height H of the luminaires.
Walkway
H
Roadway
Walkway
A
S
Figure 11. One- sided installation.

12.4.2.2. Two- sided staggered
When aiming points are located in both sides of the traffic road staggered or alternate (Fig. 12). It will generally be
used when the A width of the roadway is 1 to 1.5 times the mounting height H of the luminaires. The 1 to 1.3 H
interval is ideal.
Walkway
Roadway
Walkway
A
S
Figure 12. Two- sided staggered installation.

12.4.2.3. Two- sided coupled
When aiming points are located in both sides of the traffic road, one opposing the other (Fig. 13). It will generally be
used when the A width of the road is greater than 1.5 times the mounting height H of the luminaires. It is more
adequate to use it when the width is greater than 1.3 times the height H.
218
Walkway
Roadway
Walkway
A
S
Figure 13. Two- sided coupled installation.

12.4.2.4. Central or double row
In traffic roads with a central reservation between the two directions of traffic, aiming points will be installed in doublearmed columns or shafts, located in the central reservation, when its width ranges between 1 and 3 m. (Fig. 14).
Walkway
Direction of traffic
Roadway
Central reservation
Roadway
Walkway
Figure 14. Installation for values 1 < b < 3 m.
For central reservations, wider than 3 m., double-armed shafts will not be used. In any case, their disposition will be
studied as if we were talking of two separate and independent roadways, giving rise to the installation of the following
figures. Fig. 15 is recommended over Fig. 16, since drivers are incited to circulate always on the traffic lane nearest
to the central reservation (left lane).
Walkway
Roadway
Central reservation
Roadway
Walkway
Figure 15. Installation for any b value.
219
Walkway
Roadway
Central reservation
Roadway
Walkway
Figure 16. Installation for values b > 3m.
12.4.2.5. Catenary
Aiming points are fixed axially to the catenary longitudinal cables, lying between two solid supports installed in the
central reservation and located at a great distance one from the other, at about 50 to 100 m. (Fig. 17).
Figure 17. Catenary installation.

This type of distribution has a very serious inconvenience which is that aiming points are easily moved by the action
of the wind, losing some of their effectiveness.
220
12.4.2.6. Combined groupings

Different combinations of the five basic dispositions (onesided, staggered, twosided, central and catenary) may
be used. For example, in two roadway roads with a central reservation, it is usuall to combine central and twosided
installations in opposition (Figs.18 and 19).
Walkway
Slow moving traffic roadway (2 lanes)
Central reservation
Fast moving traffic roadway (3 lanes)
Central reservation
Fast moving traffic roadway (3 lanes)
Roadway
Central reservation
Slow moving traffic roadway (2 lanes)

Walkway
Figure 18. Combined grouping.
Walkway
Slow moving traffic roadway
Central reservation
Fast moving traffic roadway

Central reservation
Slow moving traffic roadway
Walkway
Figure 19. Combined grouping.
221
12.4.3. Disposition of aiming points in elevation

For disposition of aiming points in elevation, the height adopted will be mounting height H chosen in lighting engineering
calculations. However, there are special instances in which mounting height must be fixed according to other concepts, as it
happens with traffic roadways with trees near the edges.
If trees have an enormous size, they can be cleared up to a height of 8 or 10 metres. Luminaires will be placed at such height
(Fig. 20).
8 - 10 mts.
Figure 20. Elevation of enormous trees.

If trees have a small size, luminaires will be placed at a height of 12 to 15 metres (Fig. 21). In any case, it is convenient to
give trees an adequate pruning periodically.
12 - 15 mts.
Figure 21. Elevation of small trees.
222
12.4.4. Disposition of aiming points in intersections

12.4.4.1. Intersections in right angle with two illuminated roadways
Two cases must be distinguished for this type of intersections: whenever motor traffic on roadways is not canalized
(Figs. 22 to 25), and whenever motor traffic on only one of the roadways is canalized by means of small directional
traffic islands (Fig. 26).
When motor traffic on roadways is not canalized, the problem must be tackled by combining installations
recommended for each type of lighting (onesided, staggered, double row, twosided, etc.), as represented in Figs.
22 to 25.
e1' < e1
e1
Aiming points drawn in intersections in white serve as the basis for installing the rest.
e' < e
e1
e = normal separation
e' = reduced separation
Right angle intersection: Recommended installation on

two roadways with onesided lighting
e1
Figure 22
e' < e
e1' < e1
e1
Right angle intersection: Recommended installation on two

roadways with staggered lighting
Figure 23
223
e1
e' < e
e1' < e1
e1
Right angle intersection: Recommended installation on two roadways

with onesided and twosided lighting
e' < e
e1' < e1
e1
Figure 24
e1
Right angle intersection: Recommended installation on roadways

with staggered and twosided lighting
Figure 25
In the second case, when motor traffic in one of the roadways is canalized by means of small directional traffic islands
whereas, traffic is not in the other, (Fig. 26), the installation of aiming points must begin with the roadway provided
with traffic islands, which will be studied separately. The installation of aiming points will begin from the intersection,
reducing the separation between these and continuing with the roadway with canalized traffic, adopting any of the
adequate installation systems (onesided, staggered, double row, twosided, etc.).
The origin of locating aiming points for roadway lighting wherever traffic is not canalized by means of traffic islands
will be also tackled at the intersection, adjusting aiming points as established for the other roadway, and continuing
with an adequate placing of aiming points bearing in mind the roadway characteristics (onesided, staggered, double
224
row, twosided, etc.).

Eventually, lighting in the center of the intersection may be reinforced by installing more powerful aiming points, by
adopting more powerful lamps or installing two luminaires in every aiming point or support.
"X"- shaped intersection: It may turn useful to provide

circled aiming points with more power
Figure 26
12.4.4.2. "T"- shaped intersections between two illuminated and partially canalized roadways
This type of intersections (Fig. 27) establishes an installation of aiming points recommended so that users who arrive
from the merging roadway are able to see an illuminated background ahead of them.
This is not the only possible solution, though. Depending on local conditions, it may be possible to reduce the
number of aiming points, using others of a higher potency and height installation (Fig. 28).
"T"- shaped intersection: Installation example. Double lined areas

represent the visual guidance effect that must be provided by lighting.
It may turn useful to provide circled aiming points with more power.
Figure 27
225
60 m.
"T"- shaped intersection: Installation example with aiming points of more power
and of height supports than those of figure 13.27. Aiming point of 18 m.
with 4 luminaires. Aiming point of 18 m. with 2 luminaires. Aiming point of 12
m. with 1 luminaire. Aiming point of 12 m. with 2 luminaires
Figure 28
12.4.4.3. "Y" or "T"- shaped intersections between two roadways totally canalized
In the proximity of such intersections, generally both traffic directions for vehicles are separated by large directional
traffic islands, along which the layout of aiming points is onesided (Fig. 29).
Likewise, more powerful and aiming points of a greater height may be placed (Fig. 30).
"Y" or "T"- shaped intersection: Example of a onesided installation on

two important roadways totally canalized by means of traffic islands
Figure 29
226
.
50 m
.
50 m
.
50 m
.
50 m
"Y" or "T"- shaped intersection: Example of a onesided installation with

aiming points of more power and height than those of figure 13.29
Figure 30
12.4.5. Vegetation
Understanding and cooperation between vegetation and lighting is required so that neither interferes with the job or function
performed by the other.
Pruning line
Pruning line
angle "A"
Mounting height
luminaire
Tree pruning
height
70
75
80
M = 0.36 D
M = 0.26 D
M = 0.17 D
Figure 31
227
The selection of the type of shrub or tree must be based on those which leave enough free space for lighting with minimum
interference between both of them. These selections may include trees with stylized, spherical or normal forms. In most cases,
a good pruning service may solve any problem between trees and road lighting.
It must be highlighted that even in installations with a great mounting height, it is not necessary to prune all trees up to the
luminaire height. It is only necessary to prude those branches which fall below the useful luminous beam (Fig. 31). Leafiness
of trees located between the luminaire and the objects, may serve the purpose of trimming and distinguishing silhouettes in
an intentioned way. At the same time, it helps to reduce luminaire direct glare on possible observers or drivers. This advantage
is particularly important in roads with local traffic and residential areas, where relatively high inter- distances, together with high
potencies and angles approaching the horizontal are required.
12.4.5.1. Criteria and design compromises
To minimize lighting interferences with trees, there are certain types of compromises which may be applied to lighting
systems. Regarding this respect, possible variations that may happen in inter-distance, mounting height, and
transverse situation of aiming points must be born in mind. Such variations generally produce, in turn, changes in the
luminous distribution of the lighting installation.
12.4.5.2. Design modifications
As a modification example, mention the fact that all luminaires may be mounted on long arms. This usually increases
the installation expenses, but improves lighting effectiveness, avoiding or palliating interference with vegetation.
14
4
6
8
10
luminaire mounting height mts.
12
Wi
Cyli
de
nd
py
ri c
r
al
a
yra m
m
ida
idal
typ e
l ty
pe
ow p
N a rr
Spher
ical
typ
Oval type
e
e
typ
Walkway
Roadway
Luminaire projection mts.
Figure 32
Another possible design modification may be luminaire suspension by means of catenary systems over the center
of the roadway. In this case, the problem is the extra expenses implied by the utilization of two supports per
luminaire. An added disadvantage to this system is the loss of lighting efficacy which takes place when luminaires
are under the action of the wind, given that the wind modifies their orientation and, therefore, also their photometric
distribution.
Another possible design variation consists in reducing the luminaire installation height under vegetation, in such a
way that also lamp potency is reduced. The problem is also that of extra expenses, since the interdistance between
luminaires has to be reduced. Therefore, the number of luminaires must be increased and advantages disappear.
One last design alteration may be performed, which consists in increasing lamp potency to compensate for light lost
on its way towards roadway and sidewalks. However, this presupposes a clear inconvenience since the luminaire
228
direct glare increases and, above all, energetic cost is also higher without resulting in a clear improvement of luminous
uniformity.
12.4.5.3. Design fundamentals
When variations in the longitudinal interdistance of aiming points is performed so that they do not interfere with
trees, deviations of 10% of the previous calculated separation may be assumed. Such variations do not imply great
differences as far as results are concerned.
Maximum differences of about 20% of the interdistance may be tolerated, provided it does not happen in two
consecutive aiming points. Such variation, anyway, may be proved through calculations which will indicate whether
all exigencies established beforehand are verified or not for those areas affected by modification. When separation
of two or more consecutive luminaires is altered, it must be confirmed by means of variation of other parameters,
like transverse location of aiming points or their installation height.
Luminaire alingment over the roadway is a basic factor with respect to visibility and installation aspect or appearance.
Only when it is not possible in any other way, a luminaire will be installed outside the line of the others.
The height of columns or shafts which support luminaires will be selected in such a way that it will be adequate to
each installation in particular. The higher these supports are, the fewer problems will be encountered with leafiness
of vegetation, but it is also true that expenses will probably grow in a considerable way.
12.4.5.4. Design data
Figs. 32 and 33 aim at being a practical guide when this kind of difficulties between lighting and tree leafiness appear.
Nar
ro
Cy
l
Sp
W h
id
Luminaire projection in mts.
e
yp
Rodway side
pe
l ty p e
l ty mida
icapyra
r
pe
e e
a l ty
ric
d
in
amidal typ
p yr
w
pyramida
lt
row
l ty p e
rica
ramidal type
he e py
Sp Wid
rical type
lind
Cy
N
ar
Walkway side
For example, a luminaire transverse situation for different heights and vegetation types.
1
2
3
4
5
Dist. from luminaire to vegetation
Figure 33
Although roadway lighting usually produces interferences with vegetation, lighting of walkways of other lateral areas
of the roadway must not be forgotten. This aspect is sometimes even more important than roadway lighting itself in
certain residential or pedestrian areas.
229
In order to solve this problem three factors may be changed, namely:

- Luminaire installation location and height.
- Correct and regular pruning.
- Addition of an aiming point exclusively for the lighting of these areas, at a lower height than road conventional
lighting.
230
Chapter 13.
TUNNEL LIGHTING
13.1 General remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

13.2 Long tunnel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
13.3 Lighting of short tunnels and underpasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
13.4 Emergency lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
13.5 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
13.6 Ignition control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
13.7 Night- time lighting (tunnel exterior zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
13.8 Tunnel lighting design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
13.9 Visual guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
231
232
Chapter 13. TUNNEL LIGHTING

Vehicle driving through tunnels during daytime hours gives rise to a totally different problem when compared to night- time outdoor
driving, which is basically reduced to differences existing between high outdoor luminance levels and low luminance levels in the
interior of tunnels.
The fundamental visual problem in tunnels is that of adaptation of the human eye from high outdoor luminances during the day, to
low luminances (virtually null) in the interior of a tunnel. It must also be born in mind that, for a certain luminance distribution, an
obstacle cannot be seen if its luminance is much lower than the distribution luminance. All this provokes what is called "the black hole
effect" which prevents drivers from seeing the interior of the tunnel during the day, when they are at a certain distance from its mouth.
All this considering that for the majority of tunnels, daytime natural light only enters, depending on their orientation, some distance
of about one to three times their longest transversal dimension. Beyond such a distance, existent luminous conditions are not enough
to secure visibility of eventual obstacles, or for an adequate guidance of drivers.
From the point of view of lighting engineering, the following zones may be differentiated in tunnels: access, entrance constituted by
the zones of threshold and transition, interior and finally, exit (see Fig. 4). Due to economic reasons, it is not possible to establish
lighting conditions identical to those existing during the day in the outside (access zone) in the tunnel entrance zone, which may reach
values of up to 100 000 lux.
In the threshold zone located just at the entrance of the tunnel, with an approximate length equal to the security distance, lighting
during the day must be measured in such a way that it will secure enough vision of eventual obstacles on the roadway. Although a
first brusque reduction of lighting levels existent outside (access zone) takes place, it is acceptable. In the second part of the threshold
zone, lighting levels progressively diminish.
13.1.1. Visual problems in tunnels

Visual problems in tunnels comprises induction and adaptation effects, as well as the influence of veiling luminances. All this
requires to bear security distance in mind depending on tunnel traffic speed.
13.1.1.1. Induction effect
Human eye sensitivity depends on the distribution of luminances in the field of vision. Sensitivity is also influenced
by two phenomena called induction and adaptation.
Regarding induction, it is the effect produced by the influence of adjacent parts of the retina to that in which the
image of the object being seen is formed. If the drivers eyes are in a state of adaptation to a certain distribution of
luminances, this person can only see those objects whose luminance is close to the mentioned distribution.
Due to the eye adaptation of a driver who is approaching a tunnel to high daytime exterior luminances, when the
driver observes the mouth or entrance of the tunnel, the part of the retina receiving the image from outside
influences the other part receiving the image of the tunnel entrance, thus, creating an effect of induction. Hence, the
tunnel entrance appears as a black hole in which not a single detail can be seen. The induction effect makes that
with a given distribution of luminances (natural daytime road lighting), an object cannot be seen if its luminance is
much lower than the distribution one (virtually null lighting at the tunnel entrance), no matter how long such an
object is contemplated.
13.1.1.2. Adaptation effect
It allows the adjustment of the human eye sensitivity to a change in the distribution of luminances in the field of
vision. The time required for the adaptation of the human eye sensitivity to a change in the distribution of luminances,
is known as adaptation time.
The adaptation of the eye sensitivity to quick changes in the distribution of luminances in the field vision is not
instantaneous. For a certain amount of time, visual capacity decreases, giving rise to a momentaneous blindness in
case of a brusk change in the distribution of luminances. That is to say, in some situations like the case of tunnel
entrances, the problem may be serious and visual function may not be possible.
233
13.1.1.3. Influence of veiling luminances

Parasite light present on the drivers eyes (foveal veiling luminance or Frys), the atmospheric situation (atmospheric
luminance) and reflexes on the vehicle winshield (windshield luminance), are combined to form a luminous veiling
that reduces visibility of obstacles at the entrance of tunnels.
The main reason for tunnel lighting is to secure visibility of obstacles at any time, which requires to perceive a
difference between luminance of the obstacle and luminance of the background or tunnel roadway and walls.
By definition, contrast is expressed in the following way:
C=
L0 Lf
Lf
where:
L0 = Luminance of the obstacle.
Lf = Luminance of the background.
Contrast C may be positive or negative:
If L0 > Lf C > 0
Positive contrast (obstacle lighter than background)
If L0 < Lf C < 0
Negative contrast (obstacle darker than background)
In the case of tunnels, two types of contrast must be distinguished: the so- called intrinsic or physic Cint measured
next to the obstacle and the retina contrast CR measured from the vehicle drivers eye.
In Fig. 1, it may be checked that intrinsic contrast Cint is measured next to the obstacle in (1), while retina contrast
CR is evaluated from the observers eye in (4). Between both contrasts, a set of veiling luminances called atmospheric
Latm, of windshield Lpb and foveal or Frys Lv, respectively, which give rise to veiling glare which discomforts vision in
the drivers eyes.
The layers of air in the atmosphere containing particles illuminated by sunlight give rise to atmospheric luminance
Latm due to the refraction of light in such air layers of the atmosphere. This type of luminance depends on
atmospheric conditions and the position of the sun.
Luminance of the windshield Lpb is produced as a result of the existence of windshields in vehicles, which provokes
difraction or reflection effects depending on the position of the sun in the visual field and the state, curvature and
inclination of the windshield itself.
Foveal veiling luminance or Frys Lv is caused by the discomfort in vision provoked by a luminance not belonging to
the visual task to be perfomed. This also difficulties the perception of images of such a visual task, due to the
luminous veil produced in the drivers eye as a result of the difraction of light in the aqueous humor of the eye globe.
Atmospheric windshield and foveal or Frys veiling luminances produced between the obstacle and the driver, as
shown in Fig. 1, reduce the intrinsic contrast Cin of the obstacle (CR < Cint) without changing the sign of the contrast,
decreasing visibility of obstacles at the entrance of tunnels.
Such a reduction in the intrinsic contrast may cause that visibility of obstacles at the entrance of tunnels is not
secured, above all in the case of strong veiling luminances, which may oblige to duplicate luminance values to be
reached in the tunnel threshold zone by means of artificial lighting. The aim is to soften reduction of the mentioned
contrast. Consequently, a decrease of the visibility of obstacles on the part of the driver may take place. Thus, the
effect produced by veiling luminances is taken into account when establishing lighting levels at the entrance of
tunnels.
Parasite or veiling luminances which characterise the effects of the surroundings of the tunnel, the windshield and
the atmosphere and bother the drivers vision are variable according to the region and zone where the tunnel is
located. They also depend on its orientation, season, climate, hour of the day, etc.
234
4
2
Foveal or Fry's veil
Atmosphere
3 Windshield
1
Cint. = LO - Lf
Lf
CR = LOR - LfR
LfR
Atmospheric parasite veils Latm of windshield Lpb and of foveal veil or Fry's Lv
Figure 1
13.1.1.4. Security distance

Security distance (DS) is defined as the necessary distance for the driver of a vehicle circulating at a certain speed
to stop before an obstacle on the roadway is reached. Such a distance consists of two addends: the vehicle travel
from the moment in which the driver sees the obstacle until this person brakes, and the breaking distance as such.
Security distance may be calculated according to the following formula:
DS = RT
V0
3.6
1
3.62 g
v
f1 (v) + h
dv
where:
DS =
Security distance (m.).
V0
Design speed (Km/h.).
RT =
Perception- reaction time (s).
f1(v) =
Friction coefficient (longitudinal) dependent on v.
Gravity acceleration (9.81 m/s2).
Slope or gradient inclination of the road (%).
Applying the formula, the following examples of stopping distance DS on flat roads for retardations from 3.5 to 5
m/s2 are obtained:
Design speed (Km/h)
Ret
120
100
80
70
60
50
DS (wet road) m.
3.5
230
160
105
90
70
50
DS (dry road) m.
150
110
75
65
55
40
Chart 1
When a vehicle is close to a tunnel, the induction and adaptation effects and the influence of veiling luminances are
intimately related to the distance at which the driver of the vehicle is at the entrance of such a tunnel, in the so-called
access zone with an approximate length equal to the security distance (DS, Fig. 4).
The higher the speed of a vehicle, the higher the security distance (DS). This is the reason why some considerations
must be taken into account:
- Perception of an obstacle is proportional to the inverse of the square of the security distance (DS-2), supposing
contrast is constant.
- Atmospheric veiling luminance Latm is proportional to the security distance (DS). Atmospheric transmission is
Tatm = 10-kDS.
- Visual adaptation speed is related to the vehicle approximation speed.
235
For a driver in the access zone, the higher the speed of the vehicle, the longer the distance from the entrance of the
tunnel towards the interior in which the driver has to see inside the tunnel. This presupposes greater length of the
threshold zone to be illuminated.
Likewise, the greater the distances, an obstacle located in the interior of the tunnel requires a smaller angle in the
drivers eye and, thus, it is less visible. Besides, the air layer between the driver located in the access zone and the
entrance of the tunnel is greater, which means greater atmospheric luminance Latm, reduction of intrinsic contrast Cint
and, consequently, decrease of visibility of obstacles. All this requires higher lighting levels in the threshold zone of
the tunnel.
In short, higher speeds require longer security distances (DS), which means greater length of the threshold zone of
the tunnel to be provided with lighting, as well as higher lighting levels in such a zone. Therefore, due to both reasons,
higher costs come along.
13.1.2. Lighting systems

Lighting systems in tunnels may be divided into two families: symmetrical and asymmetrical, which, at the same time,
comprises a lighting system with flux opposite to vehicle circulation directions. This also receives the name of counterflux.
The lighting system favoring the flux lacks practical utility and, therefore, is not considered.
Lighting of tunnels is characterized by the contrast quality parameter P, also known as contrast development coefficient qc
whose formula is the following:
P = qc =
L
Ev....
where:
L
= Roadway luminance in cd/m2.
Ev = Obstacle vertical illuminance in lux at the roadway level in the direction of traffic. That is to say, average
illuminance on a vertical surface perpendicular to the axis of the tunnel, and oriented towards the entrance.
13.1.2.1. Symmetrical lighting system
The symmetrical lighting system is that in which luminaires have a distribution of luminous intensity which is
symmetrical in relation to the plane C
90/270.
To a plane perpendicular to the axis of the tunnel, as represented in
Fig. 2.
Contrasts of obstacles may be negative or positive, depending on the reflection properties of their surface.
Nevertheless, this system strives to secure vision on a positive contrast: obstacles will be seen as light against the
dark background of the tunnel roadway and walls.
The symmetrical lighting system is used in all cases in the interior zone of tunnels with luminaires provided with
conventional and compact fluorescent lamps, high and low pressure sodium lamps or discharge by induction lamps.
The installation of such a system is possible in the entrance zone of such tunnels which have established a low
limitation in the approximation speed of vehicles.
This system allows good visibility of obstacles and lack of glare. From a photometric point of view, it is advisable that
the roadway pavement and the tunnel walls are diffusing surfaces (low specular factor S1) and light (high average
luminance coefficient Q0). Therefore, it is convenient that pavement belongs to the R1, R2 or C1 Class, following
recommendations of the C.I.E., with a high degree of brightness or luminosity (Q0 is the highest possible).
236
Figure 2
The measuring of tunnel lighting, by means of a symmetrical system in the entrance zone leads to lighting levels
difficult to achieve for approximation speed of vehicles higher than 90 Km/h with weak or average veiling luminances
in the access zone, or higher than 70 Km/h with strong veiling luminances. When levels higher than 200 cd/m2 are
to be achieved, very complicated to reach in practice with the symmetrical system, it is necessary to find other
alternatives in such situations, either limitation of the speed of vehicles or installation of a lighting system at
counterflux in the entrance zone.
13.1.2.2. Counterflux lighting system
The counterflux lighting system is a system in which luminaires have a distribution of asymmetric luminous intensity,
directed against the direction of traffic, as represented in Fig. 3.
This lighting system favours seeing obstacles by negative contrast. Obstacles are highlighted as dark against the
roadway light background and tunnel walls, due to the fact that vertical illuminance in planes facing approaching
drivers is low. This vision in negative contrast is achieved reducing the obstacle luminance (L0), slightly limiting its
vertical illuminance (Ev), and increasing roadway luminance.
237
Figure 3
The counterflux lighting system is only used in the tunnel entrance zones. It is recommended in this zone where the
limitation of the vehicle speed is high, that is to say, from approximately 90 Km/h, given economic advantages found
in these situations. Luminaires are to be installed over traffic lanes and are normally equipped with high pressure
sodium lamps. It must be stressed that counterflux lighting is never installed in the interior zone of tunnels.
Due to the own structure of the system, its installation must be avoided in two- way tunnels (bidirectional), because
in this case, what is counterflux for one determined direction of traffic would be favourable for the opposite one, thus,
modifying drivers visual conditions.
The counterflux lighting system usually creates more contrast between the obstacle and the background, but it can
also produce a certain increase in the black hole effect, reducing drivers visual comfort. Likewise, such a counterflux
system may not be appropriate for the entrance of tunnels with high daytime light, and it is even less effective when
traffic intensities are very high or a high percentage of slow moving vehicles is foreseen.
In this lighting system which provides good visibility of obstacles, glare must be limited controlling luminous intensity
emited by luminaires. The use of specular pavement (high specular factor S1) and light is advisable, from a
photometric point of view. That is to say, with a high average luminance coefficient Q0, pavement class R3, R4 or C2,
according to recommendations of the C.I.E., with a high degree of brightness or luminosity (Q0 is the highest
possible). Besides, a high luminance must be limited in tunnel walls, at least, up to a 1 m. level, with the aim of
reducing obstacle vertical illuminance (Ev).
13.1.2.3. Contrast development coefficient
The adopted lighting system either symmetrical or counterflux is characterized by certain contrast development
coefficients qc, whose values are included in Chart 2.
238
CONTRAST DEVELOPMENT COEFFICIENT

Contrast development coefficient
qc = LIEv
Lighting systems
Symmetrical
0.2
Counterflux
0.6
Note: Lighting systems whose values for contrast development coefficient is between 0.2 and
0.6 have not been taken into account.
Chart 2
The value of the contrast development coefficient qc = L/Ev is slightly linked to the intrinsic characteristics of the
tunnel lighting system, to the installation of luminaires and the reflective characteristics of the pavement, as well as
to the photometric contribution of the tunnel walls.
These values of Chart 2 characterize the lighting system of tunnels only in night- time measures, that is to say, without
influence of daytime light, which alters values of the contrast development coefficient qc.
In measurements during the day in the entrance zone of tunnels and for the symmetrical lighting system, qc reaches
figures higher than 0.2, whereas for the counterflux system, qc values are lower than 0.6. Especially, due to this
variation in the contrast development coefficient qc = L/Ev during a daytime measurement respect to a night- time
measurement, contrast changes sign going from negative to positive contrasts and viceversa. This gives rise to
situations in which obstacles are not perceived.
13.1.2.4. Natural lighting system with daytime light
Besides artificial lighting systems and counterflux ones, there is another alternative for tunnel entrance lighting by
means of an adequate use of shielded daytime light provided by paralumens or screens. This type of natural lighting
must satisfy the same luminous levels than those of artificial lighting. Factor k values (coefficient by which luminance
of the tunnel access zone must be multiplied L20 in order to obtain luminance of the threshold zone of the tunnel
Lth, that is to say, Lth = k L20), are identical to those of the symmetrical lighting system. Likewise, the contrast
development coefficient qc for natural lighting will be determined in the same way as for artificial lighting, included
also, in the calculation to the interreflected light contribution.
13.1.3. Tunnel classification

The parameter that allows a classification of tunnels is that of their geometric conditions and, their length, in particular. Lighting
exigencies for long and short tunnels differ according to the degree in which the driver of an approaching vehicle may see
through the tunnel. The capacity to see through the tunnel essentially depends on its length, but also on other design
parameters (width, height, horizontal and vertical curvatures, etc.).
13.1.3.1. Classification of long tunnels
As far as lighting is concerned, long tunnels are classified according to traffic intensity, speed and composition, visual
guidance and driving comfort.
13.1.3.1.1. Ponderation factors according to traffic intensity
There is a certain ratio, but not a linear one, between traffic intensity and the risk of accidents which
may be counteracted, increasing the lighting level of the tunnel to a certain extent.
The second factor to bear in mind is that high speed requires better visibility and, this is the main reason
why a higher luminance level on the roadway is necessary.
As soon as it has been decided that a tunnel should be provided with lighting, speed has a considerable
importance, due to its influence in visibility requisites. The higher the speed, the longer security distance
(DS), which obliges to higher luminances in the threshold zone of the tunnel.
When a tunnel is going to be illuminated, traffic intensity is defined as hourly intensity, that is to say, as
the number of vehicles circulating on a road lane at a certain hour. Ponderation factors depend on traffic
intensity they are detailed in Chart 3.
239
PONDERATION FACTORS ACCORDING TO TRAFFIC INTENSITY

TRAFFIC INTENSITY (Vehicles/hour per lane)
PONDERATION FACTOR
Unidirectional
Bidirectional
< 60
< 30
60-100
30-60
100-180
60-100
180-350
100-180
350-650
180-350
650-1200
35-650
> 1200
650-1200
> 1200
Chart 3
13.1.3.1.2. Ponderation factors according to traffic composition
As it has been indicated, the degree of dificulty of the task of driving a vehicle on a road is generally
influenced by traffic speed and intensity, not to mention traffic composition and road layout and
surrounding areas.
Traffic composition also influences lighting design of tunnels in several aspects:
- Percentage of lorries.
- Presence/ ausence of motorbikes and/ or bicyclists.
- Presence/ ausence of limitation to allow the transit of dangerous cargo.
Lighting design in tunnels must be adapted to previous circumstances. Higher luminous levels or better
lighting of walls or roadways is required when conditions are more difficult or more dangerous.
Ponderation factors depending on traffic composition are the following:
PONDERATION FACTORS ACCORDING TO TRAFFIC COMPOSITION

TRAFFIC COMPOSITION
PONDERATION FACTOR
Motorized traffic
Motorized traffic
(trucks percentage > 15%)
Mixed traffic
2
Chart 4
13.1.3.1.3. Ponderation factors according to visual guidance

The driver of a vehicle must have adequate information to drive along the tunnel. This may be achieved
dividing the longitudinal surface of the tunnel into several contrast surfaces, like for example, using a
light wall and a dark ceiling. Visual guidance is of special importance:
- When the user is approaching the tunnel.
- Specially if the tunnel entrance contour is low.
Ponderation factors according to visual guidance are the following:
PONDERATION FACTORS ACCORDING TO VISUAL GUIDANCE
VISUAL GUIDANCE
PONDERATION FACTOR
Good visual guidance
Poor visual guidance
2
Chart 5
240
Visual guidance provided by tunnel lighting allows an increase in the visibility of the roadway and vertical
and horizontal marking, especially the latter, installing, in turn, marking (rows of luminaires, post
mounted delineators, etc.) both on the roadway and on the tunnel walls in order to improve visual
guidance.
In this sense, when establishing ponderation factors depending on visual guidance (Chart 5), additional
installation of retroreflecting dispositives on the walls and surface of the roadway, especially for tunnels
corresponding to 5, 6 and 7 lighting classes (Chart 7), will be taken into account.
13.1.3.1.4. Ponderation factors according to driving comfort
Driving comfort of vehicles in tunnels must be taken into account for their lighting purposes, understood
as easiness and a minimum effort on the part of users, due to complete information received and lack
of complexity of the visual field.
Ponderation factors according to comfort when driving are the following:
PONDERATION FACTORS DEPENDING ON DRIVING COMFORT
DRIVING COMFORT
PONDERATION FACTOR
Low comfort needed
Intermediate comfort needed
High comfort needed
4
Chart 6
13.1.3.2. Lighting classes for long tunnels

Once ponderation factors have been established according to traffic intensity and composition (Charts 3 and 4), as
well as the corresponding factors depending on visual guidance and driving comfort (Charts 5 and 6), lighting classes
for long tunnels are defined:
LIGHTING CLASSES FOR LONG TUNNELS
PONDERATION FACTOR SUM
PONDERATION FACTOR
0-3
4-5
6-7
8-9
10-11
12-13
14-15
7
Chart 7
13.2. Lighting of long tunnels

The main photometric characteristics necessary to establish lighting quality for a tunnel are the ones listed below:
- Luminance level of the roadway.
- Luminance level of the walls, especially up to a height of 2 m.
- Luminance distribution uniformity in roadway and walls.
- Limitation of glare.
- Control of Flickers effect.
In Fig. 4, a cross- sectional representation of an intercity unidirectional long tunnel, is giving a detailed account of lengths and luminance
241
levels of the different zones. Nomenclature and a corresponding definition of such lighting engineering levels is established below:
L20 =
Luminance in access zone.
Lth
Luminance in the threshold zone.
Ltr
Luminance in the transition zone.
Ln
Luminance in the interior zone.
Lex
Luminance in the exit zone.
Entrance
Exit
Exit
Entrance
Tunnel length
L20
Lth
Luminance
Lex
Ltr
Access
zone
DS
Lin
Threshold Transition
zone
zone
Interior zone
DS
Exit zone
DS
Entrance zone
DS= Security distance

Figure 4
13.2.1. Luminance in the access zone

The access zone is the part of the road in the open air, situated immediately before the entrance or tunnel portal. It covers
the distance at which a driver approaching the tunnel must be able to see its interior. The length of the access zone is equal
to the security distance (DS), as it has been stated in Fig. 4.
The luminance value necessary at the beginning of the threshold zone must be based on the luminance value in the access
zone L20 at a separation in front of the tunnel equal to the security distance (DS). Under identical daytime light conditions,
tunnels with different approximation zones and surroundings (different relief, surroundings, etc.) will have considerably
different luminance values in the access zone L20.
In order to design and project the lighting installation in a tunnel, it is necessary to know the L20 maximum value which takes
place with enough frequency during the entire year, at a separation in front of the tunnel equal to the security distance (DS).
As in most cases, this value L20 depends on seasonal conditions and weather. Two simplified empirical methods for the
evaluation of L20 are used. Next, two methods to calculate luminance in the access zone are exposed.
Approximation method
As indicated by its name, this method only provides an approximate indication, and must only be used when there is a lack
of information enough detailed about the immediate surroundings of the entrance mounth of the tunnel. This method consists
in choosing the luminance of the access zone with the help of Chart 8 expressed in Kcd/m2 (103 cd/m2).
242
CHART A
AVERAGE LUMINANCE OF THE ACCESS ZONE L20 (Kcd/m2)
SKY PERCENTAGE (%) IN CONICAL VISUAL FIELDS AT 20
35%
ROAD TYPES
25%
10%
0%
REGULAR SNOW REGULAR SNOW REGULAR SNOW REGULAR SNOW

B
Brightness situation in the visual field

Security distance 60 m
Security distance 100 to 160 m
(1)
(1)
(4)
(4)
(1)
6
(1)
(2)
2.5 3.5
3
4.5
(3)
3
(2)
3.5 1.5
2.5
(3)
3
1.5
2.5
Being:
1) Effect fundamentally depends on tunnel orientation:
B: Low; In the north hemisphere: southern entrance.
A: High; In the north hemisphere: northern entrance.
For eastern and western entrances intermediate values between low and high must be chosen.
2) Effect fundamentally depends on brightness of surroundings:
B: Low; Low reflectances of surroundings.
A: High; High reflectances of surroundings.
3) Effect fundamentally depends on tunnel orientation:
B: Low; In the north hemisphere: northern entrance.
A: High; In the north hemisphere: southern entrance.
For eastern and western entrances intermediate values between low and high must be chosen.
4) For a stopping distance of 60 m, in practice, there are no sky percentages of 35$.
Notes: northern entrance means the entrance for drivers circulating southwards. southern entrance refers to the entrance for drivers
circulating northwards.
Chart 8
Exact method
Luminance of the access zone L20 is the average luminance contained in a conical field of vision represented by an angle of
20%, with its vertex in the position of the drivers eye. It is located at a distance before the tunnel equal to the stopping
distance, and the cone oriented towards the tunnel portal on a point situated at a height of 1/4 of the tunnel mouth.
Determining luminance for the access zone L20 is extremely relevant since it predetermines the level to be obtained by means
of lighting in the threshold zone. Such luminance of the access zone depends on the atmospheric conditions of the place
where the tunnel is located. The calculation of the luminance of the access zone L20 is obtained from a sketch of the
surroundings of the tunnel zone. The formula below is used:
L20 = a * Lc + b * LR + c * LE + d * Lth
where:
a
% of the sky.
Lc =
Sky luminance.
b =
% of the road.
LR
c
LE
Road luminance.
% of the surroundings.
Surrounding luminance.
d =
% tunnel entrance.
Lth =
Threshold zone luminance.
with:
a+b+c+d=1
The unknown factor to be determined in the formula is the value of the luminance in the threshold zone (Lth). When stopping
distances higher than 100 m. are faced, the mouth entrance percentage of tunnels is low (< at 10%) and since Lth also has
243
a low value with respect to other luminance values, the contribution of Lth may be disregarded.
For a stopping distance of 60 m., the norm establishes that:
L20 = (a * Lc + b * LR + c * LE) / (1 / K)
Because K never exceeds 0.1, the result is:
L20 = a * Lc + b * LR + c * LE
being a + b + c < 1.
If the data to know exactly the value for a, b, c and d are not available, the ones defined in the following charts will be used.
If surrounding values are not available, the following are used:
Driving
Sky
direction
(Lc)
Kcd/m
Road
Surroundings
(LR)
2
Kcd/m2
(LE)
Kcd/m
Rocks
Edifices
Snow
Grass
15 (M, H)
E-O
12
10 (M)
15 (H)
S
16
5 (M)
15 (H)
Chart 9
In this chart, the value for L is known. In order to define the percentage of the sky which contributes to the value L20 in the
installation under study, Fig. 5 is used.
244
Security distance 160 m. Sky 35%

Figure 5
13.2.2. Luminance in the entrance zone

As Fig. 4 shows, tunnel entrance consists of two consecutive stretches: the threshold zone, which is the nearest to the
245
tunnel mouth and the transition zone.

13.2.2.1. Lighting levels for threshold zone
The threshold zone is the first part of the tunnel located directly after the portal, thus, beginning at its entrance. The
luminance level Lth (average luminance in service of the roadway surface with maintenance of the installation), which
must be provided by lighting during the day at the beginning of the threshold zone, is a percentage of the luminance
of the access zone L20; thus, it is verified:
Lth = k L20
Factor k is established in Chart 10 taking into account the lighting system adopted (counterflux or symmetrical),
security distance (DS) and lighting class defined in Chart 7, depending on ponderation factors (traffic intensity and
composition, visual guidance and vehicle driving comfort).
VALUES FOR k 103 FOR THE THRESHOLD ZONE

LIGHTING
SYSTEM
Lighting
COUNTERFLUX
SYMMETRIC
Security distance (DS)
Security distance (DS)
class
60 m
10
15
15
20
20
30
45
25
35
50
30
40
35
40
100 m
160 m
60 m
100 m
160 m
30
15
20
35
40
20
25
40
25
35
45
30
40
50
55
35
50
65
45
60
40
55
80
50
70
50
60
100
Notes: For security or stopping distances (DS) ranging between (60-100 and 160 m), values for factor (k) are obtained by linear interpolation between the
figures established in the chart. Values for factor (k) for the lighting system at counterflux have been determined to guarantee, in most situations, a degree
of security and comfort, at least, comparable to that achieved with the symmetric lighting system.
Security or stopping distances for 60, 100 and 160 m are respectively equivalent to design speeds of the tunnel of 60, 80 and 100 km/h.
Chart 10
13.2.2.2. Threshold zone length
Length of the threshold zone must be, at least, equal to the security distance (DS). For the first half of such distance
(DS), luminance on the roadway will be equal to Lth, that is to say, the value at the beginning of the threshold zone.
Half of the security distance (DS) onwards, luminance of the roadway may gradually and linearly decrease down to
a value, at the end of the threshold zone, equal to 0.4 Lth (Fig. 6). The gradual reduction in the second half of the
threshold zone may take place in a staged way, so that ratio between stages does not exceed the ratio 3:1 and
luminance does not go under those values corresponding to linear gradual decrease.
13.2.2.3. Luminance of walls
Wall average luminance in the threshold zone, up to a height of 2 m., must be similar to average luminance of the
roadway surface.
13.2.2.4. Luminance and length of the transition zone
The transition zone is that part of the tunnel following the threshold zone, as indicated in Fig. 4. Therefore, it begins
at the end of the threshold zone and finishes at the beginning of the interior zone.
246
SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION OF THE LIGHTING LEVEL OF

DIFFERENT ZONES
0.5 DS
L%
100
80
60
Lth
Ltr = Lth(1.9 + t)-1-428
Ltr = Lth(1.9 + t)-1-428
with Lth = 100% and t = time in seconds
40
20
10
8
6
4
2
t. sec.
Threshold zone
Security distance
(DS)
10
12
Transition zone
14
16
18
20
60 Km./h
100 m.
200 m.
300 m.
80 Km./h
100 m.
200 m.
300 m.
400 m.
100 Km./h
100 m.
200 m.
300 m.
400 m.
500 m.
120 Km./h
100 m.
200 m.
300 m.
400 m.
500 m.
600 m.
Minimum luminance in entrance zone. The 100% value corresponds

to the first half of the threshold zone
Figure 6
According to Fig. 6, the length of the transition zone is the distance a vehicle must travel to go from the level of
luminance at the end of the threshold zone, up to the luminance value at the beginning of the interior zone, visual
adaptation supposed. Consequently, for each speed of the vehicle, the allowed reduction of luminance in the
transition zone Ltr, depends on the distance travelled in the mentioned zone.
Average luminance in service of the roadway with maintenance of the installation of the transition zone Ltr decreases
gradually, from the luminance of the threshold zone down to the luminance of the interior zone. In any position in
the transition zone, luminance of the roadway surface must be equal or exceed luminance established in Fig. 6.
The curve of Fig. 6 is the result of numerous experimental tests depending on eye adaptation, from high luminance
levels to very low values which have given rise to a mathematical approximation corresponding to the following
formula:
Ltr = Lth (1.9 + t)-1.428
being: t = time in seconds.
In practice, a decrease in the luminance in the transition zone may take place through a series of stages which must
be lower than the ratio 3:1. Luminance cannot reach values lower than those of the curve in Fig. 6. The end of the
transition zone is reached when its luminance is equal to three times the level of the interior zone of the tunnel.
It is compulsory that wall average luminance of the tunnel up to a 2 m. height, in any specific position of the transition
zone, must not be lower than average luminance of the roadway in such a place.
13.2.3. Lighting of the interior zone

The interior zone is that part of the tunnel following the transition zone directly. Its length is given by the distance existing
between the end of the transition zone and the beginning of the exit zone. Luminance levels Lin of the interior zone of the
tunnel, constant along such a zone, since eye adaptation is finished from the high luminous values in the exterior, are
247
established in Chart 11 depending on the security distance (DS) and the lighting class defined in Chart 7.
Up to a height of 2 m., the walls of the tunnel must have an average luminance similar to the roadway average luminance in
service with maintenance of the installation Lin.
The luminance level in the interior zone of the tunnel must allow to reach the following objectives:
- Visibility of any eventual obstacle on the roadway at a distance, at least, equal to the security distance, bearing in
mind opacity of the atmosphere of the tunnel due to vehicle toxic fumes.
- Guidance of vehicles without ambiguities.
- Good quality of the luminous environment, whose psychological effect above all is important in very long tunnels.
It must be stated that levels of the interior zone are achieved in all the length of the tunnel. Also, in the so- called lighting
reinforcement zones (entrance zone and, exit ones, too), where this lighting is called basic lighting.
LUMINANCES IN cd/m2 IN THE INTERIOR ZONE

LIGHTING
SECURITY DISTANCE (DS)
SYSTEM
60 m
100 m
0.5
1,5
2,5
2,5
2,5
3,5
3,5
10
160 m
Chart 11
13.2.4. Lighting of the exit zone

The exit zone is the part of the tunnel in which, during the day, the drivers vision is predominantly influenced by the exterior
high luminance of the tunnel. The exit zone begins at the end of the interior zone and finishes at the mouth of the tunnel exit.
In the exit zone of the tunnel a luminance level Lex on the roadway must be established to illuminate vehicles directly. This
must be done in such a way that the smallest are visible in the exit zone of the tunnel, given that, they would remain hidden
behind big vehicles without lighting reinforcement above the levels of the interior zone Lin. The reason being glare originated
by daytime light of the tunnel exit.
Likewise, such roadway average luminance in service with maintenance of the installation Lex of the exit zone of the tunnel
allows drivers of vehicles leaving the tunnel to have enough vision through rear- view mirrors of the rear part of the vehicle.
This happens particularly when the distance between vehicles is short (high intensity of traffic).
All this, even bearing in mind that to go from a weak interior luminance Lin from a high luminance in the exterior of the tunnel,
the adaptation of the drivers eye is very fast. In general, this does not constitute a problem for the user.
However, in long unidirectional tunnels whose lighting class is 6 and 7, according to Chart 7, luminance in the exit zone Lex
must increase linearly along a length, at least, equal to the security distance (DS) from the luminance of the interior zone, to
a level 5 times higher than that of the interior zone (Lex = 5 Lin) at a distance of 20 m. This must happen before reaching
the entrance or portal of the exit of the tunnel. The linear increase of the luminance may be done in stages, in such a way
that the ratio between stages does not exceed the ratio 3:1 in one length, at least, equal to the security distance (DS).
In cases of unidirectional tunnels whose lighting classes are 1 to 5 both included, the exit zone will have the same luminance
than the interior zone of the tunnel (Lex = Lin). Additional lighting to the one foreseen for the interior zone is not required.
Nevertheless, independently from the lighting class which corresponds to the tunnel, in certain particular cases of unidirectional
tunnels, there are serious risks of discomfort and glare at the exit. This is due to tunnel orientation, for example, or to
inconveniences produced at sunrise and sunset, thus, lighting of the tunnel exit zone must be reinforced in the conditions
248
established for lighting classes 6 and 7.
13.2.5. Uniformity of the roadway luminance

In tunnels, the roadway and walls behave as limits or visual guides for motor traffic. Thus, a good uniformity must be achieved
on the roadway and walls of tunnels up to a height of 2 m.
In chart 12, minimum values are established in service with maintenance of the installation of luminance overall and
longitudinal uniformity on tunnel roadways, in all zones. That is to say, in their total length and complete width of the roadway,
depending on their lighting class.
LUMINANCE UNIFORMITIES ON THE ROADWAY SURFACE

LIGHTING
UNIFORMITY
CLASS
Overall U0
Longitudinal U1
1-2-3
0.3
0.5
4-5-6-7
0.4
0.6
Chart 12
13.2.6. Glare limitation

Given that glare reduces visibility, it is very important to minimize it in tunnel lighting. Disturbing glare, defined as the increase
of the contrast threshold (T) necessary to see an obstacle when there is glare, is specified by the following expressions:
TI = 65
TI = 95
LV
(Lm) 0.8
LV
(Lm) 1.05
in % for 0.05 [ Lm [ 5
cd/m2
in % for Lm > 5
cd/m2
where:
TI = Threshold increase corresponding to disturbing glare.
Lv = Total veiling luminance in cd/m2.
Lm = Average luminance on the roadway in cd/m2.
The threshold increase (TI) must be lower than 15% for threshold, transition and interior zones during the day, and for all
zones during the night. For the exit zone during the day, there is no limit in the disturbing glare.
13.2.7. Control of Flickers effect

The feeling of flickering or Flickers effect is the bothering and uncomfortable feeling caused by periodical variations of the
luminance in the field of vision. Such feelings are experimented when a vehicle is driven through luminance spatial periodical
changes, like the ones produced by luminaires installed in walls or ceilings of tunnels when there exists an inadequate
separation between them, with a high speed of change in the distribution of luminous intensity.
Visual discomfort experimented by the driver due to flickering or Flickers effect depends fundamentally on the following
factors:
- Number of changes of the luminance per second (flickering frequency or Flicker).
- Total duration of Flickers effect.
- Speed of change from light to dark, in a single cycle.
- Ratio of peak- light to valley- darkness, within each period (luminance modelling depth).
Influence of the three first points depends on the speed of the vehicle and the separation between luminaires; the last point
depends on the photometric characteristics, (luminous intensity distribution) and interdistance between luminaires, too.
When the distance between the extremes of adjacent luminaires is lower than the length of a single luminaire, the third point
249
related to speed of change from light to dark is minimized, the flickering or Flickers effect perceived becomes insignificant,
due to the fact that the lighting installation may be similar to a continuous line.
In order to calculate the flickering frequency or Flicker in a zone of the tunnel, speed of traffic is divided in metres/ second by
the separation between luminaires in metres.
Example:
v = 60 Km/h. = 16.6 m/s.
Luminaire separation = 4 m.
Flickering frequency or Flicker = 16.6 / 4 4.2 Hz.
Flickering frequencies or Flicker (luminance variation) ranging between 2.5 Hz. and 15 Hz. at driving speed for more than 20
seconds must be avoided, given the fact that the flickering effect may be disregarded for frequencies under 2.5 Hz. and above
15 Hz.
13.2.8. Night- time lighting

If the tunnel is on an illuminated stretch of road, night- time lighting of the tunnel must be, at least, equal to that of the access
road. It is recommended to have 1.5 to 2 times the values of the exterior stretch, as far as luminance level of the roadway
surface is concerned. Luminance uniformities at night must satisfy the same exigencies than in the case of daytime lighting,
thus, following minimum values established in Chart 12. All this will be equally applied to tunnels of 100 m. in length which
are not illuminated during the day.
In the case of tunnels located on a stretch of the road that is not illuminated, besides installing lighting in the tunnel according
to what has been established in the previous paragraph, the rear way of the tunnel exit must be illuminated in a length equal
to 2 times security distance (DS), at least in a 200 m. distance, with an average luminance higher than 1/3 of the roadway
luminance in the exit zone of the tunnel.
Night- time lighting will be equal to the one in the zone of the interior of the tunnel for stretches with paralumens or screens
for daytime light in the entrance zone and/ or exit of the tunnel. Supposing that an invigilance system for motor traffic is
installed and works through television cameras because of security reasons, the minimum night- time level will be of 1 cd/m2.
For general night- time lighting of all zones of the tunnel, the minimum value in service with maintenance of the installation
of the roadway average luminance will be established in Chart 13.
LUMINANCES OF NIGHT TIME LIGHTING IN cd/m2

LIGHTING CLASS
AVERAGE LUMINANCE CD/M2
1-2
0.5
3-4-5-6-7
1
Chart 13
250
13.3. Lighting of short tunnels and underpasses

Short tunnels and underpasses present the dilemma of providing them with daytime lighting or not. Once the dilemma has been
solved in favour of requiring such an installation, the type of daytime lighting to be installed must be decided either limited, completed
or with the same characteristics than that of long tunnels.
The critical factor for establishing daytime lighting is determined by the certainty or not that drivers of vehicles approaching the tunnel
at a distance equal to the security distance (DS), see vehicles and, also, pedestrians crossing it.
Likewise, the need of artificial daytime lighting is related to the extent to which the short tunnel exit or underpass is visible for a driver
located in front of the entrance, at the security distance (DS). That is to say, vision through the tunnel depends on the following factors:
- Tunnel length.
- Existence of curves in the interior.
- Presence of slopes or ramps in the tunnel.
Figure 7. View of a short tunnel with a frame or dark background.

Short tunnels and underpasses shorter than 25 metres in length, normally do not require installation of daytime lighting. When the
short tunnel length is slightly higher than 25 metres, the dark background formed by the walls and ceiling of the tunnel, as well as by
the roadway itself, may hamper the vision of vehicles and, in turn, of pedestrians crossing it (see Fig. 7), difficulting perception. In this
case daytime lighting must be installed in the tunnel or underpass.
13.3.1. Guiding diagrams for short tunnels

With the aim of providing a guide that will allow to make decisions of installing daytime lighting or not in short tunnels and
underpasses, as well as opting for the type of daytime lighting to be installed, a classification of four types of short tunnels
must be established. A guiding diagram is explained for each one.
Short tunnels A type Chart 14.
Tunneles located in urban surroundings or by- passes on traffic roads (motorways and dual carriageways excluded), frequently
provided with public lighting and whose driving speed is limited between 40 and 60 Km/h.
251
Length (m)
< 25
Visible exit?
Lighting
required
25 to 75
75 to 125
YES
NO
Daytime lighting
is not required
YES
> 125
NO
Limited
daytime lighting
Long tunnel
lighting
Daytime lighting for A type tunnels, short or urban tunnels or by- passes (highways and dual carriageways excluded), with limited
circulating speed between 40 and 60 km/h.
Chart 14
Short tunnels B type Chart 15.
Bidirectional intercity tunnels, considering a dense amount of traffic when daily average intensity of vehicles is higher than 5
000 (IMD > 5 000).
Length (m)
0 to 80
Visible exit?
Speed 80 Km/h
YES
NO
YES
NO
Traffic density
Light Dense
Light Dense
Lighting
required
81 to 120
121 to 150
YES
NO
Day-time lighting is not required
YES
> 150
NO
Limited day-time Complete day-time lighting Long tunnel lighting

lighting
Day-time lighting for type B short, urban, bidirectional tunnels (dense traffic when IMD > 5 000).
Chart 15
Short tunnels C type Chart 16.
One- way intercity tunnels (motorways and dual carriageways), estimating a dense amount of traffic when daily average
intensity of vehicles is higher than 10 000 (IMD > 10 000).
Length (m)
0 to 100
Visible exit?
Speed 80 Km/h
YES
NO
Light Dense
Traffic volume
Lighting required
100 to 150
151 to 200
YES
NO
Day- time lighting is not required
YES
YES
NO
Light Dense
Limited daytime

lighting
> 200
NO
Complete daytime

lighting
Long tunnel lighting
Day-time lighting for type C short urban unidirectional tunnels for highways and motorways (dense traffic when IMD > 10 000).
Chart 16
Short tunnels D type Chart 17.
Intercity tunnels with low speed traffic (speed limit considerably lower than 80 Km/h.), and a traffic density notably lower than
a daily average intensity of 5 000 vehicles (IMD < 5 000).
Length (m)
0 to 100
Visible exit?
Lighting
required
101 to 150
YES
151 to 200
NO
Day- time lighting

is not required
YES
Limited
daytime lighting
> 200
NO
Complete
daytime
lighting
Long
tunnel
lighting
Day- time lighting for type D tunnels, intercity, short with low speed traffic (lower than 80 Km/h) and traffic density lower than
5 000 vehicles in a day (IMD < 5 000).
Chart 17
252
For each type of short tunnel in guiding diagrams and in their left part, the following four questions are posed: length, exit
visibility, speed and traffic density.
- Length (m): Four sorts of length are established for each guiding diagram for short tunnels or underpasses,
expressed in metres.
- Visible exit?: In each guiding diagram it is considered, whether the exit of the tunnel or underpass is visible or not
when the driver of the vehicle approaches the tunnel and finds himself, at least, at a distance equal to that of
security distance (DS) before the tunnel entrance.
- Speed [80 Km/h: In guiding diagrams 2 and 3, corresponding to tunnels of the B and C type, the speed of the
tunnel or underpass design is thought to be higher or lower than 80 Km/h. The design speed is very important in
relation to security distance (DS), as well as regarding risk of accidents and their severity.
- Traffic density: In guiding diagrams 2 and 3, it is born in mind and it may be classified as light and dense.
In diagram 2 corresponding to short tunnels of the B type (two- way intercity), a dense amount of traffic is valued when daily
average intensity of vehicles is higher than 5 000 (IMD > 5 000).
In diagram 3, which makes reference to short tunnels of the C type (one- way intercity of motorways and dual carriageways),
a dense amount of traffic is estimated when daily average intensity of vehicles in higher than 10 000 (IMD > 10 000).
Four diagrams are established constituting a guide of an orientative nature. They also provide help to decide whether the short
tunnel or underpass needs daytime lighting or not. If necessary, the type of lighting to be adopted is also detailed.
For example, the case of a short tunnel of 120 metres in length, located on an intercity road with slow moving traffic (v < 60
Km/h.) and a daily average intensity of IMD < 3 000. It is necessary to decide whether daytime lighting must be provided
and, in case it is required, to determine the type of lighting to be installed. The working system is the one described below:
Following guiding diagram n. 4, the tunnel is located within the corresponding interval of lengths. That is to say, between 101
and 150 metres.
The second question, visible exit?, is answered. For an affirmative answer, daytime lighting is not required according to
diagram 4. For a negative answer, due to the existence of curves or slopes in the interior of the tunnel, limited daytime lighting
is installed.
Supposing the same short tunnel but with a length of 170 metres, according to diagram 4, the only two alternatives are, in
case the tunnel exit is not visible, the installation of limited daytime or complete daytime lighting respectively.
Diagrams constitute a practical guide that, for each concrete situation, will be adapted to the type of road bearing in mind:
- The real structure of the tunnel, its access and exit roads.
- Traffic density and composition, either motorized or mixed, including slow and fast moving vehicles, bicyclists,
pedestrians, etc.
Guiding diagrams may be considered to be orientative for the design, working and maintenance of short tunnels and
underpasses lighting. The following technical and economic considerations will be taken into account:
- Performance of a detailed analysis of the risk of accidents and security in relation to lighting (quality and quantity).
- Study of convenient marking at the entrance of the tunnel, especially regarding the limit speed, turn- on of vehicle
headlights, etc.
- Performance a meticulous exam of installation costs and annual exploitation of lighting, including working,
maintenance and repairing costs in relation to security and comfort provided by such an installation (costs/ benefits
binomial).
253
13.3.2. Lighting types in short tunnels

As it has been established in the four guiding diagrams, besides night- time lighting, situations that may be present for daytime lighting in short tunnels are the following:
- Lighting not required.
- Limited daytime lighting.
- Complete daytime lighting.
13.3.2.1. Day- time lighting not required
When lighting for short tunnels is not important and, thus, daytime lighting is not required.
13.3.2.2. Limited daytime lighting
It is so called, since it is only working during some part of the time. That is to say, daytime lighting is only working
during periods in which daytime sunlight does not provide a high enough luminance background to allow the
silhouette effect to take place. Such conditions may occur after dusk, before dawn and in cloudy days.
For limited daytime lighting, average luminance in servicie of the roadway with maintenance of the installation will
be three times the luminance of the interior zone of the tunnel (3.Lin), according to the limits established in Chart
11, or 15 cd/m2. The highest figure of the two must be adopted.
In the morning, limited daytime lighting must be turned on half an hour after sunrise and turned off when luminance
in the access zone L20 exceeds 150 cd/m2 (L20 > 150 cd/m2). In the evening, it will be turned on when luminance
of the access zone L20 goes under 150 cd/m2 (L20 < 150 cd/m2) and turn off will be done half an hour before
sunset.
13.3.2.3. Complete daytime lighting
Complete daytime lighting is working during the total period of daytime. Basically, short tunnels similar to long
tunnels must be illuminated like the latter. Consequently, complete daytime lighting will be maintained along all the
length of the tunnel. Levels of luminance required in the threshold zone of long tunnels will be taken away from
factor k established in Chart 10, according to their corresponding lighting class (Chart 7).
13.3.2.4. Night- time lighting
For short tunnels or underpasses longer than 25 m., in which approximation roads are illuminated, installation of
night- time lighting is required. The level of average luminance in service of the roadway with maintenance of the
installation will be, at least equal, but not higher than two times the luminance of the approximation road.
13.4. Emergency lighting

Regarding this type of lighting, the norm establishes that when a tunnel suffers from a failure of power supply, an emergency power
supply system and an emergency lighting system must be at hand.
Emergency lighting must cover the total length of the tunnel and the level of luminance must be, at least, less than 10% of the interior
luminance or 0.2 cd/m2 (the highest is chosen).
In tunnels of the 3 7 lighting class, a lighting system for fire- prevention emergency guidance is required (whenever at least one exit
is not visible from any position).
The positioning of these luminaires will be on a wall at a height of 0.50 m of the roadway and with a separation lower than 50 m.
254
13.5. Maintenance
The maintenance factor used in lighting studies normally covers luminaire depreciation (dirtiness) and lamp (loss of luminous flux).
In the case of tunnels which are installations with a high degree of atmospheric pollution, it is very important to have a maintenance
program (cleaning of walls and luminaires) defining the cleaning cycles which will allow to comply with the factor established in the
study.
The norm recommends to use a maintenance factor of 0.7 to define the value of the average level of the luminance of the roadway
and 0.5 for the walls.
Relamping will be performed when the average level is under the one established or the lack of uniformity is unacceptable.
13.6. Ignition control

It is very important to have an automatically controlled system in this kind of installations, taking into account that levels of the threshold
and transition zones are established according to the luminance of the access zone.
When exterior conditions vary (daytime ones), it is necessary to modify levels of these zones to maintain the quality of the design
criteria used in the study of lighting.
13.7. Night- time lighting (exterior zone of the tunnel)

For the exit zone of the tunnel, the exterior roadway must be illuminated in a length equal to two times the stopping distance (not
higher than 200 m.), with an average level higher than 1/3 of the tunnel exit zone. In the tunnel under study, for design to be a bit
more conservative, tunnel access zones will extend from 200 to 250 m.
In the access zone, luminaires of the example under study with a 250W high pressure sodium lamp, in 12 m. high posts in a onesided disposition at an interdistance between luminaires of 30 m. must be installed.
When there are sunscreens in the entrance or exit zones of the tunnel, the lighting level will be equal to the one in the interior zone
of the tunnel.
13.8. Tunnel lighting design

Regarding guiding charts for short tunnels specified in section 13.3. of the present chapter, they constitute only a guide that must be
adapted to the concrete type of tunnel and access and exit roads.
Underpasses under roads or railways shorter than 25 m. in length, constitute the minimum stretches of covered road that are habitually
present. Given the short length, the installation of lighting during the day is not normally necessary. In order to ease entrance of daytime sunlight in the interior of the short tunnel or underpass, it is convenient to perform the following measures when possible:
- Build a higher mouth of the tunnel.
- Cover the tunnel walls of white color (specular covering).
- Install skylights on the tunnel ceiling.
255
SHORT TUNNELS
TYPES OF
TYPE A
TYPE B
TYPE C
TYPE D
TUNNELS
DIAGRAM-1
DIAGRAM-2
DIAGRAM-3
DIAGRAM-4
< 25
25 to 75
75 to 125
> 125
< 80
80 to 120
120 to 150
> 150
< 100
100 to 150
150 to 200
> 200
<
100
100 to 150
150 to 200
> 200
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
Length
Visible exit?
NO
Speed
< 80 km/h
Traffic density
NO
NO
LIGHT
LIGHT
DENSE
DENSE
* In type B tunnels, traffic density is high when IMD > 5 000.

** In type C tunnels, traffic density is high when IMD > 10 000.
Chart 18
If lighting is foreseen on the road, this will be installed in such a way that an adequate penetration of lighting inside the short tunnel
or underpass is guaranteed.
The content of guiding diagrams for short tunnels and underpasses detailed in section 13.3. are summarized in the previous chart.
A high reflectance of walls is important to increase brightness of the background against which objects may be seen. In short tunnels,
where the exit is not visible from the security distance (DS) in front of the tunnel entrance, reflectance of walls is particularly important.
The reason is that reflectance of high walls will secure that a great amount of daytime lighting, entering through the exit mouth, is
reflected towards drivers. Walls with a diffused reflectance in service higher than 40% are known as HIGH, and walls with less than
40% of reflectance, are called LOW (the depreciation or maintenance factor must be considered).
In any tunnel, walls must have a white covering of up to 2 m. in height, with a flat surface and a high specular reflectance in service
or maintained. The low part down to 0.50 m. and lateral sidewalks may be blackened or painted black, basically when the roadway
covering is light or white, due to vehicle driving needs with a good maintained contrast, in order to improve total perception. When
reflectance of the walls is classified as LOW, length signalled in each of the four guiding diagrams must be reduced in a 20%.
The degree of daytime light entering the exit is also important. Thus, a tunnel with a big transverse section, for example, of three lanes
or wider, and a flat exit or with a downward slope and facing south, will admit a maximum of daytime light and will contribute
considerably to visibility in the tunnel. Moreover, daytime light may be poor when the tunnel has two or fewer lanes, in case the exit
is located in a cut or is surrounded by high buildings. Also when the road has an upward slope from the exit or in case the exit faces
north. The importance of day-time light near the exit decreases with the length of the tunnel. When daytime light is GOOD, the length
indicated for each of the four guiding diagrams must be increased up to a 20%.
As far as tunnel geometry and access roads are concerned, lighting design of the tunnel must follow the most conservative route for
each guiding diagram. The same attitude must be considered when:
- The tunnel has a slope first and a ramp later (changes in vertical curvature).
- There are geometrical discontinuities or singularities.
In case the tunnel presents a bad total perception, lighting design must follow a conservative path for each of the four guiding diagrams.
A specific analysis is needed when transportation of dangerous cargo is frequent. In this case, lighting design in the tunnel must be
performed following the most conservative path for each of the guiding diagrams.
256
13.9. Visual guidance

When driving in the interior of a tunnel, a vehicles driver must have adequate information. This may be achieved dividing the
longitudinal surface of the tunnel into several contrast surfaces, like for example, leaving light tunnel walls and dark celings. Visual
guidance is extremely important when the user is driving the vehicle and he approaches the tunnel, particularly, if the luminous level
of the entrance zone is low. In Chart 4 ponderation factors have been established for a poor or good visual guidance.
13.9.1. Visual guidance for long tunnels

In tunnels with lighting classes 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 (Chart 7), independently from vertical marking, horizontal marking must be
carefully attended.
In the evaluation of ponderation factors according to visual guidance (Chart 5), installation of additional retro reflective
dispositives will be considered (beaconing, rows of luminaires, post mounted delineators, etc.) on the tunnel walls as well as
on the roadway surface, especially in the case of tunnels corresponding to lighting classes 5, 6 and 7 (Chart 7).
13.9.1.1. Visual guidance in the entrance zone for tunnels. Lighting class 1
In the entrance zone of tunnels with a lighting class 1 (Chart 7), in the first 75 m., at least five luminaires must be
installed whose luminous intensities towards the driver will be adjusted to what has been established in Chart 19. It
may be necessary to tilt luminaires, in order to achieve the luminous intensities specified in Chart 19.
CHART I
LUMINOUS INTENSITIES IN TUNNEL ENTRANCE ZONE
LIGHTING CLASS 1
ANGLE
TIME
80 < < 87.5

INTENSITY (cd)
= 87.5
INTENSITY (cd)
MIN.
MAX.
MIN.
MAX.
During the day
300
800
400
During the night
50
25
Chart 19
In order to secure an adequate visual guidance, the separation between luminaires will not be higher than 25 m. In
curved tunnels, at least four luminaires will be visible. Regarding separation between luminaires this could be
reduced.
13.9.1.2. Visual guidance in the interior zone for tunnels. Lighting class 1
In the interior zone of tunnels, lighting class 1 (Chart 19), the luminaires installed will have luminous intensities
towards the driver that will comply with what has been established in Chart 20.
257
CHART II
LUMINOUS INTENSITIES IN TUNNEL INTERIORS
LIGHTING CLASS 1
ANGLE
TIME
Day and night
80 < < 87.5
= 87.5
INTENSITY (cd)
INTENSITY (cd)
MIN.
MAX.
MIN.
MAX.
50
25
Chart 20
13.9.2. Visual guidance for short tunnels

Short tunnels or underpasses which lack a lighting installation, require a good marking, both vertical and horizontal. The
following dispositions may be used for visual guidance:
- Retroreflective marking on the roadway.
- Retroreflective beaconing system (rows of luminaires, post mounted delineators, etc.) on the roadway.
- Retroreflective marking and beaconing on the walls.
- Light- emitter diodes.
258
Chapter14.
LIGHT POLLUTION
14.1 General remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

14.2 Lighting and security levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
14.3 Contrast vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
14.4 Zoning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
14.5 Lamp selection criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
14.6 Upper hemisphere flux limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
14.7 Other characteristics of luminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
14.8 Distances between zones and point of reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
14.9 Pavement photometric characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
14.10 Lighting level temporal variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
14.11 Recommendations to reduce lighting pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
14.12 Appendix: Recommendable orientative values to limit disturbing light
coming from exterior lighting installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
259
260
Chapter 14. LIGHT POLLUTION

Since the beginning of history, humankind has always worried about the origin and destiny of our planet, as well as about the existence
of life on the Earth. The study of the firmament has always been linked to this worry. From the beginnings of the 20th century and for
the first time in our History, night- time vision of our firmament is under attack, without our realizing about it, because of the anarchic
lighting of urban settlements. Light pollution in the sky of our villages and cities is preventing us from contemplating one of the most
beautiful wonders. The sky has been and still is a source of inspiration for humankind. However, its contemplation is more and more
difficult; even for young generations, it is beginning to belong to the unknown.
Due to this reason, the "Comit Espaol de Iluminacin" (the Spanish Commission on Illumination), has developed a Guide for the
Reduction of Night- time Luminous Glow. It is a kind of technical report we pretend to outline below.
Light pollution is defined as night- time luminous brightness or glow in the sky, produced by the diffusion and reflection of artificial
light in gases and particles suspended in the atmosphere. Such glow, generally produced partly by sources of light installed in external
areas, make brightness of the natural sky background to increase, progressively reducing the value of observation magnitude of
astronomical objects and making observation more difficult.
We must distinguish natural brightness, attributable to the radiation of the celestial sources or objects and to the luminescence of the
atmosphere upper layers, from luminous glow due to artificial sources of light installed in external areas. In the latter case, upwards
direct emissions of several sources of artificial light, as well as radiation reflected by surfaces illuminated by such sources of light must
be considered.
In order to reduce light pollution imputable to artificial sources of light action must be taken. On the one hand, on devices or luminaires
themselves which emit light and. On the other hand, on lighting installation implementing only the minimum number of aiming points
which will allow to reach the required lighting levels without overcoming them. This action will also mean that, as far as road lighting
is concerned, certain recommendations on the type of pavements to be used on roadways must be established.
Likewise, temporal variation or diminution of lighting levels at certain hours at night must be considered, (during these periods of time,
traffic intensity decreases substantially), provided users security is guaranteed on such roads.
Moreover, lamp selection criteria must be carefully considered, specially in the immediacy of astronomical observatories of international
category or "E 1" zone, where the installation of only high pressure and low pressure sodium lamps is recommended. Low pressure
sodium lamps should be preferably installed, since they do not emit within the ultraviolet area (far reaching waves with great energy),
there are no interferences with telemetric and spectrographic equipment of astronomical observatories.
Also, other alternatives directed to lessening light pollution or luminous glow in the sky must be considered, in relation to advertising
and amenity lighting.
It must also be pinpointed that light pollution or brightness attributable to sources of artificial light, does not exclusively come from the
design or lighting installation layout. but It is dependant, too, on atmospheric conditions (humidity, clouds, fog, aerosols, atmospheric
pollution, etc.).
In sum, light pollution is determined by two main factors, namely:
- Emission of light coming from luminaires for public lighting, either by direct emission (light not controlled in the luminaire upper
hemisphere) or by indirect emission (reflection of light on walls, roadways or surfaces to be illuminated).
- Sources of light used for external lighting, since their different emission spectra may be more or less dangerous.
14.2. Lighting and security levels

Within the European Union, there is a considerable amount of traffic circulating at night, with an average of about 25%. Likewise, the
ratio of night-time fatal accidents ranges between 25% and 59%, with an average of approximately 48.5%. In Spain, night- time motor
traffic is about 24.3%, and the number of casualties due to night- time accidents amounts to 43%.
The main reason for such high rates in night- time accidents is darkness itself, since drivers visual capacities (acuity and visual field,
distance judging, contrast vision, chromatic perception and glare tolerance) are negatively altered due to null or no-existent luminous
levels. Consequently, visibility is exceedingly reduced during night- time.
According to some studies conducted by the C.I.E., it has been proved that lighting of road traffic reduces the total number of accidents
in about 30% during the night.
261
Visual task and pedestrians needs differ from drivers in many aspects. The speed of movement is lower, and the perception of objects
surrounding pedestrians is more important than seeing objects that are further away. Therefore, quality criteria of pedestrian lighting
cannot be equal to those of road traffic. In urban areas, perception of their immediate environment is more important for pedestrians,
in order to avoid any type of crime (thefts, vandalism, sexual harassment, terrorist acts, etc.).
The decision whether lighting for a public road in a certain area or place must be provided or not must be taken based on a detailed
study. Once the decision to service a lighting installation has been made, design criteria and lighting levels will be adjusted, avoiding
exceeding the criteria established in the following C.I.E. publications:
- Publication C.I.E. 47: 1979
Road Lighting for Wet Conditions.
Road Pavement and Lighting.
Guide to the Lighting of Urban Areas.
Recommendations for the Lighting of Roads for Motor and Pedestrian Traffic.
Guidelines for Minimizing Sky Glow.
Nevertheless, lighting levels established in the publications above may be exceeded up to a 20%, except for cases correctly justified
in which it would be possible to exceed such percentage.
As far as those elements which constitute the installation, LIGHTING ENGINEERING calculations, measurements, maintenance, etc.
whatever is established in the following C.I.E. publications will be observed:
- Publication C.I.E. 30.2: 1982
Calculation and Measurement of Luminance and Illuminance in Road Lighting.
Glare and Uniformity in Road Lighting Conditions.
- Publication C.I.E. 32/AB: 1977
Lighting in Situations Requiring Special Treatment (in Road Lighting).
Depreciation of Installations and their Maintenance.
Road Lighting Lantern and Installation Data.Photometrics, Classification and Performance.
The Photometry and Goniophotometry of Luminaires
14.3. Contrast vision

Visibility of an object located on a background, depends on luminance differences between an object and its background. For a light
coloured object over a dark background, its contrast will be positive (values between 0 and infinitum). However, an object darker than
its background will be seen as a silhouette and its contrast will be negative, varying between 0 and (1).
By definition, contrast is expressed as shown below:
C=
L0 Lf
Lf
Being:
L0= Object luminance.
Lf= Background luminance.
Contrast C may be either positive or negative:
If L0 >Lf
C > 0 positive contrast (the object is lighter than its background).
If L0 <Lf
C < 0 negative contrast (the object is darker than its background).
Contrast C may acquire the following values:

Positive contrast (light object)
Negative contrast (dark object)
0<C<
-1 < C < 0
Light pollution or night- time luminous glare in the sky produces a veil in the observation field which has its own luminance L v. At the
same time, this luminance is added to the luminance of the object and its background. Thus, the new contrast C is the following:
262
C =
(L0 + Lv) (Lf + Lv)

(Lf LV)
L0 Lf
Lf LV
It is always verified that C < C, given that the dividend is the same and the divisor is always greater.
When veiling luminance Lv increases, the observed object may disappear from the field of vision, specially in the case of astronomic
observations when a star or celestial object with a very weak luminance L0 is under study.
14.4. Zoning system

Potential contradictions between photometric exigencies related to night- time human activity, security for vehicle and pedestrian traffic,
quality of life, integrity of environment, properties, goods, etc. and light pollution or night- time luminous glow in the sky which makes
astronomic observations of celestial objects difficult, must be approached to adopt solutions.
As far as environment is concerned, when a polluting activity cannot be totally controlled, the basic idea consists in avoiding that
environmental consequences due to pollution damage equally all areas or situations. The zoning system does not stop environmental
pollution, but it is valid as a reference frame for environmental friendly legislation and regulation.
In order to limit interferences produced by light pollution to astronomical observatories known as "point of reference", the introduction
of the zoning system answers two goals. On the one hand, it allows to establish lighting requisites in an area where the "point of
reference" is located. On the other hand, it eases the task of stipulating lighting requirements in other areas, adjacent or not, to the
particular area where the "point of reference is located.
ZONE CLASSIFICATION
DESCRIPTION
E1
DARK SURROUNDING AREAS: International category astronomic observatories
E2
LOW BRIGHTNESS AREAS: Rural areas
E3
AVERAGE BRIGHTNESS AREAS: Residential urban areas
E4
HIGH BRIGHTNESS AREAS: High night- time activity in urban centers

Chart 1. Description of zoning system.
National parks and areas with a special natural beauty will receive the same treatment as the "E 1" zone, as far as installed upper
hemisphere flux limitations go, as established in Chart 2. Distance regime shown in Chart 4 is not applied to the rest of the zones.
14.5. Lamp selection criteria

Discharge lamp types are recommended. For motor traffic roads and urban areas, high pressure sodium lamps will be preferably used,
due to their high luminous efficacy (lm/W) and better colour performance than low pressure sodium lamps. These are recommended
in roads in the open, rural areas and areas requiring safety lighting. Likewise, in landscaped areas, old quarters, etc. high pressure
mercury lamps, metal halide, etc., may be used.
In "E 1" zones where the "point of reference" is located, (astronomical observatories of international category), it is recommended to
install low and high pressure sodium lamps, preferably using the latter.
14.6. Upper hemisphere flux limitations

Installed FHSinst upper hemisphere flux emitted by a luminaire is defined as the one directed over the horizontal plane. Such a plane
corresponds to the angle = 90 in the (C,) representation system. The hemisphere flux is expressed in a percentage of the total flux
emitted by the luminaire.
In Chart 2, upper hemisphere flux maximum limits or installed values FHSinst are established for each of the areas.
263
ZONE CLASSIFICATION
INSTALLED FHSinst UPPER HEMISPHERE FLUX (%)
E1
E2
0-5
E3
0-15
E4
0-25
Chart 2. Limit values for the installed upper hemisphere flux.
As a way of an example, Chart 3 contains the type of astronomic observations possible for each zone.
ZONE CLASSIFICATION
ASTRONOMIC ACTIVITIES
E1
International Category Observatories
E2
Academic and Postgraduate Studies Observatories
E3
Amateur Observatories
E4
Sporadic Observations
Chart 3. Astronomic activities possible for each zone.
Nevertheless, in the case of lighting of highways and dual carriageways, important urban routes, by-passes, etc. it is recommended to
install luminaires with an Installed FHSinst 5% upper hemisphere flux.
In the case of pedestrian lighting, as well as artistic with lanterns, historic devices, etc., an FHSinst 25% is suggested
When the life of lighting installations is exhausted, or renovation is needed for any reason, it is recommended to install luminaires with
the upper hemisphere flux limitations shown above in this section.
It is advisable to have a replacement program of existent luminaires whose installed upper hemisphere flux is greater than 25%
(FHSinst/25%), installing luminaires which comply with the values recommended in this section.
14.7. Other characteristics of luminaires

Considering that the performance of a luminaire is the ratio between the flux emitted by the luminaire and the flux produced by the
lamp, for lighting installations of traffic motor roads, it is suggested to install preferably luminaires with a performance equal or above
70% (clear tubular lamp) or 60% (opal ovoid lamp).
Likewise, it is suggested that luminaires used in the lighting of pedestrian areas, artistic lanterns, historic devices, etc. will be provided
with an optical block, both to control light emission for the upper hemisphere and to increase the utilization factor for the lower
hemisphere.
In all examples, luminaire photometric distribution will be considered to be the most adequate one to obtain the maximum energetic
efficiency of the installation.
14.8. Distances between zones and point of reference

Light pollution or night- time luminous glow in the sky of a specific zone, for example, the particular area where the "point of reference"
is located (international category astronomic observatories), is due to the dimensions of such a zone and to its own lighting, as well
as lighting of the neighboring or adjacent areas. Thus, lighting of those areas around that which contains the "point of reference" must
be considered.
Lighting influence of those neighboring or adjacent areas over the total light pollution in the "point of reference", depends on distances
between the borders of the zones and the "point of reference".
In Chart 4, distances in Km. recommended between limits for each zone (E 1, E 2, E 3, E 4) and the "point of reference" are
established.
264
REFERENCE POINT
DISTANCE BETWEEN LIMITS IN ZONES
ZONE
E1-E2
E2-E3
E3-E4
E1
10
100
10
E2
E3
E4
WITHOUT LIMITS
Chart 4. Minimum distances in Km. between limits for each zone.
For the correct use of Chart 4, the zone where the "point of reference" is located must be first selected. Afterwards, in Chart 4, the
minimum distance in Km. is obtained, where the following zone begins, and so on for the rest of adjacent areas.
Values recorded in Chart 4 have been deduced from practical experience, even when the number of cases under study has been
limited.
14.9. Pavement photometric characteristics

Whenever constructive characteristics, composition and execution systems are ideal with respect to texture, slip- resistance, flatness,
surface drainage, etc., it is advisable to use pavements whose characteristics and reflexive properties are adequate for public lighting
installations. The aim is to achieve the maximum luminance and uniformity to an equal illuminance, thus, reaching, a greater separation
between aiming points in roadways.
Pavement luminosity of a roadway is directly linked to its photometric properties, and to the pavement average luminance coefficient
Q0, to be exact. Hence, given identical illuminance, the higher such a coefficient is, so will roadway luminance be. TI disability glare will
be lower. The specular factor S1 determines to what extent characteristics of the pavement, respect to reflection of incident light,
separate from those of a surface which secures a perfect diffused reflection. This happens in such a way that, illuminance being equal,
the lower the S1 specular factor is the greater luminance uniformities.
From all this, it may be deduced that, whenever possible in roadways, it is convenient to use pavements with an average luminance
coefficient or degree of luminosity Q0 as high as possible, and whose S1 specular factor is low.
14.10. Lighting level temporal variations

In traffic routes, pedestrian areas, cycle paths, etc., luminous levels may be reduced during certain hours at night, whenever users
security is guaranteed.
In concrete places, with high percentages of night- time accidents, pedestrian areas with a considerable risk of criminality, etc., it is
recommended not to perform temporal variations in lighting levels, due to security reasons.
Under any circumstances will reductions go under the advisable lighting level for traffic security and pedestrian movement.
Reduction of lighting levels by means of aiming points turn off is not advisable. Supposing that such a procedure is used, minimum
uniformities established in C.I.E. publications must be maintained.
Reduction through regulation systems is considered to be the most adequate procedure because it avoids shadowy areas and light
walls which make vision difficult; at the same time, uniformities are maintained.
265
14.11. Recommendations to reduce light pollution

Possible alternatives to reduce light pollution or night- time lighting glow in the sky are the following:
- to switch off advertising and decorative lighting from a certain hour onwards.
- to direct light downwards and not upwards whenever possible, especially lighting for edifices and monuments (Fig. 1).
NO
YES
YES
Figure 1
-
If there is no possibility to direct lighting downwards and not upwards, use screens and paralumens to avoid dispersion of
light beam (Fig. 2).
NO
YES
YES
Figure 2
-
To install lighting equipments which will reduce the dispersion of light on the horizontal plane of the luminaire, with
minimum values or even none over such plane (Figs. 3 and 4).
NO
YES
Figure 3
266
YES
NO
Figure 4
-
For glare to be minimum, direct light ray beams downwards keeping them under 70. If mounting height is increased, light
ray beams shoud be lowered. In places with low environmental light, glare may be very disturbing. Due to this reason,
positioning, aiming or orientation of luminaires may be carefully attended (Fig. 5).
YES
O.K.
90
70
<70
NO
Figure 5
-
When possible, it is recommended to install luminaires with an asymmetric reflector which will permit to maintain their
front closing parallel or almost parallel to the surface that needs to be illuminated (Fig. 6).
NO
YES
Figure 6
-
In order to avoid installing excess of light, recommendations which fix levels to light different tasks with tolerances permited
must be observed.
In the case of small safety lighting installations and house lighting, there are two solutions:
Passive detectors of infrared rays may be effectively used if correctly installed and lined. In general, a 150 W. halogene
lamp is more than enough. 300/500 W. lamps provide too much lighting, greater glare and darker and more emphasized
shadows.
267
Permanent illuminations with low brightness during all night. are equally acceptable. In the case of a porch in a house, a
compact fluorescent lamp of 9 W. (600 lm.) is adequate for most cases.
- For motor traffic lighting, flux emitted above the horizontal plane must be reduced and close light must be restricted.
14.12. Apendix: "Recommended orientative values for limiting bothering light

coming from exterior lighting installations"
Division 5 of the C.I.E. elaborated a roughdraft of a technical report "Guide on the limitation of the effects of bothering light coming
from exterior lighting installations" through its Technical Committee TC 5-12, at the end of 1995 .
Given its empirical nature and subject to modifications resulting from observing parameters included in the mentioned Guide, the
most adequate attitude seems to be including such parameters as a way of orientation and not as obligatory values to be applied.
This way, their incorporation has been performed by means of limitation charts like an appendix and not as part of the present
chapter. The intention being that consignated valued will be compared with our own experience in our country.
Five types of specific effects produced by bothering lighting coming from exterior lighting installations may be considered. These are
the following:
Effects on astronomical observations
Lighting engineering parameters implied are:
- Night- time lighting of the sky by dispersion of light coming from exterior lighting installations (night- time luminous glow). It depends
on the (FHSinst) installed upper hemisphere flux as well as on the reflected flux.
- Spectral characteristics of night- time luminous glow. It is equivalent to speaking about wavelengths coming from luminous
emissions (types of lamps).
- Direct light on the astronomical observatory itself.
Effects on residents
Lighting engineering parameters to be considered are the following:
- Vertical illuminance (EV) on face surfaces, for example, bedroom windows.
-Luminance (L) of luminaires, given the fact that their direct vision may be disturbing. Due to the difficulty in predetermining such
luminance, this parameter is substituted by luminous intensity () of the source of light in the potential direction of the bothering
source of light.
Effects on citizens
Lighting engineering parameters to bear in mind when talking about the effects of lighting on citizens in general (passers-by, tourists,
etc.) are the following:
- Average luminance (Lm) of surfaces of vertical faces in edifices. Sometimes, as a consequence of excessive lighting, they may be
bothering instead of highlighting decorative or ornamental aspects.
Effects on users of transportation systems
Significative lighting engineering parameters are the following:
- Increase of threshold contrast (TI) which expresses limitation of disturbing glare in the lighting of motor roads. This also constitutes
the measurement through which a loss of sight caused by such glare is quantified.
- Visual caos originated by signalling observation against bright backgrounds produced by intense luminous sources.
Effects on transportation signalling systems
Significative lighting engineering parameters are the following:
- Disturbing glare represented by an increase in the threshold area (), defined as the amount of extra contrast, with regards to the
original contrast, necessary to see the object again when there is glare.
- In case transportation systems work near lighting installations, as in the case of maritime transport, aviation, etc., relevant authorities
will establish adequate norms.
According to the classification of zones established in Chart 1, recommendations as a way of orientation for limiting bothering or
discomforting light coming from exterior lighting installations, are expressed as maximum values in the following chart:
268
ZONE
NIGHT- TIME
LIGHT IN WINDOWS
LUMINOUS
EV (lux)
GLOW
INTENSITY OF SOURCE
Luminance in
edifices***
Disturbing
Lm (cd/m2)
glare
%
Before
After
Before **
After
IN THE SKY
lighting
lighting
reduced
reduced
After reduced
FHSinst %
time
time
time
time
time
E1
1*
10
E2
50
0.5
10
CLASSIFICATION
E3
15
10
100
1.0
10
15
E4
25
25
10
100
2.5
25
15
Chart 5. Limitations of bothering light coming from exterior lighting installations.

FHSinst
Maximum permited percentage of installed upper hemisphere flux in percentage.
EV
Vertical illuminance in lux.
Luminous intensity in Kilocandelas (Kcd.).
Lm
Average luminance in cd/m2.
Contrast threshold increase in percentage.
Acceptable only for lighting installations of motor traffic roads.
**
Applicable to each source of light in the potential direction of the bother.
***
In order to avoid excessive lighting, luminance is limited in edifices. It must coincide with the general luminosity of the
area.
269
270
BIBLIOGRAPHY
BIBLIOGRAPHY
IES Lighting Guide: The Outdoor Environment.
IES Lighting Guide: Sports.
IES Code for Interior Lighting.
IDAE: Eficiencia energtica y medioambiental en iluminacin.
ADAE: Gua sobre la iluminacin de interiores.
Frdergemeinschaft Gutes Licht: Good Lighting for Schools and Educational Establishments.
Frdergemeinschaft Gutes Licht: Good Lighting for Safety on Roads, Paths and Squares.
Frdergemeinschaft Gutes Licht: Good Lighting for Offices and Office Buildings.
Frdergemeinschaft Gutes Licht: Good Lighting for Trade and Industry.
Frdergemeinschaft Gutes Licht: Good Lighting for Sports Facilities.
Frdergemeinschaft Gutes Licht: Prestige Lighting.
Castejn Santamara: Tecnologa elctrica. Ed: McGraw Hill.
Fsica. Paul A. Tipler. Ed. Revert, S.A. 3 edicin.
Electricidad y Magnetismo. Francis W. Sears. Ed. Aguilar.
Equipos auxiliares para lmparas de descarga. Antonio Vela Snchez, Juan Jos Garrido Vzquez.
Sistema elctrico para lmparas de descarga. Antonio Vela Snchez, Juan Jos Garrido Vzquez.
Recomendaciones para la iluminacin de carreteras y tneles. Ministerio de Fomento.
J.I. Urraca Pieiro: Tratado de alumbrado pblico. Ed: Donostiarra, S.A.
Julio Arias Alfonso Ramos: Luminotecnia Prctica. Indalux Iluminacin Tcnica, S.L. (1990).
Jess Feij Muoz: Instalaciones de iluminacin en la arquitectura. Ed: Secretariado de publicaciones, Universidad de Valladolid.
Manual de Iluminacin. Philips Iluminacin (1997).
J.A. Taboada. Manual de Luminotecnia. Ed. Dossat, S.A. (4 edicin).
Catlogo General de Lmparas y Equipos, 1998/1999/2000. Philips.
Catlogo de Lmparas. Sylvania.
Catlogo General de Luz, 1998/1999/2000. Osram.
Spectrum. Catlogo General de lmparas. General Electric Company.
Catlogo Descarga y Fluorescencia ELT.
Catlogo General ETI.
Catlogo 2001 SLUZ.
Catlogo General 2002. Indalux Iluminacin Tcnica, S.L.
Publication CIE n 18.2 (1983): The Basis of Physical Photometry.
271
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Publication CIE n 19/2.1 (1981): An Analytic Model for Describing the Influence of Lighting Parameters upon Visual Performance.
Publication CIE n 19/2.2 (1981): An Analytic Model for Describing the Influence of Lighting Parameters upon Visual Performance.
Publication CIE n 20 (1972): Recommendations for the Integrated Irradiance and the Spectral Distribution of Simulated Solar
Radiation for Testing Purposes.
Publication CIE n 24 (1973): Photometry of Indoor Type Luminaires with Tubular Fluorescent Lamps.
Publication CIE n 27 (1973): Photometry of Luminaires for Street Lighting.
Publicacin CIE n 29.2 (1986): Gua de iluminacin interior.
Publication CIE n 30.2 (1982): Calculation and Measurement of Luminance and Illuminance in Road Lighting.
Publication CIE n 31 (1976): Glare and Uniformity in Road Lighting Installations.
Publication CIE n 33 (1977): Depreciation of Installations and their Maintenance.
Publication CIE n 34 (1977): Road Lighting Lantern and Installation Data-photometrics, Classification and Performance.
Publication CIE n 38 (1977): Radiometric and Photometric Characteristics of Materials and their Measurement.
Publication CIE n 42 (1978): Lighting for Tennis.
Publication CIE n 43 (1979): Photometry of Floodlights.
Publication CIE n 44 (1979): Absolute Methods for Reflection Measurements.
Publication CIE n 45 (1979): Lighting for Ice Sports.
Publication CIE n 46 (1979): A Review of Publications on Properties and Reflection Values of Material Reflection Standards.
Publication CIE n 47 (1979): Road Lighting for Wet Conditions.
Publication CIE n 49 (1981): Guide on the Emergency Lighting of Building Interiors.
Publicacin CIE n 52 (1982): Clculos para iluminacin interior.
Publication CIE n 53 (1982): Methods of Characterizing the Performance of Radiometers and Photometers.
Publication CIE n 55 (1983): Discomfort Glare in the Interior Working Environment.
Publication CIE n 57 (1983): Lighting for Football.
Publication CIE n 58 (1983): Lighting for Sports Halls.
Publication CIE n 60 (1984): Vision and the Visual Display Unit Work Station.
Publication CIE n 61 (1984): Tunnel Entrance Lighting.
Publication CIE n 62 (1984): Lighting for Swimming Pools.
Publication CIE n 67 (1986): Guide for the Photometric Specification and Measurement of Sports Lighting Installations.
Publication CIE n 84 (1989): The Measurement of Luminous Flux.
Publication CIE n 85 (1989): Solar Spectral Irradiance.
Publication CIE n 92 (1992): Guide to the Lighting of Urban Areas.
Publication CIE n 93 (1992): Road Lighting as an Accident Countermeasure.
Publication CIE n 95 (1992): Contrast and Visibility.
272
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Publicacin CIE n 96 (1992): Fuentes de luz elctrica. Estado del arte-1991.

Publication CIE n 97 (1992): Maintenance of Indoor Electric Lighting Systems.
Publication CIE n 98 (1992): Personal Dosimetry of UV Radiation.
Publication CIE n 99 (1992): Lighting Education.
Publication CIE n 100 (1992): Fundamentals of the Visual Task of Night Driving.
Publication CIE n 102 (1993): Recommended File Format for Electronic Transfer of Luminaire Photometric Data.
Publication CIE n 109 (1994): A Method of Predicting Corresponding Colours under Different Chromatic and Illuminance
Adaptations.
Publication CIE n 110 (1994): Spatial Distribution of Daylight.
Publication CIE n 112 (1994): Glare Evaluation System for Use within Outdoor Sports and Area Lighting.
Publication CIE n 114 (1994): CIE COLLECTION in Photometry and Radiometry.
Publicacin CIE n 115 (1995): Recomendaciones para el alumbrado de calzadas de trfico motorizado y peatonal.
Publication CIE n 117 (1995): Discomfort Glare in Interior Lighting.
Publication CIE n 118 (1995): CIE COLLECTION in Colour and Vision.
Publication CIE n 129 (1998): Guide for Lighting Exterior Work Areas.
Publication CIE n 130 (1998): Practical Methods for the Measurement of Reflectance and Transmittance.
Publication CIE n 132 (1999): Desing Methods for Lighting of Roads
Reglamento Electrotcnico para Baja tensin. Ed: Paraninfo.
AFE: Recommandations relatives lclairage des installations sportives. (1992).
rea de I+D, Departamento de proyectos de alumbrado. Indalux Iluminacin Tcnica, S.L. (Abril-96).
Norma UNE 20056: Lmparas de filamento de tungsteno para iluminacin general.
Norma UNE 20064 (1973): Lmparas tubulares de fluorescencia para iluminacin general.
Norma UNE-EN 60927 (1990): Aparatos arrancadores y cebadores (excepto los de efluvios).
Norma UNE 20152 (1981): Balastos para lmparas fluorescentes.
Norma UNE 72150 (1984): Niveles de iluminacin/Definiciones.
Norma UNE 72151 (1985): Niveles de iluminacin/Especificacin.
Norma UNE 72152 (1985): Niveles de iluminacin/Clasificacin y designacin.
Norma UNE 72153 (1985): Niveles de iluminacin/Asignacin a tareas visuales.
Norma UNE 72160 (1984): Niveles de iluminacin/Definiciones.
Norma UNE 72161 (1985): Niveles de iluminacin/Especificacin.
Norma UNE 72162 (1985): Niveles de iluminacin/Clasificacin y designacin.
Norma UNE 72163 (1984): Niveles de iluminacin/Asignacin a tareas visuales.
Norma UNE-EN 60598-1 (1996): Luminarias. Parte 1. Requisitos generales y ensayos.
273
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Norma UNE-EN 60598-2-01 (1993): Luminarias. Parte 2. Requisitos particulares y ensayos. Seccin 1: Luminarias fijas de uso
general.
Norma UNE-EN 60598-2-02 (1993): Luminarias. Parte 2. Reglas particulares. Seccin 2: Luminarias empotradas.
Norma UNE-EN 60598-2-03 (1993): Luminarias. Parte 2. Reglas particulares. Seccin 3: Luminarias para alumbrado pblico.
Norma UNE-EN 60598-2-04 (1993): Luminarias. Parte 2. Reglas particulares. Seccin 4: Luminarias porttiles de uso general.
Norma UNE-EN 60598-2-05 (1993): Luminarias. Parte 2. Reglas particulares. Seccin 5: Proyectores.
Norma UNE-EN 60598-2-06 (1993): Luminarias. Parte 2. Reglas particulares. Seccin 6: Luminarias con transformador integrado
para lmparas de filamento de wolframio.
Norma UNE-EN 60598-2-08 (1993): Luminarias. Parte 2. Reglas particulares. Seccin 8: Luminarias porttiles.
Curso bsico de Ergonoma. Santiago Gonzlez Gallego. Colegio Oficial de Peritos e Ingenieros Tcnicos Industriales de Valladolid.
Documentos Tcnicos: La Iluminacin en los Lugares de Trabajo. Instituto Nacional de Seguridad e Higiene en el Trabajo. Ministerio
de Trabajo y Seguridad Social.
Gua Tcnica: Lugares de Trabajo (interpretacin y aplicacin del R.D. 486/1997 de 14 de Abril). Instituto Nacional de Seguridad e
Higiene en el Trabajo. Ministerio de Trabajo y Seguridad Social.
274

26 Lighting-Handbook PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

26 Lighting-Handbook PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter 1.

Dual nature of light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

LIGHTING ENGINEERING 2002

LIGHTING ENGINEERING 2002

Chapter 1. THE LIGHT

1.1. General remarks

1.2. Wave characteristics

LIGHTING ENGINEERING 2002

Chapter 1. THE LIGHT

= 1 , the equation above is transformed into:

f = (s-1 = cycles/second = Hz)

1.3. Frequency spectrum

LIGHTING ENGINEERING 2002

Chapter 1. THE LIGHT

DSpectral distribution according to lamp manufacturer

Visible light spectral distribution

Figure 2. Classification of visible spectrum.

Radiation of a continuous spectrum source

LIGHTING ENGINEERING 2002

Spectral distribution for a normal day light

Chapter 1. THE LIGHT

Spectral distribution for an incandescent lamp

Radiation of a discontinuous spectrum source

Spectral distribution for a cold white coloured fluorescent lamp

Also, the specific potency in mW/nm.wavelength is usually given in the ordinates.

Spectral distribution for a high pressure mercury lamp

1.4. Dual nature of light

LIGHTING ENGINEERING 2002

Chapter 1. THE LIGHT

LIGHTING ENGINEERING 2002

Chapter 1. THE LIGHT

LIGHTING ENGINEERING 2002

Human eye as a light reception organ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Structural description of the eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Eye sensitivity curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

LIGHTING ENGINEERING 2002

LIGHTING ENGINEERING 2002

Chapter 2. THE EYE

2.1. Human eye as a light receptor organ

2.2. Structural description of the eye

Figure 1. Human eye constitution.

LIGHTING ENGINEERING 2002

Chapter 2. THE EYE

Practical consequences of the cone and rod function

Figure 2. Eye photosensitive part. Behaviour of cones and rods.

2.3. Image formation

LIGHTING ENGINEERING 2002

Chapter 2. THE EYE

Figure 3. Image formation and its rectification in the brain.

Crystalline lens (controls accommodation)

Lens (adjusts distance between lens and film)

Pupil (controls adaptation)

Diaphragm - shutter (adapts exposition and amount of light)

Retina (creates images)

Film (creates images)

2.4. Eye sensitivity curve

* C.I.E.: International Commission on Illumination (Commission Internationale de lEclairage).

LIGHTING ENGINEERING 2002

Chapter 2. THE EYE

LIGHTING ENGINEERING 2002

Chapter 2. THE EYE

"K" is, thus, a relative value between luminances.

K > 0 contrast is positive (the object is lighter than its background).